Home

document: Manual, complete

1. IBB IBBEBE SilverFast Manual 6 9 File formats 248 6 9 File formats SilverFaste Manual E E E c c Focus switch Manual focus indicator A Attention Which of the focus functions available will depend on the current scanner model Some scanner support all focussing functions Other scanners instead only support switching auto focus on or off 6 10 Focussing the Scanner A few scanners feature a original focussing function As known from conventional photography the focus point can be shifted Not only can it be altered in distance to the original but also can it be moved freely to any spot on the image This function makes it pos sible to compensate for material roughness of the original Many slide positives are placed in relatively thick frames or are convex in shape which when not taken into account would cause defo cussing of the image By clicking on the auto focus symbol the respective focussing mode is turned on or off refer next page a eee ee Il 1i 4 eos Sibrarrast I SilverFast Ai 2 n t a Sean Type 36 2488 MA tefal aene sel Fier Ama Sharpen 4l v Serpng Save Ea image Tyee Standard a Bi Hime arimei t 4 E nagma Wale Di
2. E r Caecel a f tme 3 m 4 seed prm trir eee B awi kan Em kise Changing the Position of a Mask move By click dragging the active mask area can be shifted as a whole within the prescan window i De activating a Mask no mask By means of the menu entry no mask an existing mask for the active layer is de activated The mask will not be deleted SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 171 Displaying an Inactive Mask Area If the selective colour correction dialogue window was closed with an OK the inactive mask area in the prescan window is displayed in dimmed form when pressing Cmd Alt keys simultaneously Ctrl Alt for Windows The active mask areas are not dimmed Mac E3 ALT Win CONTROL ALT Removing a Mask lt delete gt kn naz A dialogue window can be opened here Dres bennt New mask Change mask where all previously saved masks are shown ra aski ED Invert A single mask can be marked by clicking and arash R Move TA deleted from the menu By clicking while hold ing down the Shift key several masks can Body be marked and deleted from the menu By NOE clicking while holding down the Command A ees rows of masks can be marked and deleted Cose C teave car right from the menu flower Pa B J CN 172 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction Si
3. Mask Edge Size 0 05 If the result is satisfactory close the Options dialogue by clicking OK The setting chosen here will then be valid for all mask edges SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 169 dho mask Maw mask Change masks einvertz Mee Delete car right fewer Changing a Mask On layer 3 of the left picture on the left only the sleeve has a mask Arm In the picture on the right the emblem has been added to the previous mask xo mask aHa mask j Change masks Min v t z Dalete gt wf Mask 1 car reght fiver Changing of a Mask The existent masks may be altered at any time To do this simply choose the desired mask in the mask menu Adding to Mask Press Shift and draw desired addition i The mouse pointer will display a plus symbol Subtracting from Mask Press Alt and draw desired sub traction The mouse pointer will display a minus sym bol bria Cops Com i le s i i a H ET Hj Type cue can Te cue COE Peaux iae ei Pai Rav ine Masks l a unk im H ES ET al EEEESNEZUEDEESO W ir x E m T a a i mr i z BJ 4 a a kW ml 1a i a jee eee A eS k Li j d yy Ow S I Belated Inversion of a Mask inverse The menu invert is a switch It allows switching between the pre viously active mask area and the previously inactive ar
4. imag hd eet tae Ead Esa i gm at EE PER IL EI E E IEEE E I TELE X I z 5 Tu z n prom ru 3 iir E 2 Fal ik eth a i indes Fi ia rit i LI bmi W dud ou l m Ld au ww ai i 1 besii ET bmn Fue din bar d in lt Im wrr p m Leer Atir icm rar i cria 242 jan ie Tne xay a i qis gi 2 eee eo a mm imc Aud ow isis a um samana n iidem Lehi Hibik Dra nd arbem dun E a mr Hmmm i ipiis heb dl r er n mi qad a pi Autori Hi dill fan tir oe Ara Dtr sia jain zer R Sip Puu Tenge tm aor i her ME LD e bekar era bw on Mb Enr bime a Uy A Por Ha feo U Rr lev v lu caer i ram ifs m rak awr mur Prise sanaj lee kerdi amil T iai chacun pn ln j ES jemem fel peine ie pm bee LENT IN Pela be SF Statistic txt abun j SilverFast Manual 5 8 Expert dialogue 189 190 5 8 Expert dialogue SilverFast Manual r s oS _ r ma a i gt E zx di i ah bd i e Li a z 3 Chapter 6 Special Functions All additional and special functions are described in Chapter 6 Some of these functions are scanner specific and may behave dif ferently depending on the combination of the software and hard ware and some menus may differ or not be displayed at all 6 Special Functions 6 1 The Densitometer 6 2 Improving the Sharpness of Artwork
5. 1 Standard Mode M tgam 7 Only one colour channel is shown in the dialogue window in this mode By means of the icons above the graphic you can choose between total presentation and individual channels oetting lights depths and middles can be done by click drag ging the small triangles below the graphic wan E Cancel a 2 Three Part Parallel Presentation Histogram All three colour channels are each shown as a single graphic in this mode Dragging the numbered vertical lines in the individual diagrams ill will set the lights depths and midtones The numbers at the HE lines indicate the amount of shading that will be used for light l amp midtone and depth In addition you can switch between total presentation ana hl sere Dx the presentation of the individual channels by using the icons PRG Sen NE Ta above the graphic gt Cancel foc SilverFast Manual 5 3 Histogram 135 All three colour channels are displayed one after the other in a graphic together with the total curve Setting lights depths and middles is done by click dragging the small triangles below the graphic A www A 3 A Staggered Three Part Presentation add ew e i higiga hia Shadow aa D Wa Max TOG T lo zn Coler Space Compreszion 1 x Gettin w im ox Fem d E Cura 9 a E Histogram Channel Selection To choose a single colour channel in
6. 7 3 Addendum SilverFast Manual 25 High scan resolution High scan resolution is important only in line art scans It should be between 800 to 1000 dpi depending on the printer resolution Automatic Calculation of Optimal Scan Resolution in SilverFast The calculation of optimal scan resolution results in maximum quality less memory load and faster process ing For this very reason the automatic calculation of optimal scan resolution was integrated into SilverFast Having chosen the quality factor of 1 5 you only have to input the desired output line screen 150 line screen and the required output size SilverFast automatically sets the optimal scan resolution for you Calculating the Scan Resolution The best possible scanning resolution is very important and should be well thought out the more the better does not always hold true To Clarity Shades of greyscale images are converted into dots made of a 16x16 matrix when imaged on to an image setter Ideally a screen ing dot contains 256 individual pixels When a photograph is scanned and printed onto a 150 line screen each greyscale dot is converted into a 16x16 matrix An image setter with a resolution of 2540 dpi is just capable of imaging such screening dots oince there are losses in the process of analog digital conversion an additional Q factor Q for Quality is introduced This factor is generally 1 4 and with exception 2 0 As a result the fo
7. Expert Mode Activating the Expert Mode Clicking onto the Expert button will extend the SRD dialogue and show the second alternative method s settings to eliminate longish artifacts In addition you will the slider Extension Both alternative methods can be used either alone by themselves or in conjunction with each other It is advised to allocate a sepa rate layer for each of the different methods 1 Slider Environment Size This slider is only available in SilverFast full versions and can only be seen after activating the expert dialogue With this slider you can precisely control the defect border Param eter values are small and are usually between 1 and 5 vi Dust and Scratch Removal Defect Type fe All Detection ep 25 Defect size oq 1 O White O Black vi Dust and Scratch Removal Defect Type All O White O Black Detection c D p 7 25 Defect size eM 1 000 Intensity vironment size eweyan ER 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD SilverFast Manual Dust and Scratch Removal Navigator Bm jn 1 B e e See Dan Mi Dust and Scratch Removal Defect Type Mail O White Black Detection emp lbs Defect size eM ES SEE a 3 Environment size emp 4 vi Longish scratch removal fe Black fe Vertical Length OM Width wazan j nana Contrast eel Continuity y
8. Se pipa DOO te pale d aseri tx The advantage is that by utilizing _ a zoom by means of the magnifying glass SilverFast can retrieve data that is already available and immediately show the enlarged preview without scanning it again The first prescan will therefore take somewhat longer than normal If the selected zoom still lies within the data parameters the magnifying glass will turn green e If SilverFast has to interpolate the data you may already see single pixels in the prescan the magnifying glass will e turn red You can still choose a new prescan from your hardware with a click of the prescan button In this way you can be assured that the most important user interface the preview always has optimal resolution 100 4 Prescan concept SilverFast Manual E 2 Setting of fixed measure points Multiple FixPip please refer chapter Multiple Densi tometer Fixed Pipette MidPip4 page 145 Zoom and Difficult Corrections In order to carry out advanced corrections in Si verFast especially when you need to base your corrections on more image details SilverFast s zooming concept is the ideal solution Please follow the Outlined steps below 1 Zoom the selection you want to see in more detail 2 Fix a densitometer point to monitor the output values In order to fix a densitometer point press the Shift key and click on the desired spot on the imag
9. Welcome Dialogue In the new Si verFast versions a new active Welcome screen is displayed after launch P LU Weleame to SilverFast j 4mm SilverFast Ai p m e QuickTime Movies and Docamentation rmm HW Functions and Features S E COnlime Tips Tricki and Advice T Upgrade information for this Wersion SS T ucE NAN ip Continue to SibverFasi LL ad Show this dialeg at sarap ar Lane magi By means of the available buttons the user may directly access the respective functions of SilverFast and may also obtain information on current developments documentation hints and help For fully using these functions an internet connection has to be present QuickTime movies and documentation r A link to the web page containing all movies Functions and features A link to the highlights of SilverFast within the LaserSoftlmaging web site 26 1 2 Installation SilverFast Manual On line hints tricks and advice A EUT DT La r n B mn direct link to the SilverFast user Sear forum that fits the used SilverFast Silverfast zom version nem Upgrade information on current ver Ls Hiper am sion A small applet is launched D A e which checks for available updates amde oe or the currently used version lf so TT a the respective window of the Laser n Soft Imaging web site is opened etn Here the lates
10. 180 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction SilverFast Manual Changing a Colour Image to Grey Click onto an area where you need to adjust the grey and SC2G will recognise which colour this grey is originated from Above the relevant colour sector you will see a small right pointing triangle indicating that SC2G has recognised the original colour Selective Gray Correction Sherf asi MOA Ulm 4 amp SB3 Lil Selective Gray Correction Sike ast HOR Clown 4 amp HH til ET AES H C RGR Preview TU MES H CRGA Preview o EGER EI zi HE EIS 4 p eX Ta IA eegev ere het fea L4 Pe ere ee RA Changing brightness i yellaw ieee You can now begin your selective grey correction Clicking and holding the mouse on the small triangle at the top of the control will raise the brightness for the grey selected The bottom triangle will decrease the grey brightness You will see the number below the control increasing or decreasing accordingly as well as the image gets updated once you release the mouse By clicking onto RGB Pre xe view you can cross check which original colour your are effecting il Cannel J wa ND vin o 7 SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 181 Selective Gray Correction Saving Loading Deleting SC2G Settings oettings can be saved and reloaded just like other settings in SilverFast hme of AGA Da Cura Comep iu
11. After opening an image in S verFast HDH DC you can close the pixel lock and change output size and scaling without any influence on the file size The amount of pixels remains unchanged Please note dot screen and output resolution may not be altered Name Name Untitled frame Untitled frame Original em 2 at 3 2 O Factor Screen 1 5 400 ip Original Scale aaa P O Factor Scree 1 5 5T lp AN Attention The pixel lock is only available in the scanner independent versions of SilverFast such as HDR DC and PhotoCD SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 79 SilverFast v6 0 1r27 v e Prescan Scan RGB SilverFast Ai Fil Oak Frame Densitometer Device SU Nikon LSS Scan Mode Normal E Frame Set Save E f Options Quit Drag amp Drop In SilverFast it is now possible to directly generate scans via Drag amp Drop You simply need to click drag an optimized scan frame over the border of the prescan window and release it there If you release the mouse key after dragging it to a document opened in the background of a different application i e a letter in Microsoft Word the scan will fall right into the document In a different situation the scan can be written into a temporary file for Mac i e into Scrapbook or it will land on the desktop or Finder If the amount of available RAM is insufficient
12. LLL licr Faig kp zu Le rna ona y amana waman Lal EDS S1 e y PL i lu n re ilem kaz amada ciiin osa ku dik Hama mur era i eqil Bar sl d Le lm ben a r i zman rae C h RSS EH xml ber LL o um ey GELS mann ir miam EUG na Ux m drcum y rums FUE UH aT pa mee uum a S m nun minin a o cum Hoe em E m mimm Ej PERE ji Jir we DL DERTE Ci Garasi ni irs id n ponen ranr mm Fisi i d um MESH MESE e 408 6 16 Advanced print dialogue SilverFast Manual Picture Settings Standard Advanced Exposure 0 00 Colour Temperature 0 ai Picture Settings Standard Advanced 1 Brightness Midtone 4 Contrast Saturatior Image settings in SilverFastAiStudio The dialogue window Image settings known from the SilverFast DC and HDR versions has now been modified and implemented into Si verFastAiStudio A real time output histogram that shows the effects of all SilverFast settings on the final scan is shown The difference to a normal histogram is that this feature shows the target or final histogram This is the actual histogram that is also shown after the scan has been done All parameters that have been set in SilverFast are hence shown here A normal histogram that shows the source or input histogram which shows the image before scanning By pressing the Alt key in the normal histogram the display will show the target histogram
13. Preview Autc f Cancel Control Buttons Preview High resolution preview to DIGITAL ICE technologies monitor elimination of artifacts hardware based dust and scratch removal is not user control led and can only be Auto Activates intial slider setting Cancel Leaves the D amp S dialogue switched on or off digital without applying parameters Does not work with OK Appli i d black amp white nor Applies current parameters an Melano ODE closes control window technologies SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD 371 Workflow of SilverFastSRD Preview Scan Image Optimization 0G Gam gt Pu E o a A TI Start SRD amp 39RD SRD Automatic Manual Adjustment if required le e e e e e _ F pun and Scranch Renewal e Manual adjustments as required Check in Preview and Change Defect Type Detection Defect Size Intensity Masks OK and Scan TII NIE 2 f Frascan f Scan E Cuir 372 6 13 SilverFast SRD iSRD SilverFast Manual Cresa Scan RGB Quit eee mm Image Optimization Gradation global and selective col our correction in SilverFastAi Image Optimization Workflow with SilverFastSRD Briefly we will illustrate how an image will be optimized and SilverFast SRD dust and scratch removal be applied on the following pages 1 Preview scan Start SilverFast and initiate a preview scan Within
14. will be opened or placed in a different yet to ee be distinguished directory 2 Open Ae 4 Our The finished image is marked with a green dt F in the upper left corner when placed back into the aloum A numeric value is added behind Il the file name Name 1 jpg Aue lt gt lt gt Choose a Folder If the optimisation of all images is Pama Pietre E m done the final images may be relo e 7 cated directly out of the album into qun any different directory by means of Hes the export button Mae NN Bias Ey bane Lr I m Cuore Jl This function is only available with special SilverFast versions SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 287 Macintosh Click the header of the prescan win dow while keeping the Command key pressed Windows Use right mouse click in the prescan window This function is only available with special SilverFast versions Optimization by Si verFastJobManager The second possibility to optimize images is the passing on to the JobManager This is recommended if time is to be saved and several images or even entire directories are to be optimized The JobManager is activated by clicking the E respective button in the VL T toolbar The selected E images may then be passed on to the JobManager ess by the drag amp drop function and will be processed AIR r there E xl The selected images may directly be be ha
15. 490 7 5 Glossary SilverFast Manual SilverFast Manual 7 5 Glossary 491 492 7 5 Glossary SilverFast Manual SilverFast Manual 7 5 Glossary 493 2008 SilverFaste and LaserSoft Imaging are registered trademarks of LaserSoft Imaging AG Germany All mentioned trademarks are the protected trademarks of the respective owners Patents EP 1594301 EP 1744278 En 02 2010 LaserSoft Imaging AG Luisenweg 6 8 24105 Kiel Germany Tel 49 0 431 5 60 09 0 Fax 49 0 431 5 60 09 96 E Mail Info SilverFast com www SilverFast com
16. Completed old jobs can also be of additional interest They can be edited at any time and can be recalculated with new param eters 364 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual External internal data carrier network WWW Delivery and saving of all types of image files Macintosh or Windows Workstation SilverFast HDR SilverFastJobManager I l frame from prescan add image files i add to the JobManager best if sorted according to similar change window parameters and each saved in its own Job load Job 1 HER mm m m wa e select an image which is representative for all other images within the job change in processing mode image optimising checking already existing parameters set new parameters as in the scan software save the results copy parameters copy the parameters of the selected image to all others in the job eje e e save the job l Oo D Q Phe l o Q 9 Q a QO 53 x QO o o SilverFastHDR runs as a plug in in Adobe Photoshop or as a Twain module in many other applications render the jobs e select a target folder begin processing the job SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFastJobManager 365 Error Messages Source File is Missing SilverFast JM checks for the existence of the necessary source file during the loading of jobs If the files are not found in their original location the following d
17. Histogram o m LR a a a 12 Highlight L Shadow 96 2 Min Max 98 ww a a Color Space Compression 100 Color Cast Removal MV L i9 Cyan highlights set to 9 T I DAE cav L Se 1 e aries di 7 E Original with a cyan cast Auto Adjust and Colour Cast Removal By pressing the aperture button the active scan frame will undergo a highlight shadow optimisation with colour cast removal In the fol lowing three histograms it is easy to see the influence on the cyan magenta and yellow channels z Fz z Histogram Histogram emm joe oe A A a a a A fia Highlight L 7 Shadow 97 16 Highlight L Shadow 936 2 Min Max 98 2 Min Max 98 NT ww wv ww ee i a a a a 0 Color Space Compression 100 0 Color Space Compression 100 Color Cast Removal ye ox Color Cast Removal e x Magenta highlights set to14 Yellow highlights set to16 By setting the highlight for cyan to 996 magenta to 1496 and 16 for yellow the colour cast has been removed Cyan cast removed with auto adjust SilverFast Manual 5 1 Image auto adjust 117 Auto Adjust and Colour Cast Preservation Auto adjust reset If your image contains sunset colours a kind of reddish cast you In order to reset the auto adjust tool probably would like to keep this characteristic in the image In press the Alt key an
18. Prescan monochrome In case there is scanning in greyscale or black and white only you can speed up the prescan considerably by selecting Prescan monochrome filter has to be set to green or any colour except white Prescan Scan Faster In both these modes some of the scanner specific hardware functions such as a faster tray movement across the CCDs which results in a faster scans of lower quality is activated A precise general statement about the expected results however cannot be made SilverFast Manual Presets 65 Lamp Brightness This dialogue has a slider Exposure as Lamp Control well as an RGB histogram of the current preview image It is now possible to simulate the increase or decrease of the lamp brightness of the scanner and monitor the effect on the histogram and the preview window With this control overexposing bright areas which will show as clipping in the histogram can now immediately be avoided You do not have to wait until the scan is done and then have to start all over Limit Gamma Slope May be checked if much noise is encountered in the shadows The slope of the gamut curve which is especially steep in the shadows will then be reduced to an almost linear function e Albums Folder The location and the path fort he albums only SilverFast HDR DC DCPro may be adjusted here e Maximum Cache Size Adjustment for the cache mem
19. Use the first characters of the old name Specifies the number of characters that are to be used from the old file name By this means for example an old camera specific numerical system may be given new names that are added in front of the previous names of the files Use custom word The entered text will be added in 2nd position to all file names Use source folder name if this field is checked the name of the directory will be added in 3rd position of the new name Add the old index number to name by this field a new numerical system can be added to the file names in 4th posi tion SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 2723 Settings for new name Add the old index number to the name if checked this will M Use the first eee LET add the old already used file name in 5th position I Use custom word Add IPTC to file If IPTC information is to be entered e g Image author image rights etc it can be done here PC OS LM B Clicking the IPTC button opens the 2 respective dialog The IPTC dialogue is divided into 5 separate text fields By os means of the Previous Next buttons the different areas can be reached Caption Keywords af 2 Categories 3 Credits 3E 4 Origin wI Copyright 6 8 _ Use Source folder name Add an index to name Step size _ Add the old Index number to name A defined IPTC dialogue may be saved and reloaded at any latter time Expert
20. b The licensee may terminate this license upon written notice to LaserSoft Imaging AG under the terms and conditions of No 4 if he sends back the opened software package deletes the copy on his computer and any backup copy immediately 4 Warranty 1 SilverFast is provided as is LaserSoft Imaging AG does not warrant neither expressed nor implied the usefulness of the software SilverFast for a particular purpose or its merchant ability or the fitness for licensee s requirements Although every effort has been made to eliminate errors LaserSoftImaging AG does not warrant that SilverFast is free of errors 2 The licensee has to examine the software of considerable recognizable defects within 14 days These defects must be notified to LaserSoft magingAG in writing Hidden defects are to be notified upon recognition in writing Otherwise software and documentation are approved without reserve 3 At considerable defects LaserSoft Imaging AG has the choice of either providing the licensee with another version or to eliminate the defect within reasonable time If LaserSoftImaging AG is not able to allow use of the software within this time the licensee may reduce compensation or annihilate this contract 4 Upon assertion of warranty the licensee is obliged to send back software and proof of reception at the costs of LaserSoftImaging AG 9 Limitation of Liability In no event shall LaserSoft Imaging AG a distributor or authorized deale
21. wa as not available menu into the input field Xwc bm gem Gommahd 3 ss Waa not available hio Command R 6 not available SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 333 Action Navigator File Browser Navigation within image list Extend selection nuanua anaana nan Add selected images to printing page Add selected images to printing page Open directory a cre c dieit ca nce Back to superordinated directory if a directory is selected Back to superordinated directory if files are selected only Close directory iari diri doen io orans d if file browser is selected Define selected directory as Root if a directory is selected Macintosh Windows Arrow up down 6 Arrow up down keep Shift pressed keep Shift pressed za Alt arrow right Alt arrow right AIL EMO uaa su w wa K raa Alt Enter xo Arrow right aide eh pas oo e 8 Arrow right Arrow lette sis ot t Arrow left zx Alt arrow UD a ice nce aes Alt arrow up Arrow IBI s ots ra aires oes Arrow left ALFEMO a iaa ic hne Alt Enter 334 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual tibserFaat Ve Il dea SilverFast DC xa OU a f image Mowe 24 Eit Color Filter Sharpen USM H Setting m wj image Type Standard i r n ST Lalirmags
22. Iptc The meta data commands in sharp brackets within the text field will only lead to an actual printing of the data if the meta data entries are available in the image data Thus a meta data entry does not automatically lead to a printed text on the image An empty meta date will simply be ignored in the printout Insert all will cause all available meta data to be entered into the image text this can easily become a very large text Current date enters the current system date into the image text EXIF camera is a menu for camera specific meta data IPTC allows the embedding of IPTC meta data into the image text 314 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Adi all livay erdhth image height Biti ner ample Lorigprmssinn Photometric intergretatiam imagi descritor Samples per pixel Dominant nanie Expat lir times FN mber Exposure program Spectral sensitivity H speed rating az Exif versi n Add all Dare Time original Image file nanie rare Tir idygiriz n image file parh Lampanent configuration Lurrent date Compressed bits prr piel Svutter speed value Aperture value Brightness value Eu paya lir biis value Max aperrune walie Subject distance Metering made Light voirie Flash Focal length User Domient jul sec time Sul ser time original Sub aec rime digitized Enlar sgare Related zaund fle Exif interoperability IHO pointer Senta freq res
23. Lasso mask tool 1 Polygon mask tool a Brush mask tool 5 Using Masks In general all parameters set in S lverFast SRD will be applied to the whole image However mask technology should be used if an image has just a small number of very pronounced artifacts there are defects only in certain parts of the image or the subject means that Si verFast SRD is restricted to specific areas of the image A mask can be freely drawn with the mouse in the preview as well as in the Navigator window Mask tools available are Lasso Polygon and Brush Selection of mask tool Clicking onto the mask tool and hold ing the mouse depressed will bring up a mask tool selection pop up With the mouse still depressed you can now move to the desired mask tool and release the mouse Drawing a mask It is best to draw the mask in rough form in the navigator window and then add the finishing details in the large preview window 2 With the Lasso tool you can freely encircle any area of the image inside the preview or navigator window you want to apply the dust and scratch removal to 2 With the Polygon tool you can encircle any desired area with straight line segments by click drag click drag etc until hitting the start point again 5 With the Brush tool you can cover thin longish defects by just drawing over it Only these areas covered will be corrected by SilverFast SRD 6 13 SilverFa
24. Original Contrast 2 Contrast 6 SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD 391 8 Slider Continuity Bl Liegt nerabek aal With noisy images or when the scratch is inside a part of the Defect type White Black image with lots of details the value of the Continuity slider should Orientation Horizontal vertical bru eui Ema be readjusted between 0 and 10 A greater value will enable a Width Sr s better recognition of scratches in a difficult environment noisy or contr M very detailed images Original Continuity 1 Continuity 9 Remark In some cases the longish scratches are slightly bent Since this method is designed for horizontal or vertical scratches it is required to watch the parameter settings more closely For instance A horizontal scratch which is 120 long and 1 pixel of width and with a slight bent extends to 4 lines of the image cannot be recognized with values of 120 and 1 for length and width In stead a value of roughly 30 120 divided by 4 would be needed 392 6 13 SilverFast SRD iSRD SilverFast Manual iSRD LaserSoft Imaging Warning SilverFastiSRD is only available for certain scanners In SilverFast SE versions ISRD only works in automatic mode Please see our website for the current situation and compatible scanners SilverFastiSRD Dust and Scratch Removal with Infrared Technology The latest development in
25. Rendering laren perceptual Embedded HOC profiles Freies CC prie B Prot pto eroed Adobe RGB TIS Plug Pary CMT Fi j Apply Y cama Y Oe I _ Example Settings SilverFast Photoshop 5 02 Following is a selection of example settings for the SilverFast CMS dialogue with reference to Photoshop 5 02 RGB Output under Photoshop without Colour Management Under Photoshop File Colour Settings RGB Setup you have selected e g 9 Adobe RGB as your working colour space An ICC profile for this colour space should be exported so you can select it later in SilverFast To do this you can save the settings with save into the ICC folder of the operating system Now bring up SilverFast from the Photoshop Import menu Go to CMS under Options in the SilverFast main dialogue In Colour management select O Automatic under Internal gt Monitor Select RGB under Internal Output In this case select lt NONE gt or Calibration under Scanner Internal You can only use Calibration with SilverFast s own IT8 calibration In this example we left it at NONE Select Adobe RGB under Internal in section Profiles for ColorSync as the RGB profile which you have selected previously in Photoshop RGB Output with Colour Management You have selected an RGB colour space e g Adobe RGB under Photoshop Colour Settings RGB Setup For this you shoul
26. SilverFast Manual Auto Palette left SilverFast Ai right SilverFast DCPro Standard defaults in DC and HDR for camera RAW data Auto threshold for highlights 6 Auto threshold for shadows 1 Standard defaults in Ai for 48 Bit scanner RAW data Auto threshold for highlights 2 Auto threshold for shadows 2 a AN Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software Auto Defaults Aiia Puri dde Fluyblag ld 3 n a Has TurmiAcid Seater OU e Hihii Fiat i Shader Ligi Dolor Tan Ra moaxal Aure Paars bmi pe 1990 ud JinePFip lide Marner ty i tee 48 Auto threshold for Highlights and Shadows Determines the sensitivity 0 30 for the auto adjust Smaller values more sensitive Recommended values are 2 to 12 You can use RGB levels instead of pixel ratio when moving into the histogram by selecting Levels This function is efficient if you wish to optimise an image by only using auto adjust in order to remove base colour like a white or a black in the scan ning image A Attention Please be aware that when changing thresh olds highlight or shadow details can get lost This is due to possible clipping effects Highlight Offset Brightest Point Minimum value for the brightest point in 96 eg 396 Shadow Offset Darkest Point Maximum value for the darkest point in 96 eg
27. focal point defined by the user The scanner will then determine the opti mal focus prior to scanning and prescanning Eject button Use this button to eject the slide or the film strip or to rewind the inserted APS film depending on the kind of docu ment holder or film holder that has been installed Inserting the first or the second slide can be accomplished in this manner e g with automatic slide feeder SF 200 Dust and scratch removal Depending on SilverFast version and scanner model different functionalities of dust and scratch removal are available The corresponding buttons can be found in the vertical tools bar left hand of the big preview window SilverFast SRD All SilverFast versions contain SilverFast SRD as a means of removing dirt and scratches SilverFastiSRD This Infrared technology for detection and removal of dust and scratches is only available for some scan ners DIGITAL ICE technologies For some scanners the DIGITAL ICE technologies ICE may be used It works solely with the hardware of the scanner and enables the automatic removal of dirt and scratches from the image file Two intensities are avail able SRD ISRD is deactivated ISRD is active and running in automatic mode SRD ISAD is active and running in manual mode Clicking the bottom button opens the dialogue SRD ISRD is deactivated and CE is active SilverFast Manual 2 Overview 41 Er n Y E r F
28. p 1 m tJ aza yan ezsaa m Zr 1 x Ren chu VP HR OE T pug Alternatively an enlargement frame can be drawn by directly click dragging the mouse while holding the Ctrl key pressed By this method the magnifier button does not need to be clicked The current zoom level is again displayed in the value fields The maximum magnification has been reached if a white area is shown instead of the Plus symbol while keeping the Ctrl key pressed No further zooms are possible at this stage SilverFast Manual 4 Prescan concept 99 General Frame Densitometer m rara Optior s AT Ou b I n gt Prescan Scan RGB Quit Scan RGB 3 u Prescam as s tr X Quit High Resolution Prescan In order to process work more quickly with SilverFast a prescan can be selected which has a resolution that is up to eight times greater than actually necessary for a normal prescan Activation of high resolution prescan is done in the General pal ette found under Options Hi High resolution prescan v 1x 2X eiarmadak RCR Hl 3x Dre H Mra auch r F Teza N s ranan kaaa Tal m Dera ui Seming SHverFayt Defauits E Dg e Pctri cL H iri nos Selva hindisi L m Hera Ub dirk amc direka u D mie ar Carers F vadki licer a awana m ERR 00 fara 10 brbcar M dM dran Ru alem r T Tic
29. und Gerhards kalibriertem Monitor vom 040104 SilverFast Manual 7 1 Addendum AQ 1 Example Settings SilverFast Photoshop 7 In ADOBE Photoshop all colour settings have been integrated into one menu under Colour Settings It seems more complicated on first look but has become clearer structured in reality No changes were made to Photoshop 6 The same presets may be used Once set up you can save all as one setting and if required exchange with other settings Please carefully read the corresponding pages in your Photoshop manual Color Settings Settings PS7 CMYK f r Screens E r _ Advanced Mode r Working Spaces 4 Cancel RGB Adobe RGB 1998 f Load CMYK Eurostandard Coated 12 GCR Mittel f r Screens oy a f Gray Dot Gain 1596 o Save jJ Spot Dot Gain 15 H j vi Preview Color Management Policies RGB Preserve Embedded Profiles B CMYK Preserve Embedded Profiles B Gray Preserve Embedded Profiles H Profile Mismatches v Ask When Opening v Ask When Pasting Missing Profiles v Ask When Opening Description PS7 CMYK fur Screens Vorbereitung des Inhalts f r in Europa gultige Druckbedingungen Bei LaserSoft gedacht f r Screenshots nicht fur Halbtonbilder A32 71 Addendum SilverFast Manual IT8 calibration button will open the IT8 dialogue IT8 button coloured calibra tu tion is act
30. 2 Overview 39 E E The Tool bar in the Prescan Window A Note availability of this feature depends on the scanner model used T8 calibration is included with certain scanner models and available as an optional upgrade with others Info Display of the SilverFast welcome dialogue with information about installation version and activation By this it is also possible to return to the activation dialogue if additional functions are to be installed Help Opens PDF help text files for SilverFast Prescan rotation Rotates the pre scanned image by 90 degrees clockwise If the shift key is held down the image will be rotated counter clockwise Enables the user to correctly display landscape or portrait oriented images Prescan Preview mirroring Mirrors the pre scanned image hori zontally or vertically ScanPilot ImagePilot Will bring up ScanPilot ImagePilot who will automatically take you through the necessary steps to the finished scan JobManager Activates the Si verFast JobManager Automatic density This function allows the scanner to analyse the density range of the image prior to scanning and adjust the hardware correspondingly 2 e Overview SilverFast Manual D ya le 135 8 r1 m T m 2 hr Sia SAD a SRB B Focus he focus function can be set on automatic focal point exactly in the centre of the image or on manual
31. A value of e g 2096 means that all tones above 20 will be sharpened The lighter tones negatives from 096 to 2096 again remain unsharpened The slider sharpen up to sharpen from is important to prevent noise in images with shadows to become intensified by the USM e Light Contour dark Contour depending on the desired sharpness of the subject matter one or the other value can be intensified In most instances the values are set the same SilverFast Manual 6 3 Descreening 203 Shadows soft a check in the check box will determine that sharpen up to will be shown soft from that point on The pos sibility of noise appearing in images with shadows is mostly eliminated with a good combination of the sharpen up to and the shadow soft settings Example for Sharpening Bright Contour Dark Contour In order to achieve the desired sharpness results which will depend on the actual image you have to change one of the two value accordingly In general it is advised to keep both values the same Merely the sliders for bright dark edge have been changed in all four images Bright Contour 0 Bright Contour 40 Dark Contour 0 Dark Contour 60 Bright Contour 0 Bright Contour 100 Dark Contour 100 Dark Contour 0 204 6 2 USM Unsharp masking SilverFast Manual N Availability Studio versions have the new full functionality including the two full automatics and
32. Lis The size of the image to be printed can Name be set in the scaling dialogue in the Untitled frame Original Scale Frames palette mE nr e 2 8 250 0 Q Factor Screen b 1 5 60 perm 1 16 am a 228 dpi Pag Stop The printing menu is opened by clicking the print button in the Se AN D kan ben vertical button bar located left of the preview window The settings in this menu are dependant on the printer driver and vary respec tively Enter your settings here and start the printout E E Format f r Any Printer i Pager Size Ad 20 99 cm x 29 70 em ere n EL SilverFast remains open after commencing the printout By this IR T means it can be decided if the image is to be saved even after the T care actual printout 294 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual SilverFast Pr nlao PrinTao The Enhanced Print Dialogue in Si verFast What is PrinTao In simple terms PrinTao is a very enhanced and ultimately powerful print and layout dialogue with useful features and high productiv ity There are numerous functions especially designed and tailored to the requirements of photographers Especially when having to print many images on i e large format printers PrinTao will show its strenghts The feature overview PrinTao Features 1 Imaging Functions a Position images freely 302 303 306 304 309 319 322 326 327 328 b Rotate o
33. Network WWW Comparison of the traditional workloop controlled by an operator to an automated workflow after installation of the SilverFast JobManagers Legend magenta high expenditure of time e g by being tied to a scanner yellow the time requirement is only dependent on the computer system green preparation of data and availability for all types of Networks ca possible interruption of the workflow e g passing the job on to someone else 360 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual Copying of Job Entry Parameters Often the desire may arise the parameters of several job entries at the same time fairly often e g changing the output conver sion from RGB to CMYK for several entries but this is not directly possible what values would be indicated in regard to several job entries that would be processed at the same time Yet still only one single job entry has to be done Proceed as fol lows First activate the edit mode and select an entry RR D you wish to change Now you can do the desired F zl Sra tare een Pp changes for example to set the output conver xA ES sion to CMYK The normally saved gradation m m curves will be utilized while the changes are Ea n being saved Automatic imaging will not be Eu started The sob entries that are to be changed will also have been selected in the JM window as always with Command click X Win CTRL for individual images w
34. PEG Oonons i co BRE Rye A DCS Options zaxan Dn File Format Low quality High quality fe Single file Small file Big File X Multi file Formal 69 Baseline Standard _ Baseline optimized LJ progressive JPEG C Canes www Setting of an image number in the batch The box Reset for Seem 0 each batch scan is activated as a starting set up point where Mes eme 88 n by each new batch scan will start with 1 again The first scan Foma ner s co of the batch will get 0001 attached Counter Bl kesa for every batch scan fh 1 If the box is deactivated or not marked SilverFast will remember the last scan number i e 005 and will give a consecutive number to the next batch 0058 244 6 9 File formats SilverFaste Manual JPEG Options Quality E ANN i i i I i MY i Low quality High quality Small file Big file Format e Baseline Standard Baseline optimized _ progressive JPEG DCS Options File Format Single file Multi file Saving into JPEG File Format Quality By means of the slider the user can decide between low quality with high image compression and high quality with smallest image compression Format Between three parameters can be chosen Baseline is the standard setting The file format will be univer sally readable Baseline opimised will generate a somewhat
35. Prescan Scan RGB Quit f i f Prescan Sa Cancel When Save is pressed a scan will not be initiated at this point SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFastJobManager 351 Te ues Tr pe I Treppen ee bras aun tana PEN nme We bur T 233 ERT sonra You can immediately proceed to the next image and process it as well Simply click on the JM window and it will automatically be loaded into the preview window Proceed with the next image optimising By clicking on Save the parameters will go back to JM and will again commit the operation Using this method you can optimise all desired images of the film strip in the shortest time Leaving the Processing Mode After finishing the last image optimisation you can leave the processing mode again by clicking on the Processing button Now you can choose the job entries which are to be scanned You can do this in the following way Command click lt Win CR for individual images Shift click SHIFT Win SHIFT for a sequence of images Command A 5 4 Win CRY W for all images of the jobs In the example only three of the four entries have been selected 302 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual Qutput Settings This field consists of an extensive dialogue for selecting the path of the generated image data setting the outp
36. RGB 48 Bit colour cs1 cs4 cs16 RGB 48 Bit colour dc2 RGB 48 Bit colour dcr RGB 48 Bit colour dng RGB 48 Bit colour erf RGB 48 Bit colour hdr RGB 48 Bit colour k25 RGB 48 Bit colour kdc RGB 48 Bit colour mos RGB 48 Bit colour mrw RGB 48 Bit colour nef RGB 48 Bit colour orf RGB 48 Bit colour pef RGB 48 Bit colour pef RGB 48 Bit colour raf RGB 48 Bit colour raw RGB 48 Bit colour raw RGB 48 Bit colour srf RGB 48 Bit colour tif RGB 48 Bit colour x3f IBB IBEBBE IB IB BIBBB BI IBIB IBIBI Mh IBIB BIBBE BIBI BIBBB BIBI EB EN BIBI IB BI BI IBI B Di B E IE BIB BIBIBIBIBIBIBIE DIJ D DI DIDIDI DEJ ET DID BEB BEB BEBE E E BEEBE BI DIJE BIB EIE
37. SilverFast 1 Introduction SilverFast Manual MSt KO E WebOpti indd 060808 Headquarters LaserSoft Imaging AG Luisenweg 6 8 D 24105 Kiel Germany Phone 49 431 56009 0 Fax 49 431 56009 98 e mail info SilverFast de http www silverFast de US branch office LaserSoft Imaging Inc 625 Freeling Drive Sarasota 34242 Florida USA Fax 1 941 312 0608 e mail info SilverFast com http www silverFast com 1 Introduction Copyright Copyright 1994 2010 SilverFast Ai LaserSoftlmaging AG Germany No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical or otherwise without the prior written permission of LaserSoftlmaging AG The software SilverFast Ai is copyrighted by LaserSoftlmaging AG and may only be used as stated in the license agreement The purchaser may only copy the software for backup purposes All other kinds of copies are prohibited and will be prosecuted by law LaserSoftlmaging AG does not guarantee that this software will run without errors on all Macintosh or Windows Systems LaserSoftlmaging AG will however replace damaged software The software described in this manual is part of the licensing which becomes effective when the buyer opens the CD package The software may be used according to these licensing agreements All mentioned trademarks are the protected trade marks of the resp
38. SilverFastSC2G Selective Colour to Grey Conversion Activating SC2G Changing a Colour Image to Grey Saving Loading Deleting SC2G Settings Changing the Conversion Factors 5 7 Zooming In Prescan Aborting Prescan High Resolution Prescan Zoom and Densitometer Densitometer Reading and Gradation Curves 5 8 Expert Dialogue Dialogue for Professionals Equal Parameters for a Row Fourth Column for Grey Values Showing Hiding the Curve Window Dialogue Exporting the Image Parameters as a Text File 6 Special Functions 6 1 The Densitometer Monitor of Before and After Values owitching the Densitometer 160 160 161 162 164 164 165 165 165 166 166 167 167 169 170 170 170 174 175 176 177 177 178 179 180 180 181 182 183 184 154 184 186 156 187 187 187 188 188 189 193 194 194 195 SilverFast Manual 11 Content CMYK Values Visible on the Prescan Gamut Warning Multiple Densitometer Multiple FixPip 195 196 196 Transfer of the Brightest Darkest Point to the Multiple Densitometer 6 2 Improving the Sharpness of Artwork Automatic USM Manual USM Zooming into the Preview USM Dialogue with Scaleable Prescan Manual USM in the Expert Dialogue Example for Sharpening Bright Contour Dark Contour 6 3 De screening an image Adjusting the Frame of the Image Automatic Descreening Automatic Descreening intensive Descreening USM amp Descreening Descreening w
39. T 5 SilverFast Tools 5 SilverFast Tools 106 5 1 Image Auto Adjust Auto Gradation 114 5 2 Highlight Shadow Tool 123 5 3 The Histogram 133 5 4 Gradation Dialogue 147 5 5 Global Colour Correction Dialogue Colour Balance 155 5 6 Selective Colour Correction 158 5 7 Zooming In Prescan 184 5 8 Expert Dialogue 187 106 5 e Tools SilverFast Manual MSt K5 E WebOpti indd 190606 Tools for Brilliant Images SilverFast has all the tools to generate brilliant images from your scanner or from raw data SilverFast DC and SilverFast HDR Make yourself familiar with the best way to get brilliant results from your scans Use the ScanPilot in the beginning to help you with the right sequence When using the auto adjust make sure you select the appropriate Image Type to adjust the operation to your specific image Also check that your settings for highlights and shadows under Options Automatic are in accordance with your printing requirements It is also advised to read the chapter about optimum scan resolu tion in the addendum SilverFast Manual 5 Tools 107 Reduce window Tools palette overview SilverFast s powerful image adjustment tools can be accessed through the tool Study the usage of these tools well in order to obtain optimal results with SilverFast 1 Image 4 Gradation 6 Selective colour correction 8 Expert auto adjust dialogue ts bd LL kmn kak k 4 eL EM
40. T E 1 a E uade ies A Positioned and for Font window mum ns mated image text Colour window The text box will be closed by deselecting the edited image deselect by clicking next to the image The three points in detail 310 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Define image text eate a new box f r free movable text Add copyright notice m ry HTIPETII s cmes me ee weji Lier vel EEL a a 4 E j __ en D N Yellow F ge A Undo Redo There is an unlimited Undo Redo within the text editor Command Z Command R Undo Redo 1 Define Image Text This very substantial dialogue will enable you to create print page documents with individual as well as automated text The settings are valid for the text as a whole as well as all the meta data visible in the text box e Text editor window free text can be entered here and it will show the commands of the placed meta data Meta data can be separated via punctuation marks The enter key will create a line break Furthermore any type of external text from the sys tem s clipboard can be pasted here By means of the mouse marked textures may be formatted individually e Font All the system fonts may be viewed here This function is available under Mac OS 10 3 1 or higher Highlight the desired text passages with the mouse and then alter them into the desired font and format Via button
41. Z0 Ha E AEN H xit pem j US Fr Ya Ea er E EZ an Bi k ae Bei As Lies pe AUP Hur bea A Le Jil EREN Ii es e am ES E K r FF KS y i mi Latina Dea rani Tja tiori The reet Finda ar Frani al Overview 32 32 v Overview 64 64 Overview 96 96 Overview 128 128 Light table 32 32 Light table 64 64 v Light table 96 96 Light table 128 128 Magnifier 256 256 v Magnifier 512 512 Magnifier size to fit Magnifier display EXIF data Overview Window and Toolbar If SilverFast recognizes images in the chosen directory it will dis play miniatures in the overview window as a Forlater use SilverFast generates a small file called SFthumbs DC into the chosen d image folder mas Hij laum aude nat Birk Burch Imported camera images are automatically zi orientated rotated if SilverFast find the orientation information within the image E rl ia kirt l Tut Diir i rle X5 data Selden am Goer The overview window is freely scalable The scroll bar on the right allows a quick overview even of a large amount of images D00 If a max overview is desired the album may be hidden by B clicking the Hide Show button oum Clicking the button Thumbnail size allows the altering of the miniature sizes varying from 32x32 to 128x128 pixels The example shows the difference in sizes The magnifier window can display
42. gt 2 3 o Fixed Pipette iss 2 314 gt 2 Qs 79 Q5 gt s 78 gt n mie s Qs gt s E s4 gt 525 eS s gt 162 iso nu Ca Q5 gt 19 6 Gamut Warning Warning signal when colour at measured position cannot be printed with CMYK colours The colour cell above right column will be splited horizontally where the upper part displays the current monitor colour and the lower part displays the colour which would be the printable colour Multiple Densitometer Multiple FixPip By pressing the Shift key and clicking on the scan image up to four individual measurement points can be placed and fixed on any spot of the image In order to delete these points simply repeat the procedure A fixed measurement point is marked in the pres can window by a small numbered circle The measuring values of these pipette measuring points will no longer be shown in the densitometer window but in their own window The windows will attempt to adapt to the number of meas uring points meaning they will change their size depending on the number of fixed points and the selected colour types RGB CMYK grey etc The colour types can be adjusted for each pipette independently of each other The quickest way to switch is done using the context menu keep Ctrl key pressed and click on to the value display column If all fixed points have been deleted the window will close au
43. ly detect the orientation of the film frame This is especially help ful when performing batch scans the software automatically detects if a scan frame is to be positioned vertically or horizon tally and rotates the frame respectively The function usually works with 35 mm slides Smaller formats or square formats will not be detected If this function is de activated the current active manually drawn and positioned frame will be used for all film strips of the entire batch All slides in the batch are hence optimized with the same frame regardless of the orientation of the slide SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 67 68 3 Presets SilverFast Manual Adjusting Scan Parameters Before scanning enter the desired parameters in the General and Frame Panel General Palette Sih ast vit dri e bharat vini Lr SilverFast Ai SilverFast HDR e uu taz Frame Denzitemener j General Frame Densitometer a dili ai Device WSE Epson G M Image HDR Target F l Sean Mode Normal k Process Mode N rmal Original Reflective s Pos Neg Positive Pos Meq Poxirive E frame 5er Save iei Frame Set Save General Palette Options left SilverFast Ai c Prescan sean RGB Quir gt F Open f sean RGB Yf right SilverFast HDR e Device SilverFastAi When two or more scanners of the same manufacturer are connecte
44. o Finish the dialogue by clicking OK SilverFast will now commence All functions of SilverFast are explained with a help text at the lower margin of the prescan win dow More help is given by clicking on the button to the left of the prescan window SilverFast Manual 1 2 Installation 3 1 SilverFast Feature CD The Feature CD allows you to expand an already installed SilverFast version For example with the IT8 Calibration Please begin with a Si verFastA version that has already been installed serialized and is functioning properly with your scanner Please follow the indicated steps below Place the Feature CD into the drive and have your 20 digit or 30 digit serial number on hand Wait until the system has recognised the CD e Start the SilverFastAi version for your scanner e Click on the small i button in upper left edge of the prescan window Note If you cannot find the i button it may be hidden behind the ScanPilot e Click the Credits button The activation data is displayed in a small pop up window e Click on the Upgrade button Delete the old serial number by entering the new serial number in the registration window Close the dialogue by pressing OK Once the code has been accepted the dialogue window will disappear The new feature is now available in the vertical but ton bar to the left on the prescan window 32 1
45. or for all images All images on this page or even assigned to all to all print pages A images on all pages 2 Create Freely Positionable Text Framework After choosing this option a text Define image text T editing dialogue will be opened Create a new box for free movable text Add copyright notice and the mouse pointer will change its status to a small cross Click and draw a rectangle on the printing area in which you wish to position the text The size and position of the rectangle can be corrected at any time after wards oa l 5 Prinlao li If the text is too long for the gt according rectangle a red La zi sign for text overflow will be shown at the bottom Just increase the size of z the rectangle as shown in reuera EE Flower with XN gt he example orad lel n aaa Tare UR font parameters to smaller a sun of the morning values 316 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual 3 Place Copyright Notes Within the Image Create a new box for free movable text will be opened A copyright note can be Add copyright notice entered now which will then become vis T After choosing this option a text dialogue Define image text F F i r Text dinr PET ne Tros TEL ible as a new image text within the image The text can be placed at any corner of the image CET Emen Frera SEE e inui mop k bo E E RR RN i Copyright texi Hn
46. sls e EJ 8 0 9 nel 150 98 10 S708 dai 23 62 B ia MB v d La bl Tf Output attinge tyspsrmplaier ihan mag skrop FhesnPennf CMYK Ham preview Eabh icono dd l l Mar ajer Ioh rr i vd Output settings rrmpacts x if Pitre Ge le ERP alae lnhed 1 illa SE lieth tm Delete T i r Ui rM a LM WU iking Fanlar k Mi TF R J Hj Xw Bi ji mh ws om oem Ton x Ha F gc 1 1 Lum Piri Job Status An LED will show the status of each job entry during and after the job processing Yellow when the entry is being processed Green when the entry has been successfully processed Red when the entry has been unsuccessfully processed Grey White when the entry has not been processed yet If no entries have been selected in the JM window all job entries will be carried out otherwise only the selected entries will be processed Processing of jobs can be interrupted at any time by clicking on the Cancel button in the progress dialogue or by clicking on the Stop button in JM If you restart at a later time processing will continue where you left off however only entries whose status is not green or red will be processed Changing Back a Job If you want to carry out job entries again that have already been processed their status has to be reset First the entries must be selected from the JM window Ctrl click Win right mouse b
47. 3J Delete Curve 16903 Cyan 3 4 Mag 15 Yel 5 PhotoShop Import SilverFast Import Gradation Curves nu Cyan Magenta Yellow Red Green Blue Saving a Gradation Curve Enter the gradation curve dialogue and get the pull down menu Save the dialogue to the left will open and ask for the name of this curve Name new curve Curve_8719 2 amp 2 2 2x3 acm E f Cancel OK Deleting a Gradation Curve In order to delete a gradation curve from the list click on Delete and select the curves you want to delete from the list You can also select more than one curve Clicking the Delete button will delete all curves selected Gradation Curve Channels Delete Resources Cyan dreiviertel 10 Kurve 27392 Mag 4 Yellow 8 Delete Cancel To choose a single gradation curve channel for example magenta click on the appropriate button To manipulate two channels simul taneously hold down the Shift key and click on a second chan nel button To activate all three channels click on the grey button 150 5 4 Gradation curves SilverFast Manual Deactivating Gradation Curve Points To change gradation curves without the limiting influence of nearby existing curve points You can deactivate any of the existing curve points The following example shows the effect of a curve correction with out left and with righ
48. 6 3 De screening an image 6 4 GANE 6 5 Line Art Scans 1 Bit 6 6 Multiple Sampling 6 7 NegaFix Scanning Negatives 6 8 The Use of Various Film Holders for Film Scanners 6 9 File formats in SilverFast 6 10 Focussing the Scanner 6 11 Description of the Special Functions of SilverFastHDR and SilverFastDC 6 12 SilverFastJobManager 6 13 SilverFastSRD Dust and Scratch Removal 6 14 SilverFastAACO Auto Adaptive Contrast Optimization 6 15 Clone Tool 6 16 PrinTao 193 194 199 205 211 215 217 219 235 241 249 253 343 369 399 401 405 192 6 Special functions SilverFast Manual MSt K6 1 10 E WebOpti indd 271106 6 Special Functions 6 1 Densitometer For precise monitoring of density values 6 2 Unsharp Masking To enhance the image with better sharpness detail contrast 6 3 Descreening To eliminate possible moire patterns when scanning printed images 6 4 SilverFast GANE Filter for reduction of grain and noise structures in film scans 6 5 Line art To scan black and white samples not greyscale 6 6 Negative Scans To scan greyscale or colour negatives 6 7 Multisampling Multiple scan runs to eliminate noise 6 8 Using the various film holder with film scanners APS film adapter film strip holder slide feeder 6 9 File formats in SilverFast For scanning black amp white images as well as colour negatives 6 10 Foccusing the Scanner For opti
49. 7 Zoom 3 Histogram 5 Colour balance glo 2 Pipette bal colour correction setting high light midtone and shadow Tool 1 Image Auto Adjust Auto Gradation Mac 38 4 2 PC CONTROL ALT 2 By means of the auto gradation the highlight shadow points are automatically optimised Colour cast removal is automati cally applied or not applied depending on the scanner model and image type selected Tool 2 Setting Highlight Midtone Shadow oets the brightest and darkest point and midtone on the image manually Tool 3 Histogram Mac amp 8 3 PC CONTROL ALT 3 With the histogram tool the highlight shadow points are controlled and optimised 108 5 Tools SilverFast Manual Tool 4 Gradation Mac amp 35 4 4J PC CONTROL ALT 4 In the gradation dialogue the tonal values are influenced through RGB or CMY curves Here the gradation curves can be controlled by sliders numerical input or curve manipulation You can choose between RGB and CMY representation Tool 5 Colour Balance Global Colour Correction Mac 894 5 PC CONTROL ALT 5 With global colour correction the colour balance can be changed for all tonal values including quarter half and three quarter tones Tool 6 Selective Colour Correction Mac
50. Curve points 151 Control of the curve points 152 D Dark contour 203 204 Darkest point 131 Displaying darkest point 132 DCPro See SilverFastDC DCProStudio See SilverFastDC CMY 194 DCS file format 243 245 CMYK 194 Multi file 245 Colour model RGB or CMY 53 Single file 245 HSL 194 DCVLT See SilverFastDC K 194 Default dialogue See Options dialogue 462 74 Index SilverFast Manual Defaults See Options dialogue Standard defaults 59 Default setting 54 Delete a scan frame 89 Delete cache Delete images 285 Delete frame 42 Deleting Images 285 Densitometer 101 123 134 145 186 194 Before and after values 194 Densitometer is displayed in the gradation and the selective colour correction dialogue 194 Densitometer palette 39 91 Densitometer radius 53 Densitometer reading and gradation curves 186 Displaying the densitometer measure points with the histogram and gradations dialogues 145 Multiple densitometer 145 Selecting the colour space in the densitometer 146 Switching the densitometer 195 Transfer of the brightest darkest point to the mul tiple densitometer 146 Descreening 205 207 Automatic descreening 205 206 Automatic descreening intensive 205 206 Before After view 207 Moir 205 208 Preview button 207 USM amp Descreening 205 209 Device 69 Dialogue overview 39 Dialogue window 37 Macintosh 3 Windows 38 Difference between ScanPilot and ImagePilot 110 DIGITAL ICE technologies 41
51. E o i E o n a HEE er i Ei L wuk i IT8 calibration Starts the optional IT8 calibration for SilverFast Adjustment of Film Strip Position Serves to check the start or end of film strip in case the motor driven film feeder has not correctly positioned the film Multiple scanning Multiple sampling Clarity can be improved while scanning difficult artwork The image is scanned sev eral times to determine the mean In this manner CCD noise caused by thermal activity particularly in dark areas of the image can be significantly reduced depending on the number of samples VLT Switches in SilverFast HDR DC from the main dialogue to virtual light table Image overview dialogue Index scan With the use of a film strip or an APS film feeder SilverFast will automatically produce an image overview which simplifies selection and finding a particular image Frame deletion Deletes the active scan frame Black and white point and frame number indicator Clicking and holding on particular areas of the button will show the black and white point or the number of the scan frame Print image Commences the printing of the current scan frame The size of the print out may be adjusted by choosing Output size in the Palette Frames 2 e Overview SilverFast Manual L C 9 e E Red eye correction A tool for reducing the red eye phenomenon that occurs if pictures
52. Overview SilverFast Dialogue Window Macintosh Version Windows Version SilverFast Dialogue Overview The Tool bar in the Prescan Window SilverFast Tools Activity Indicator for Change of Setting Rotation Tool Palette 3 Presets SilverFast Preferences Prefs Units of Measurement cm inch Pica Point Pixel Options Dialogue General Defaults Auto Defaults CMS Colour Management Settings Special Defaults Adjusting Scan Parameters General Palette ok 0 CO 18 19 19 20 21 22 22 25 26 28 30 32 33 33 34 36 37 37 38 39 40 46 46 47 90 o1 52 53 53 59 62 65 69 69 1 1 Content SilverFast Manual Frame Palette 1 Size Adjustments Scaling 76 Scan Resolution for Scaled Images 77 Uneven Scaling of Images f Proportional Scaling 8 Pixel Lock 9 Drag amp Drop 80 Switching Scanners 80 4 SilverFast Prescan Design 82 SilverFast Prescan Concept 83 Realtime Processing 83 The Prescan Concept Advantage 83 SilverFast Prescan Design 84 Zooming in the Prescan 95 Zooming in SilverFastAi and SE 95 Zooming in SilverFast 97 High Resolution Prescan 100 Zoom and Difficult Corrections 101 Editing a Zoomed Prescan 102 Scanner with Different Optical Resolutions 103 5 SilverFast Tools 106 Tools for Brilliant Images 107 Tools palette overview 108 ocanPilot ImagePilot 110 The Concept of Optimising Images 112 Workflow of Optimising Images 113
53. SilverFast Manual 6 16 Advanced print dialogue 409 410 6 16 Advanced print dialogue SilverFast Manual N i D Q OU L QO 7 Colour Management This chapter describes the concept of colour management how to set up the appropriate settings in SilverFast and how to calibrate your scanner to get precise colours 7 1 Colour Management 413 7 2 Calibration of your Scanner using SilverFast IT8 Calibration 433 7 3 Addendum 442 7 4 Index 460 7 5 Glossary 482 412 7 Colour management SilverFast Manual MSt K7 E WebOpti indd 030708 7 1 Colour Management Introduction In the past getting professional results with colour reproduction was only achieved by highly educated professionals There have been two major reasons for this 1 Devices for colour reproduction demanded high investments 2 Operation of devices was complicated complex Know How was necessary Luckily the above mentioned reasons are not valid any more today because the devices needed as scanner PC printer have become affordable for almost everyone Also operation has become easy with intelligent software and colour management matured Objective of Colour Management System CMS Professional workflow without colour management is not conceiv able any more today To save time and money it is desired to see the result of the final scan on the monitor or printer already on the preview Since every input and output device has its own
54. T All images that match the search criteria are immediately displayed in the middle window By clicking on the file name the entire path is shown and the miniature is displayed in the window The found images may be dragged into n the album window By keeping the Com deven iin mand key pressed single images may be ow TT T added into the selection and if the Shift key is pressed an entire series of images is s ldea y ri marked routes Pressing OK closes the dialogue ne RE e SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 269 Activate Preview mode Full screen preview 2 GHET E or type Space Clic With activated Preview mode Next image Previous image The miniatures in the overview window and aloum window are also sortable by the respective buttons name size and date v Sort overview by name Sort overview by size Sort overview by date Sort light table by name Sort light table by size Sort light table by date Snap light table thumbnails to grid By means of the display preview button it is possible to display an enlarged activated image The overview or the album win Preview mode off v Preview mode in overview Preview mode in album Preview mode full screen b dows are used for this purpose Preview inodeeolot The Preview mode entire Monitor option ER 512 tto scre
55. Then remove the tar get from the set and re shoot the photograph By this method two photos are taken first one for calibration and after that the actual photograph Professionals know the procedure with grey card tests the objective is the same with the steps described here SilverFast Manual 7 2 IT8 calibration 437 7 A 3 3 1 Sequence of IT8 calibration A summarized run through the calibration process in the SilverFast software 1 Place the IT8 target into scanner and align the target 2 Initiate a prescan 3 Click once on IT8 calibration button a dialogue opens 4 In preview window position the grid exactly over the IT8 target 5 Click once on Start button if a dialogue opens browse to location of corresponding IT8 reference file and select it Confirm selection by clicking the Open button 6 The IT8 calibration process itself runs automatically The IT8 dialogue window informs you about the progress of the calibration process f Save the result of the calibration as ICC profile for system wide colour management 8 The IT8 calibration process is completed and automatically set active 438 7 2 IT8 calibration SilverFast Manual LaserSoft Imaging target 35mm transparent charge number is on slide mount Prolessicnal Film S Kodak target 35mm transparent reference is date printed directly on the target and also on the slide
56. Window of printed here right margin left page hand Image text here lower margin centred Active image Marked by blue surrounding Image information image below cursor Path file name output size output resolu tion Rulers Measurement unit cm Scaling of printed page SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 299 Navigator File Browser in PrinTao nte The first step in PrinTao is the selection of images to be printed Genet Temone This can be done by using the integrated navigator or file browser ER i The popup menu in the head of the navigator contains several F Bsa agn inputs by which individual images or entire directories may be Mim AT selected 1 The contents of the chosen View file browser wie E Pec su r i Ri herne directory is displayed in the AP Ey tee A ERE list Seylus COO foo b l agn brug E ET ER erepti S By means of the little blue arrow the directory may be switched to the parent directory Neh ae rs The menu contents Spe as PDS rint Uhr Albums 1 sites e View file browser The contents of the current directory are rri displayed 2 template j j 8 Desktop The path of the directory is shown above a ine ech YLT Album all Piles ji YLT Album isebected Ailes VET Cherviem a9 fibexi New n ra la ben Open file Y wu Pile ler Eva Nan CAT Am en View albums Displays all albums that have been previously raan weren E created
57. With Batch Mode all scan frames on the prescan will directly be scanned into separate windows in the imaging application Normal File will scan the active scan frame directly to the hard disk Batch Mode File will scan all scan frames on the preview to the hard disk to album will save the current image after optimization back to album as a Copy Original Three different types of originals can be selected from Reflective Transparency and ADF Document Feeder Transparency and ADF Document Feeder are only avail able with flat bed scanners when the appropriate hardware addition is available and connected Positive Negative You select between positive and negative according to the film type used Clicking Negative opens the dialogue window SilverFast NegaFix scanners that have a hardware solution for positive to negative conversion this can be reached by ae Neg Direct SilverFast NegaFix Negative will then be deactivated Pos Neg v Neg Direct Frame Sets This menu enables to save all all scan frames on the preview including their individual positions and all individual parameters under one name Previously saved frame sets can here be loaded or deleted Name new trame setting Frame 8715 d Ny Xu 0 Cancel 70 3 Presets SilverFast Manual Frame Palette left SilverFastAi right SilverFast HDR
58. er SilverFast HOR D 6 0 2r36 Serial N icki E operi Launch SilverFast by clicking Start SilverFast Lg mda SilverFast will launch and search for the nar e connected scanner e f SilverFast launches or the scan E j h am Silverrast Ai ner was ound t e welcome p ed screen initially appears IE If an internet connection is estab wam lished the respective topics on our Xx i a web site can be reached by means of the buttons within the dialogue 2 You can also check for possible updates here if an update is available you may download it from here directly 30 1 2 Installation SilverFast Manual First Name John Last Name Brown Organization ABC Serial number 1234567890ABCDEF789d r Ford Mamie Last Mam Brow Company Unlock silvnrkarst anan ET G WIR AAAS TL AS amp Fast Emin yG d 2r5 a r ili ee a E u e After this dialogue has been closed the registration window appears Please note that the 20 digit serial number is to be entered with out spaces and in capital letters Make sure that the number you enter consists only of numbers between 0 and 9 and letters between A and F Some upgrades will require a 30 digit code in future which is made up of 6 groups of 5 values each This code consists of numbers between 2 and 9 no ones and no zeros and all let ters between A and Z except the letters i and
59. gedrucktor geruckrer TTE gerreckter STU uris Check Spelling Speech amp Check Spelling as You Type Writing Dieron Font gedr ckrer Correct Dori io rar Dew sul i Forger Learn dechtucehreibpr fung Be quetrirchier ot Tarbe mek sin Bok in caes Tas Ewsqabetenster das Mena zur Peecrtmcnneenbeerps ursi SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 313 Mata data f Exif Camera Add all image file name image file path Current dat Add all Manufacturer of input device Madel X resolurian Y resalurian Resolution unit Sofware File change date time Artist marme DELF Maker mote FlashPix version FxiF image width Exif image height Flash energy GPS Ipc rn k Bi F Add All Iman fila name Image file path Current date Exif Camera Exit image Li CP Add ali Laptiar Caption Writer Headline hpercial IAS thee Fever ds Category 5unplemental Careqanas Urgency Eyi ITE Byline Tithe C reci ounce Objecr Name Date Created iry Province State Country Marne Original Trantimisgian Reference Lopyright Mator Add all Image file name Image file path Current date Meta data A very extensive menu with several sub menus for the designation of the meta data that is to be entered into the image texts opens here Each choice of a meta date adds this to the current position of the text cursor Exif Camera gt Exif Image GPS
60. key and a click on the Update button the preview will be recalculated and a much larger part of the image is displayed SHIFT Descreening Descreened intense moir amp 1x W detect screen Descreening Parameters Screen lt Custom gt 4 ipi _ use Unsharp Masking ee Comi Ca gU a IC ERE zz Ea fl me d 208 6 3 Descreening SilverFast Manual None USM amp Descreening Descreening with Unsharp Masking Sharpen USM Descreening If you simply descreen printed artwork it often looks very soft and USM amp Descreening AE HENEN AA SONT appears quite unclear in image prore ang program In order Automatic descreening to avoid this you can add unsharp masking to the descreening SANES process For this the descreening in the filter menu may be launched under USM amp Descreening Alternatively in case the descreen TUTTI ing dialogue is already opened a the USM may be activated by checking the use Unsharp Mask ing box For this purpose mark the check box use unsharp masking with giu sre eco C Preven ll detect sereen check mark All parameters in the Descreerong Parameters elongated dialogue window can eem stone BB z JC be used just as in normal unsharp v use Unsharp Masking masking You can also choose ice Mules fent rays y da 5 here between the standard mode Threshold M T5 xk or expert mode
61. makes Si verFast display the images darker a value of less than 1 makes the images look brighter Q Factor The Q factor is the quality factor for an image The range is from 1 to 2 5 Please refer to addendum Calculating the scan resolution SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 55 AN Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software Reopen Si verFast after Scan only with SilverFastAi SE Normally Si verFast as Photoshop plug in will be closed after scan and has to be started again for next scan Reopen Si verFast after Processing SilverFastDC HDR Normally Si verFast Photoshop plug in is closed after process ing the image and must be reopened manually for the next image This only applies when working in a mode of normal and Batch When using the File or to Album modes SilverFast remains open after processing Open VLT at Start Up If the VLT should be opened at each start of SilverFast DC HDR check this box If active the main windows of SilverFast will not open and the VLT will show In case the VLT is then closed the SilverFast main Dialogue window is opened immediately Displaying a Processed Image only with SilverFastDC DCPro HDR with SFLauncher If this option is selected the finished file will be opened by the finder
62. or type opace click With activated Preview mode Next image Previous image VLT Keyboard Shortcuts Windows General Select image series Shift Select single images Ctrl h VLT Window Open context menu Ctrl button and click into VLT window h Activate all Ctrl t A EXIF Image infos Ctrl i Delete image Delete DELETE Mark image as Bad Shift click with marker SHIFT Full size Preview Ctrl Shift F or type opace click With activated Preview mode Next image Previous image 290 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual mm m The red eye regions need to be selected Please drag the mouse over these regions in the preview window The best results are achieved when all other corrections have been applied to the image a Don t show this warning again Red Eye Removal Detection _ _ __ ar Darkness _ _ _ _ F a i L d i mm mm mm mm Red Eye Tool A new function is available from SilverFastDC 6 onwards It is located in the vertical button row left of the prescan window a tool for colour correction of red eyes Hed eyes occur in flashlight portraits if the distance between the flash and the lens is small and the pupils of the photographed person are open wide First start a prescan of the portrait to be corrected Click the button Remove red eyes A note will appear mentioning that a frame is to be drawn around the
63. so ss Lies gt se Ola gt 44 1 9 145 Monitor of Before and After Values The densitometer shows the unchanged values in the left column In the right column the changed values image auto adjust grada tion etc are shown O Densitometer Before colour After colour Before After CMYK values Densitometer is Displayed in the Gradation and the Selective Colour Correction Dialogue Fix a densitometer point within the scan frame While opening the gradation or selective colour correction dialogue the densitometer switches to a threefold monitor When corrections are done the third right column shows the altered value in respect to the second column Acknowledging the gradation dialogue with clicking OK will switch the densitometer back to two columns The third column will become the second column 194 6 1 Densitometer SilverFast Manual CONTROL Switching the Densitometer All densitometers may be switched to a different colour space by two methods Toggle switch by clicking on to the measurement columns of any densitometer it will jump to the next colour space mode Keep clicking here until the desired colour space is shown Directly switching in the context menu Hold down the Ctrl key and click into any of the measuring value cells of the densitom eter A pop up window opens and by selecting an
64. type styles and lont size will be opened Highlight f c 1 passares WH Tha mouse eret ther alter them inte he desired l ont and formal Via button A the amp ystembased popuipm for e used font type type styles and font size ba opaned Highlight the desired text passages with the mouse and then alter them into the desired fGnt and formal Via butten A the systembased popupmenu for the used font type type styles and font size will be opened By further use of the buttons within the palettes the user may decide if the text is to be printed in bold underlined or italic let ters The line pitch may also be adjusted A transparent shadow can also be added and its intensity and alignment is adjust able de in W tho War Vo be primes in mela brian cr malen kofiri The n cih may alee be adiusied A Iranapanent stacey tnn E Eo BOR ined ir imensir An loy Taya is asus By Hunter usn of Iho utres within hu puentes repas dara f Ia west js Ve h n evi in b r Lire a nimi The brin pith miy alan ti Lap egret n Ean bian ba pekela rT ifa ery arit acrem in jli lan n Unformatted text with select ed text passage Formatted text e a La E a By further use of the butions within the palettes ihe user may decide if the text is to be printed in bald underlined or italic letters The line pitch may also be adjusted A transparent shadow can also be added and its intensity and alignment is adjustable By furthe
65. weaker within the blouse and sari Selective Color Correction n a zi Type CM6 CM12 Presets Save ej Mask No mask B E Green colour changed to blue 5 Move the cursor over the green spot in the centre of the colour circle and press and drag towards the Magenta spot on the outer circle the blouse and sari colour now changes to blue SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 163 Plus correction adding colour Minus correction subtracting SHIT J Mac Hmm nee B Win CONTROL A e e e ee AD A ag cn Colour Circle In order to add one colour into another move to the centre of the circle the hand cursor symbol shows a plus sign and drag it towards the colour that you wish to add a line with a bul let is pulled out In the case shown the primary colour red is enhanced by adding red so the red colour will become stronger More than one colour can be added to the chosen colour in the centre of the circle In order to subtract colour move the cursor over a colour on the circuit of the circle a minus sign appears on the hand cursor symbol The colour chosen will now be subtracted from the colour to be corrected in the middle In the example shown red is sub tracted from red so the red colour will become weaker The correction lines in the circle ca
66. where the plug in is and is constantly updated according to the settings of the parameters of each scan frame 2 SilverFast Application File Prefs Folder Basic Settings for Si verFast 3 SilverFast Preview File Previews Folder There may be two SilverFast preview files one for reflective and one for transparency The file size will depend on the size of the preview window The preview files will be automatically gener ated when the scanner creates the preview on the monitor 4 SilverFast Zoom File Previews Folder The SilverFast zoom file will be generated when a zoom is being performed inside the preview window so you can toggle between normal preview and zoomed preview The zoom file stays the same until you either initiate a new normal preview and then a zoomed preview or when you draw a substantially different sized zoom area SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 51 Name Pcg Original Scale Output m 56 1000 3 Wyse inch D 5 SilverFast Unsharp Masking Preview File Previews Folder The SilverFast s USM preview file will be generated when an unsharp masking preview is executed The next time you open the dialogue the previous unsharp masking preview is still there 6 SilverFast Descreening Unsharp Masking Preview File Previews Folder Some scanners allow for descreening and simultaneous unsharp masking As for USM the process generates a preview file that is aut
67. 232 371 375 Displaying a processed image 56 Document feeder 103 238 Dot screen 6 dpcm 446 dpi 446 Drag amp drop 80 279 Dust and scratch removal See SilverFastSRD Dust and scratch removal 41 E E6 process 394 Eject button 41 Embed ICC profiles 64 Embed profiles 64 Enhanced print dialogue See PrinTao Evening 4 EXIF 266 268 277 284 298 314 See Silver FastDC Expert dialogue 108 187 Equal parameters for a row 187 Exporting the image parameters as a text file 189 Fourth column for grey values 188 SF Statistic txt 189 Showing Hiding the curve window Dialogue 188 Expert mode 2 4 386 Export Album 271 Export images 28 7 Exposure 66 292 Extended print dialogue See PrinTao F Feature CD 32 File browser 299 300 File format 87 241 243 247 353 SilverFast Manual 7 4 Index 463 Reading different file formats 247 Saving different file formats 241 File name 39 76 354 File size 76 Film holder 43 235 237 APS adapter 235 Automatic document feeders ADF 237 Batch scans 237 Eject 236 Film Strip Holder 236 Holder transport 43 Middle formats 43 237 Panorama formats 43 237 Film scanner 239 347 357 358 Film scanners with a magazine 239 Area 240 Holder transport 239 Overview dialogue 240 JobManager 347 SilverFastJobManager workflow with film scan ners 357 Film strip holder Adjusting the Film Strip Position 237 Film strip position 42 237 Filter 39 73 199 Descre
68. 71 Addendum SilverFast Manual 3 Embedded ICC Profiles Nowadays digital images are transferred in various channels onto different computers To assure the rendering of colours to be true without knowing from where they came and how they have been processed images get a profile attached which will assure a basis for the colour reproduction process EEEE IEEE If you want to embed the ICC profile into the data you have to check this field accordingly You will automatically see which profile xnl c will be embedded There are four possible origins for an ICC profile 1 When selecting RGB in the section colour management under Internal Output the profile originates from the field Profiles for ColorSync Internal e g Adobe RGB 2 When selecting ColorSync ICM under Internal Output the profile originates from the field Output Printer in the field Pro files for ColorSync e g Euroscale coated icc 3 If P amp P CMYK is selected it is the profile that was chosen under Plug amp Play CMYK Working in 48 bit mode 4 When scanning in 48 bit mode and having selected the scan SilverFastAi can embed a scanner ner profile under Profiles for ColorSync the scanner profile profile which describes the devia tion of the scanner into the Tiff data will be embedded into the file during the output of 48 bit data The scanner deviations can then auto matically be corrected during later
69. A the system based ici rM TN LI Em N popup menu for the used font cine ami pr e type type styles and font size A m a a 2 will be opened Alternatively LR ka BE TT a the menu may also be opened v cu WER ali by means of the shortcut wn a ars ath W Cmd T wa m ee ee ms aw EON Harp k a t Et Ni i T3 nig igni the deed bal passages eqn Ihe messe And her aller Weser iru th stern ford ar Formas Mia piston A lai 5 ychenri Coruna pou eiri kr Ein ized limi Typs Fy iius ard And sone wil Dus opeanexd Hin hig the desired seri passages ah the mouse imc then aller vem nao Heg dera Tori and uman WLA unen A tha Shs Te Vor E SR Ond Type Type yan ari OM ure vili B OPA kan Hir Hag rio chosen Waci asse ees Ewr l a TTROS aw an n ian adir Wagn l n Gioia irl aras hea b ne A tha TT pop y Tianni bir Bas i xav ved type Spe siyan and iw ae ll dr oe Unformatted text with select ed text passage Formatted text rrr Turan Elej re Siri EAT X E ar Muna ra Lids E f bk a X j i Highlight the desired text passages with tha mouse and than alter them into the desired font and Tamat Via button A the syslembased papupmenu forthe used font type type styles and lont size will be opened eed Highlight the desired teat passages with the mouse and then alter them into the desired font ond format Via button A the systembased popupmenu for the used font LY Pe ype viv
70. Auto CMS Soecial Auto cms Special Calarmedal RGB m amp Cee Model ROH ET Unos of Mearaer irh iB ireti of Mesas inch rH omaga kadaya 2 Pipi M Dru Mind 2 Pal k l Dudaulr tening S beerf ast De fal Peta Lema beer laa Dela 7 Can Parents Eccc Uecuon Pelee Bii gno uice m Wimpelansn Sierras Standard BP imtarpolatnm Ani Alias E bigi re play hoven Ez kd ra LL High aa ol m kar fuer li E Dashi dnd bapedi Dir vet sr varan divk kate i il a a Ghama GHH 1 B ee er ee eee ia HOE gib Gumana in HOR duta 1 00 inma spami w b did m Diiw 10 lector KRe gad il ater sewa 7 Rapha O wher Pr caanna B ki alima Correction xt Taan AT un vanus BE Map Edge e DD Miri Ha Air Frobitilna General defaults Tea Mine idar sifr t left SilverFastAi anh o Came 7j UK E CO Cel 4 C right SilverFast DCPro e Colour Model RGB or CMY Switching between RGB 0 255 values and CMYK 0 to 100 measurement may be done here These settings only influence the display and calculation modes within the windows of Silver Fast The decision to scan in CMYK or in RGB files is made at a different stage see Plug amp Play CMYK e Units of Measurement in cm or inch Units of measurement can be switched between cm inch Pica Point Pixel e Densitometer Radius The area of the densitometer reading can be set to 1 2x2 and 3x3 pixels SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 53 Default Setti
71. Click on Prescan Now adjust the prescan with or without auto adjust accordingly If you scan all pictures manually and wish to correct them with automatic imaging check the field automatic with ADF in preset under the Options menu Click on Scan Batch SilverFast Dialogue after Interruption of a Batch If a batch scan scan mode Batch is interrupted it may be continued with a restart of SilverFast automatically if the Alt key is pressed simultaneously If SilverFast is launched regularly the batch scan will not be contin ued Otherwise SilverFast will launch normally 238 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives SilverFast Manual Film scanners with a magazine For film scanners that support regular film magazines used by projectors Si verFastAi offers additional special functions The transport control is done by means of buttons in the vertical tool bar located to the left of the preview window Holder transport For scanners that operate together with regular slide holders special buttons for the transport of the holders are required i The first button opens the dialogue TT MT box Multiple Slide Scanner Set Eae tings Here the current position EE Pa re of the magazine are to be entered H opo mapaa the slide case number in the cas RE __ sette The preset here S qn can number of slides from the current position Sran rom position unti 2nd el magari
72. Copyright 366 The entered IPTC data may be saved by clicking the Save button for reoccurring files By clicking the Load button the set and saved IPTC data may be recalled This function is only available with special SilverFast versions SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 283 Gathering Image Information EXIF By clicking this button all EXIF information of the image if avail able is displayed CRW 4129 lt gt tm m Bra jr 21 81 z Bluse eet age 41 43 DCRW 4129 0H In this example the complete EXIF information is shown in the left window and the information of a 48bit RAW data scan on the right 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual 284 This function is only available with special SilverFast versions Size of the Album Window The album window is freely scalable The scroll bar on the right allows a quick overview even of a large amount of images 3 If a max overview is desired the album may be hidden by clicking the Hide Show button o0 n A 8 Deleting Images in the Albums By means of the popup menu Trash the images in the overview and the album may be deleted Overvied Delete all Certan Delete All Overview Delete sotacted Album Delete all Altum Delete all Albun Delete nala hed 3 Alburn Delala marked Altum Delete marked Cache Delane for overview Popup menu Trash Cache D
73. Filter 7 3 9 x 5 9 inch 100 0 100 0 300 dpi 5 98 MB Output settings Output options A menu for setting file formats Name preview Stapelbild0004 tif A Tis directories and file names Starting and stopping of job execution Differences in JobManager between SilverFastHDR DC and SilverFastAi There are only two minor differences a It s more easy to move images in the scanner independend SilverFast versions than in SilverFastAi In SilverFast HDR and DC you can drag amp drop images directely from VLT into the JobManager In SilverFastAi you have to use the corre S sponding buttons xa Ur B b In SilverFast HDR DC the button add all frames is not gx available TT You will find the VLT button instead 9 346 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual Using the SilverFastJobManager with Film Scanners and Film Strips Activating the JobManager First start SilverFastAi You do not need to do a preview scan after manea ie start up since an orientation regarding the total content of the Hu J Bpad e G inserted film strip has to be set first D To activate JM click on the JobManager button in the vertical list Fe of buttons that are to the left of the large SilverFastAi preview window The JM window will open The window will remain empty and carry the designation Untitled 1 as long as no imag
74. Furnishing existing Image Data with HiRePP How do you make an existing stock of images HiRePP compatible without changing anything in the images First deactivate Si verFastSRD and switch to 48 bit HDR colour mode All tools and filter fawn w D Lr SilverFast HDR are now de activated KEL SE Save the settings in the palette Frames _ Ceneral frames Densaomerer under Adjustments with a suitable name Eis e g make HiRePP capable SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 339 Start the integrated JobManager It initially opens as an empty window Q Now open the Virtual Light Table VL T EY Chose image data that is to be made HiRePP compatible indi TR vidual images from a directory or an album complete directory contents or combinations of images from different directories Pull the selection by Drag amp Drop into the JobManager window nit sO r E x The window in which you just saved the Setting make mere WM T i r4 Keep ariginal rewiyen make HiRePP capable will re open Aino adjust Adjust images automatically iman repa o AK Case Kk N Important Check the box Keep original resolution and de activate Adjust Images automatically Only now will the image parameters remain unchanged By clicking OK the selected images are passed to the JobManager 340 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual N eru x E i
75. Hecommended procedure Start with defect size 1 then adjust defect recognition If the effect is still too small use defect size 2 for further enhancement and approach the best possible result through small changes Important At first leave the Intensity slider on its default value 100 SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD 379 a E i BH i Li d z Ld T vi Dust and Scratch Removal white Black Detection e Jr ee ee ntensity 100 SisesFaat ies 1 Intensity GD 100 3 Slider Intensity Only when the results of the previous two sliders do not yield the desired results you can change Intensity in small increments to values smaller than 100 This will predominately be the case with images with a lot of details This slider enables to reduce the amount of erroneously recog nised artifacts This function controls the differentiation of which image details are recognised as true details and which are sup posed to be recognised as artifacts Always monitor the effect of the slider in the large preview window If appropriate also for different image tiles If the ntensity slider is at the very right which is the 100 position all recognised artifacts will be highlighted in red and will be elimi nated in the final scan respectively The more a slider will be moved to the left the more the amount of artifacts that wi
76. Hj a e i i i i ete 1 ee This selection will be offered to the user since longish scratches can have different origins It could for instance be a real scratch or sometimes also a faulty or dirty CCD cell in the scanner In case you have to consider both defect types you can use anoth er layer to treat the second type 4 Selection Orientation Minna QZ qm Depending on the orientation of the scratches on the scan original Defect type O White siack you can switch between horizontal or vertical orientation Orientation Horizontal vertical In case scratches are vertical and horizontal you can create a dh M nmm second layer and get rid of both of them Contrast en 5 Continuity r ap 4 388 6 13 SilverFast SRD iSRD SilverFast Manual 5 Slider Length This slider determines the maximum length of a scratch This parameter is the most important and has strongest effect on the Orientation Horizonta r1 recognition of artifacts with reference to other parameters The 5 default value is 30 Value range is between 5 and 200 Contrast eo 5 i i Continuity Gr 7 7 Smaller value recognize longer structures larger values recognize smaller structures vi Longish scratch removal Defect type C White fe Black Original Lenght 100 Length 10 In case parameter settings of this slider lead to results which could be further imp
77. Mode g Expert Mode oNO8 nW lx08 4368 01 Experienced users may enter the file names directly as a kind of program command Every check box in the Settings for new names dialogue resembles a shortcut consisting of the percent symbol and 2 letters followed by the used values he commands are entered without the Space key separating them Example 960N1496nW U Test 96oF96lIx9604 0 0190lt 960N14 The first 14 letters of the old filename shall be used nW U Test the images are added with the new name U Test NOTE The spaces they are applicable here 201x01 0 01 The images receive an index that starts with Zero and are increased by One for every additional image 9olt the old index of the images is added to the new name at the last position 2714 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Possible actions Possible Actions __ Leave Files Mov Files In this part of the dialogue it is decided if the images are to be Bi Copy Files renamed moved or copied while importing them If images are moved or copied the destination is to be speci fied Any album or any directory may be chosen here Target Folder Example for new name e Re naming Example Old Name Beispiel 234 jpg A demonstration how the set parameters will affect the file New name BeispielO0004368 jpq names SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 275 Subsequent Automatic Renaming This ac
78. N T profile is embedded into the TIFF data Penes With SilverFastHDR or DC an already existing and embed Embed ICC profiles ded profile is additionally displayed on top SilverFast Ai below SilverFast HDR i Calibration Profile The calibration profile from the IT8 target calibration This is to calibrate the input device scanner digital camera For SilverFastHDR DC it can be selected here Plug amp Play CMYK Plug amp Play CMYK EuroscaleCoated icc W The separation table or ICC profile for Plug amp Play CMYK separation is chosen here ZAN Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software 64 3 Presets SilverFast Manual Special Defaults Palette left SilverFast Ai right SilverFast DCPro AN Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software Special Defaults Dafaults General Aut CMS P ab onimg big LDhEher Cow Fiber White Frescan Moneehromer Miika Orat x fram Dia Lindt Gamma Hope Lancel Halftoning Dithering algorithms for scanning halftone images in line art mode Colour Filter Blind Colour oelect the colour which you wish the scanner to ignore during monochrome scans You can choose between red green or blue
79. PYRAMID2 No Filter Lt 10 0655 inch 100 0 100 0 228 dpi 13 04 MB Sari i No Filter 0 9 1 4 inch 100 095 100 096 2700 dpi 24 22 MB CC E liri dl Output settings Systemplatte Users gwg sktop PhotoProot CMYK Name preview BatchPicO004 tit TIFF Start G X Managing Complete Jobs After processing and saving individual job entries you can turn to managing the completed jobs The entries of the SilverFastJobManager menus can be used with completed jobs Here all base operations can be used for com pleted jobs Specific menu points New Creates a new empty job If there is a job already in the JobManager which has not yet been saved you will be asked whether you want to save that job first Open Contains a list of all saved jobs in a submenu The job will be loaded by selecting the appropriate entry from the menu The currently loaded job is highlighted in the submenu Close Closes the current job Save Saves the current job If the job is new i e it has not been saved before a dialogue pops up which prompts you to input a name for the job The location to save the job cannot be specified instead all jobs will be saved into the folder Jobs within the SilverFast folder Save as Saves the current job under a new name i e creates a copy of the job if the job has already been saved before Delete Contains a list of all jobs saved in a
80. Photoshop Be aware that Photoshop needs 3 4 times the RAM of the image you would like to scan 24 1 2 Installation SilverFast Manual SilverFast as a TWAIN Module TWAIN modules for SilverFast Version 6 and higher are only deliv ered for a few scanners and are generally not included on the installation CD Available TWAIN modules can be found on our web site If you do require a TWAIN module please check the download area for modules for your desired scanner http www silverfast com update en html LaserSoft recommends the use of the Photoshop plug in either directly via Photoshop or the SF Launcher Installation of TWAIN Modules The installation of TWAIN modules is similar to the described instal lation of the Photoshop plug in The downloaded installer is started by double clicking the icon Then follow directions Starting and Activating the SilverFast TWAIN module The exact steps for launching Si verFast strongly depend on the used imaging program and are only rudimentary described here e Launch the TWAIN compatible imaging program e Choose SilverFast in the TWAIN source option Search for the Import function in the imaging program and activate the SilverFast module for the connected scanner SilverFast Manual 1 2 Installation 25 SilverFast SilverFast HDR studio LaserSoft Imaging SilverFast Ai studio Credom Beoung Frodurt ir n WIE Lap bt
81. Scan Type E METALS M animar 14 28 Bit Grayscale 1 Bit Line Art 48 Bit Color 16 Bit Grayscale 48 Bit HDR Color 16 Bit HDR Grayscale A Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software Frame Palette SilverFast Ai SiS Ota Zz Densitoemeter Scan Type Filter i Serm lmage Type dam image Tyre Hama Ld Pad re aerial sair Dei COR 4d war 3 lg 4 if as Tam A as ass ime Mite F Open scan cure f Scan Type SilverFastAi Image Mode SilverFastHDRH DC In Scan Type SilverFast Ai rsp Image Mode SilverFast HDR DC you choose the colour depth bit depth of the fine scan Image Mode F R Te Mugen 16 8 Bit Grayscale 48 Bit Color 16 Bit Grayscale 48 Bit HDR Color 16 Bit HDR Grayscale Based on the internal colour depth of the hardware the selection in this combo box deter mines the colour depth of the output scan Most scanners produce internally more than 24 bit colour data depth i e 30 bit 3x10 bit per channel R G B 36 bit 3x12 bit or 48 bit 3x16 bit which is reduced for 24 bit output depth SilverFastAi reads the internal colour depth of your scanner and adapts the contents of this drop down menu accordingly The entry 42 224 bit colour shows that the scanner uses an internal colour depth of 42 bit SilverFast will internall
82. Si verFast NegaFix can be found by this link http www silverfast com show negafixprofiles en html The unpacked data can be imported into Sil iala verFast by means of the import menu found id in the NegaFix dialogue gt Film manufactur Kamea ers gt Import poirai E Tmn i y Oper D Dela E y i b I Aunn 1 oo Expert Dialogue Overview The expert dialogue comes up when you click the Expert button and consists of two major panels a the dialogue Expansion to monitor and control the dynamic range and expansion of the negative b the dialogue Curves to characterize the profiles and eliminate colour casts Film Type and Exposure beatin Film Type and Exposure Nea dip Agia H j ip Agta He E HDC Ph Tr HDG P W i EH E i 200 k r e 7 o8 o ia7 2 Daes ixpansion cures niir tnierince SilverFast Manual 229 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives Film Type and Exposure Negli ib m standard in AUTO Auto tolerance amher Others aes o mal d tolerance eS H Workflow of Expert Mode A short description of how to optimise a negative with the expert dialogue 1 Standard menu Select a film profile Even when none of the profiles will yield a good result the best possible should be selected If the deviation is too strong it would be better to switch to Other or Standard Hefer to the proce
83. Sze deleted by the context menu sacs Sort by type Snap thumbnails to grid Select all Delete all Delete selected Refresh thumbnails Rename selected E I rm LX A T SilverFast v r ka MESS xic poe d aro i eee Ej Ka Ki El pne za EH J com ee bop u mm ki nani J daran DR ies rn i dil 3 Je as Ea T uu M 5 az m x J ovd 1a gt 1 D imm i TE Di keza Raca BT a COLTI Ppi T An rJ X i Tasco 280 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Editing Name and Image Comments in the Album A small text field for image comments is available beneath the image name below the miniatures Both may be edited in the album Editing the file name Click the name TIFF TIFF Lotus k Lotus lOx1 amp Etif Lotus 10x15cm lt gt lt gt Cancel Editing the comments click on the empty tip of the brackets i e on an already existent comment Please add a comment if necessary Lotus 10x15cm Please add a comment if f Cancel Ok Setting the Size of the Miniatures in the Album Window ram The thumbnails of the images are adjust SE tae a able in their size just as they are in the v Overview 64 64 j i Overview 96 96 overview window Again four levels are epo el available Light table 32 32 These settings are then valid for all Light table 64 64 v Light table 96 96 a
84. The grid distance is freely choosable Moving Images by means of Keyboard Shortcuts Cmd Alt Arrow moves the image to the next help line the margin or the next grid line depending on which is closest SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 327 Creative Techniques Composing Images and Texts The simplest case is a basic superimposition of a couple of images to a collage i e one large scale image in the background and a couple of small scale image on top AUR n rE ETO Wiss j j NW INY oc Right the final result in the print a hem Every collage can be added with any text passages An example of a small holiday brochure is displayed here n prae z za nm PrinTao B i Sarasota Florida ches un Sta Key Longboat Ker and Anna Maria bland fa gs alan the he pi he Marder es if Fije Wanatee n relative of the Fayrpopotam as 328 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual More complex compositions can easily and widely be accom plished via the templates automatically ZE Es Sino Tr At first choose a template z Erase exyar Evanan Select images to be entered into the image frames Pare Sane aE Add image subtitles automatically with the text tool EL iJ se e Entera title for the print page document E See E em 533 5 cm 833 5 m o Possibly interchange
85. all colour management will be used in the work flow e CMS Scanner gt Internal CMS Input gt Internal Here the preferred model for correcting the colour deviations of the current scanner can be selected The choice is between none use embedded profile only with SilverFast HDR DC DCPro PhotoCD and ColorSync calibration Windows ICM e CMS Internal gt Monitor Here the matching from the internal colour space of SilverFast to the current monitor is being defined None is if the user does not want any matching Auto indicates that Photoshop s internal colour space settings will be used collectively Please check the internal ICC profile set in Si verFast should be the same as the one allocated in Photoshop s internal colour space ColorSync Windows ICM is for those applications that do not supply matching from inside the application but the the user does want colour matching CMS Internal Output The preferred system for defining the output colour space gen eration can be chosen here Select RGB for no output match ing ColorSync Windows ICM if you want ColorSync to do the output matching Cie Lab if you want to generate device independent colour space P amp P CMYK for SilverFast s own powerful separation to CMYK with Photoshop matching 62 3 Presets SilverFast Manual Profiles for ColorSync ICM Profiles Yor ColorSyne 1 Here it is d
86. and corrects existing colour casts Colour casts will be eliminated in highlights and shadows Coloured otandard setting with few scanners which already have a fairly neutral image rendering with the factory settings Also with active IT8 calibration optional Clicking the auto agjust triggers the image automatic and keeps any existing colour casts Coloured C The small C within the coloured auto adjust button indicates that a ColorSync workflow Windows ICM workflow is active within SilverFast It will become active when input calibration has been switched to ColorSync ICM and an ICC profile Windows ICM profile has been allocated in the colour manage ment settings under Option in SilverFast The following example shows the image before and after usage of the auto adjust and the corresponding histograms 5 1 Image auto adjust SilverFast Manual The image appears a little flat because no correct highlight detail is present in the image The reason is Within the image there is no value for white merely 10 96 grey The histogram shows that the first pixels in white begin between 9 and 13 96 Histagrarm Color Space Compression Color Gai Removal gjne jan 3 G 9 Histogram without auto adjust al Gradation without auto adjust SilverFast Manual 5 1 Image auto adjust 115 A moment after pressing the auto adjust button we realis
87. as the file size as Name for this scan frame 6 While depressing the Alt key and dragging the scan frame will Ausgabe be copied Position the new scan frame exactly onto the same 2 100 0 A a position as the first frame 5 100 0 5 0 Reidel Q Faktor Master Mbyte 15 20 pem 0 12 E E ean e MEE T6 dpi 20lpem 0 1245 Lead 450 7 3 Addendum SilverFast Manual D Name 40lpcm 46ME Original Skal C 90 100 0 3 6 so 1000 Q Faktor Master Mbyte 15 40 pem 0 46 NE Ausgabe HH 2 152 dpi 9 a Semt LL r D 154 3 SilverFast Ai S RW et A Genera Frame Uenasipsenener Device USREPSON E Gl Sean Mady Normal m Original Rinci Had Pei jihan Per ne a Frame epo Sae E E Prescan Bram RO j Our paper printer 80 locm Example of positioned test scans on a DIN A4 format sheet Na 9 0 em fla 50 oem For the new scan frame input 30 Ipcm under Screen Then input 30 Ipcm for name Now repeat steps 6 to 7 for the values 40 lpcm until 80 lpcm with steps of 10 in between In the main dialogue change to the General panel and select batch Mode File under Scan Mode 10 Start processing of the seven scan frames with clicking on 12 13 Scan Batch A dialogue will come up asking you for a destina tion for the final scans When the seven scans are done mount them in a layout pro gram onto
88. be made undone The preview window updates imme diately Retouching example What was changed The left image is the original and the right image shows the result or retouching The sign on the left jamb was copied to the right jamb and then deleted from its original position The deletion can be seen on the previous page On the right jamb the switch was completely removed as was its shadow 404 6 15 Clone tool SilverFast Manual 6 16 PrinTao e Extended Print Dialogue of SilverFastAiStudio mn In the standard versions of SilverFastAi the Print button merely opens a simple printing dialogue Only single scan frames may be printed out The Studio versions use this button to open PrinTao the extended print dialogue Contents of the Extended Print Dialogue PrinTao Page number Page Page breaker Add or delete i ae Image List r n __ ___ Choosing scan frames in the preview awara window Printer Settings damos Tools and Choice of ICC Printer Profile Fa a T Hi Wil i N WI j E Add im In Mr We Md Delete Page and Layout Settings wa a Rotate Presets which size of the image anderen ee SS Reflect vertically e Reflect horizontally Centre Adjust Cut e mage text should be considered in the print and 1 1 copy function Thumbnail of chosen Image in the Image List Start Printout Print Resolution of Active Image in Window of Rulers the Print Dialogue Printed P
89. be set accordingly Simply use the above mentioned keys Displaying Darkest Point Macintosh Press Command key and Ctrl key Windows Press Crtl key Darkest Point 132 5 2 e Pipette SilverFast Manual a CMY RGB selector Highlight triangle Highlight tone value Minimum tone value Highlight compression value Switch between linear N and logarithmic L 5 3 The Histogram The histogram in SilverFast is a powerful tool with which you can examine image data in order to optimise them manually We already used the histogram with the auto adjust for control purposes Greyscale channe CMY channels Histogram switch standard mode three part parallel staggered three part Midtone value Midtone triangle Shadow triangle zs 17 Highlight Shadow 98 Shadow tone value Min Max 98 Maximum tone value M IF Color Space Compression 100 Shadow compression value Color Cast Removal Ts 100 a Percentage of colour cast removal N NA cm x a KA Cancel Slider for colour cast removal Histogram Dialogue in SilverFast SE versions The dialogue is simplified in all SilverFast SE r T versions and is recommended for novice users SilverFast Manual 5 3 Histogram 133 By setting the highlight shadow points in the histogram the available tonal values are expanded to occupy the entire greyscale of 256 values The image becomes significantly more brillian
90. by select ing another colour space the measured values in the densitometer will be converted to the values of the selected colour space The following colour spaces are available RGB CMYK Lab CMY HSL K and LCH Now as before you can select the desired colour spaces by clicking the value display O Densitometer CONTROL 146 5 3 Histogram SilverFast Manual 5 4 Gradation Dialogue Gradation Curves Gradation refers to the relationship between input and output The tonal values of an image are optimised in such a way that the adjustment of highlight shadow points and gradation give the best possible result Inexperienced users will often try to optimise the image by means of brightness and contrast control thus lead ing to significant deterioration of the image The correct way of image optimisation can be achieved as follows ka 1 Setting highlight and shadow 2 Optimising gradation 3 Selective colour correction 4 Size adjustments 5 Sharpening unsharp mask If you regulate by contrast or brightness control the danger exists that the highlight will burn out and the shadow will burn in SilverFast Manual 5 4 Gradation curves 147 Overview Save load gradation curves Save B MY RGB e n iai iod C GB selector LJ LI 2 7 Input fields Selector linear N loga rithm L Gradation Dialogue in Si verFast SE versions The dialogue is simplified in
91. color palehes be peitianed as sheen above Conbene yesth ite E ite qa drag i a cnra Vs eerrest hem E cancel a E Stan E r Steps of a Calibration with SilverFast DC Pro Other than with flat bed or film scanners digital camera users will often come across angularly photographed IT8 targets A chart that is exactly perpendicular to the optical axis of the camera could reflect and hence make the photograph useless for later calibra tion For compensation of angular distortions SilverFast DCPro is equipped with a flexible and perceptively variable scan frame This frame contains a grid that resembles the individual measurement fields of the IT8 target The calibration itself is the same as in all other SilverFastAi ver sions The only difference is the different positioning of the scan frame Launch SilverFast DCPro and load the IT8 image into the preview win dow of the main menu Open the IT8 dialogue by clicking the respective button in the vertical toll palette located left of the pre view window The grid will immediately appear in the preview window Position the grid exactly over the IT8 target l 0 EDE TL lh T Tu Once the frame is set correctly the calibration may commence by clicking the Start button The following sequence is identical to the normal SilverFast IT8 calibration For more information please read Chapter 7 Calibration of your Scanner using Si
92. colour gamut one cannot assume colours to be consistent Scanner Profile Colour Management System p N Printer Profile Monitor Profile Printer Image Setter Monitor SilverFast Manual 71 Addendum 413 What is an ICC Profile An ICC profile characterizes the colour space behaviour of a device An ICC profile is a data file and will be used to calibrate the device What is IT8 IT8 is an industry standard test form designed to measure the perform ance of input devices and generate ICC profiles This is where a CMS becomes relevant A dedicated ICC profile has to be generated for every input and output device describing their colour space behaviour Within the workflow the colour man agement System compares two profiles that of the data sender i e a scanners with that of the data receiver i e a monitor and cal culates a relation for the conversion which will translate the image data into the right colour impression Objective of the SilverFast Colour Management SilverFast differs from the majority of scan software by its function al power With reference to colour management SilverFast offers three significant functions 1 Automatic Matching with Photoshop The high level of integration of Si verFast s architecture into the Adobe Photoshop 5 architecture assures matching of the SilverFast preview with the final result in Photoshop This is a very important highlight of Si
93. creation of the overview can be monitored and stopped or Dn continued if desired k SilverFast Manual 6 8 Film holder 235 hr Film strip holder h n A Attention Functions are different from scanner to scanner and some of the functions are only available with specific scan ners or imaging applications To select an image click on it and confirm with the OK button By means of the numbers you can select an image for which no overview scan has yet been created After selecting an image the dialogue will close only when the overview scan for the current image being processed has been completed To unload an APS film it must be rewound first Use the Eject button on the left border of the prescan window to do this If this does not work occasionally turn the scanner off and on Then the scanner will start rewinding the film automatically Turn off again before the scanner starts reloading the film strip from the cartridge and take out your film listen to the rewind noise Then switch the scanner on again Film Strip Holder Using the film strip holder is very similar to the APS adapter Before launching Si verFastAi the scanner must be switched on and a film strip must be loaded In the General palette select Negative or Positive according to your original In case there has not been a prescan accordingly a preview scan of the first image on the film strip will be generated As with the APS
94. defines the colour match ing foundation the colour management is building upon For the majority of users it is advised to select the monitor colour space in order to unburden the computer Once you have selected Internal gt Monitor ColorSync ICM you have to define the internal colour space by a profile you can select freely In case you have chosen Automatic under Internal select the profile of the application s internal colour space The Pho toshop plug in leaves the monitor matching to Photoshop Grey Here you can select a grey profile for greyscale scans which can also be embedded into the image file SilverFast Manual 7 1 Addendum 421 Qutput Printer The integration of the printer into the colour management is the arama highlight but also the part inducing the most difficulties The a Adobe KT BR scanner s colour space and the monitor s are the same in principle Gay Generic Gray Frahie ice RGB there may be small differences in size and the related Wer ans au CS ColorMauch 3 01 SWOR2ESS ice white points are shifted against each other The printer behaves Pee Pale aaen ie SE PCIE RON differently the output is not only depending on the inks but also on Japnansrandard ite wen i emad Pesn ec a kav the paper stock how is the paper white how is the paper absorb bu kir puces ne n ac ency All this information has to be considered by the profile The tt900 CF ice M
95. dia logue when opened from the main menue If you would like to use the ScanPilot ImagePilot permanently click the check box Open on Start up The ScanPilot ImagePilot will then open at every SilverFast start up this is the default setting of the ScanPilot ImagePilot Click the icon with an image of an aeroplane in the vertical tools palette located left of the preview window once you are finished using it Help Texts in ScanPilot ImagePilot Brief help texts beside the tool buttons of the ScanPilot ImagePi lot inform you about what to do next During the task Frame position you will be asked Which part you do want to scan Click and hold with your mouse on one cor ner of the frame and drag it to the size you want After that the image Auto Adjust will be automatically applied and the next dialogue window will come up here gradation ZAN Attention Please note that some dialogues that have been opened using the ScanPilot ImagePilot are only partially available This for example is the case when using the gradation dialogue and merely serves security purposes In the example only the slider that is moveable is the one for the mid tones In order to obtain satisfactory results while using the other sliders a certain level of expertise is necessary In any case the ScanPilot ImagePilot can be closed and the full accessibility to all other sliders and parameters is given With t
96. enter the value into a field and ilverFas S ast SE press the Alt key a and click into the field again all values are amp Mui etu now equal in a row y te OMA mne a af 2 Az SilverFast SE Versions This dialogue is not available in the SE versions SilverFast Manual 5 8 Expert dialogue 187 Button shows or hides the curve window Expert Dialog ot M 000 b o 012 11 T s 025 28 82 050 48 57 075 7s 82 087 86 91 100 100 100 Range Max 100 100 Range Min 0 0 Shadow Pnt 100 100 Highlight Pnt 0 o Shadow 0 Middle C 0 Highlight 0 0 f Cancel v 0 9 18 43 68 84 100 100 0 100 0 0 0 0 Gr 0 12 25 50 75 37 100 100 o 100 0 0 0 0 Fourth Column for Grey Values Besides the values for red green blue or cyan magenta and yellow the expert dialogue has an added fourth column This fourth column Gr is a separate channel for greyscale images and always reflects the grey values of an image Showing Hiding the Curve Window Dialogue With the small rectangle the curve window dialogue on top of the expert dialogue can be hidden or shown Expert Dialog 000 012 025 050 075 087 100 Range Max Range Min S
97. eyes on the image Click OK and use the mouse to draw a frame around the eyes By keeping the Shift key pressed numerous individual frames may also be drawn By pressing the Alt key these individual frames can be removed Within the now opened dialogue window the red eyes may now be neutralised by means of the sliders By clicking Detect the sensitivity of the colour detection is determined and by clicking Darkness the degree of darkness of the pupil can be adjusted By clicking the OK button the set tings are accepted The Remove red eyes button now displays a darkened centre By clicking onto the button and then into the correction frame this function is disabled SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 291 The extended image settings dialog Image Settings Dialogue Correction of Exposure and White Balance In SilverFast DC DC Pro from version 6 2 upwards the divided window Image settings appears as an individual dialogue which usually appears below the main dialogue Depending on the kind of opened image the window changes its appearance If JPEG TIF or RAW data files that are not fully supported by SilverFast DC are opened the basic version of the dialogue opens If a camera RAW data file that contains an internal RAW data conversion profile is opened an extended dialogue will appear Exposure he slider simulates a change in exposure time of th
98. f Vertical scaling 76 Virtual Light Table VLT 42 255 265 Album window 278 Arrangement of the VLT 265 Blue or green dots within the thumbnails 277 Drag amp Drop 279 Edit name and image comment 281 Export button 287 JobManager 288 Keyboard shortcuts 290 Launching the Virtual Light Table VLT 265 Magnifier 2 7 PrinTao in VLT 299 RAW data file 286 Rotating and flipping images 282 Size of the miniatures 281 Sort images by drag amp drop 2 9 Sort images by marking 280 Workflow example 289 VLT 255 265 340 See Virtual Light Table VLT W Welcome dialogue 26 57 White Bbalance 292 Workflow of optimising images 113 X XML files 318 Y Z Zoom 95 97 108 184 323 Densitometer 186 Editing a zoomed prescan 102 Magnifyer turns green 100 Magnifyer turns red 100 Zoom and difficult corrections 101 Zooming by click dragging the mouse 99 Zooming by mouse click 97 Zooming by the zoom display popup 98 Zooming in the Prescan 95 Zooming in the prescan 184 478 7 4 Index SilverFast Manual SilverFast Manual 7 4 Index 479 480 74 Index SilverFast Manual Chapter 7 5 7 5 Glossary A additive primaries Hed green and blue light that produce white light when added together ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard format for representing data or text in 8 bit chunks B bit binary digit The basic unit of information used by computers It has two st
99. field popup v Do padding with zero r we kan na frin Rees menu shows the term Batch Pic This name may be changed to any other term Flower 14 Digits Index Flower0001 tif Alternatively pre defined index gatchpic elements may also be chosen 1 Digit Index from the input field popup 2 Digits index menu 3 Digits Index 14 Digits Index 15 Digits index Since each file name is given BarchPle a numerical value the index it will normally be named by 1 Digit Index means of the second popup i2 Digits Index menu 3 Digits Index 4 Digits Index 4 Dig its Index ia Digits index 3 E For more complex image series the names and the indexes may Flowers be extended by pressing the plus keys which in turn will show more input fields popup menus Roses 4 Digits Index Flora Flowers Roses OOOL tif The minus button deletes the respective input field popup menu For clarification an example of the currently selected combina tion of name and index is given below the last popup menu 354 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual Y The Index field allows the setting of further options indicating M Reset for every batch scan how the Index is to be used v Do padding with zero Reset for every batch scan With each launch of a batch scan the index is reset to the initial settings __ Ignore existing frame names Start index The
100. field for textures is integrated into the popup menu and may not be floating The functionality is reduced accordingly There are no templates 298 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual PrinTao in VLT Via the PrinTao button in the VLT the user gets to choose whether to create contact sheets of the images in an album or overview as well as to print a random of images from an album or the overview Contact sheet of Overview Contact sheet of Album v Page number Page breaker Navigator File browser ER Browser for selecting images Were and templates SilverFast PhotoProof only in Studio versions Printer settings and selection of ICC profile Page and Layout settings presets whether the long side the small side or the exact size of the images should be used for the printing page Thumbnail preview of image selected in image list Scaling and image size of the active image within the printed page Start printout Output resolution slider and edit field of the active image within the printed page Close dialogue Headline Page free position Add or delete Printing area marked by purple border o T Prinlao B Tools Add Delete Rotate Stacking sequence Reflect vertically Reflect horizontally Centre Adjust Cut e mage text e Export as XML QuickTime help Copyright Copyright text
101. file by its file name That name is either a so called charge number or a production date printed either directly on the calibration target or on its protective sleeve or below the barcode SilverFast Manual 7 2 T8 calibration 435 n lal For calibration in reflective mode please make sure to select the corresponding reference file for reflective targets The same applies for transparenoy calibration accordingly Confirm your choice with a click on the Open button 7 Saving the ICC Profile After the calibration has been completed you will get the mes sage Calibration has been successful You ll then have the option to save the result of the calibration as an ICC profile for system wide colour management Name and location of the profile can be selected by the user Close the dialogue window by clicking OK A new prescan will be launched simultaneously to update the preview If the name of the profile just An item named SF OCHS already existis in Chis exists you are asked for re cuiii Dres ek r Fate wit i d jek placing the just existing older profile ca ches 8 Calibration is now Active The IT8 calibration button is now coloured and not longer grey Er Attention For a subsequent activation of the calibration please choose the following colour management settings Choose the option ColorSync Windows ICM in the Scanner gt internal menu After this choo
102. for removal with a clone tool SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD 369 For optimum recognition of artifacts Si verFast uses two different methods regular dust and scratch removal and the removal of linear artifacts These work with parameters with similar names yet have different effects on different artifacts Another advantage of SilverFast SRD all processing uses the full dynamic range bit depth of the scanner involved The better the scanner the better will be the result of any processing Uncorreted silde With SilverFast SRD corretced slide Effect from SilverFast SRD Left uncorreted silde 3 0 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD SilverFast Manual Expert Mode Allows usage of slider Environ LE ment size and opens menu Longish scratch removal PETS of Layers D Ty Add new layer Delete active layer m Move layer in front of previous 7 Move layer behind following r Reset parameters Creating Masks Changing mask tools Click button and hold mouse depressed when p p up comes up change to tool T w desired Brush Polygon Lasso um View of Artifacts Realtime correction on off El Original without correction i Artifacts removed x Artifacts highlighted red EE Opens help instructions and description of functionality SRD LaserSoft Imaging Description of the special functions of ISRD can be fo
103. histogram helps you evaluate the tones in an image HSB Hue Saturation Brightness A colour model that defines a colour by specifying its hue saturation and brightness imagesetter A printer that prints computer files at high resolution on photo graphic paper or film interpolation Mathematical calculation the scanner performs to increase resolution J JPEG Joint Photographic Expert Group A compression algorithm for image files SilverFast Manual 7 5 Glossary 485 K kilobyte A unit of memory equal to 1024 bytes L Line art An image type made up of black and white pixels only Ipi lines per inch The unit of measure for halftone line screen frequency or how many halftone cells occur in an inch LUT Look Up Table The table of colours a computer can display at a given time M megabyte A unit of memory equal to 1024 kilobytes memory Computer hardware that can store information for later retrieval This term can mean either hard disk memory or RAM memory oee also RAM midtones The range of tones between the shadows and highlights of an image moire Undesirable banding when scanning a halftone image due to the halftone screen interacting with the scanning grid 486 7 5 Glossary SilverFast Manual O overprinting Printing over areas already printed as opposed to using a Knockout P PICT The native Macintosh file format for images pixel Picture Element The sm
104. installs them If SilverFast launches or the en scanner was found the welcome screen initially appears SilverFast Ai G Jaib omm M ri r grad Derman kirn 3 If an internet connection is estab lished the respective topics on our web site can be reached by means of the buttons within the dialogue You can also check for possible updates here if an update is available you may down load it from here directly X Ln 28 1 2 Installation SilverFast Manual First Name John Last Name Brown Organization ABC Serial number f Demo Mode Limo rad in vraie First Mame Last Name Brown Company ADS Aerial mires Inr cider eee bee ner remb r l i RAWE v eriiant Sier Fast Epson vid 2r5d Photon II 1234567890ABCDEF 789d Unlock SilverFast HPSS TL Cancel Pharell eel CENT ides SilverFast Ai 2t u Oebus wining hie _ ha 3 lie Duns read Hirm riii r s Ungra deri m QEK Joa Tana a EI st E TT fati e B Farror Bran L2 TU Ti SibeiFas Epoon OF hk After this dialogue has been closed the registration window appears Please note that the 20 digit serial number is to be entered with Out spaces and in capital letters Make sure that the number you enter consists only of numbers between 0 and 9 and letters between A and F Some SilverFast versions will require a 30 digit code in future which is made up of 6 groups of 5 values e
105. luminance L The colour square will show the colour hue angle horizontally and the saturation S vertically The markings short bars within the vertical fields small points within the colour square indicate the exact position of the highlight shadow points in the colour space The bars as well as the points are colour cast correction controls and must be moved with the mouse Any change will be displayed within the NegaFix dialogue window and immediately updated in the SilverFast preview window With the integrated zoom function you can freely zoom into and out of the colour space This will enable very subtle corrections of the neutrality of the orange mask highlight shadow points 228 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives SilverFast Manual u pdevt an le The Curves Menu he second window of the expert dialogue the Curves panel monitors the RGB curves of the active film profile All curves black as well as the single curves red green and blue This dialogue allows modification of an existing film profile directly and allows it to be saved as a new profile The colour character of the negative profile can be changed and colour casts can be removed as well Changing the Film Gradation Curves The Edit button activates the curves dialogue A black over lay curve defined by a succession of black curves points will appear The sequence of points represents th
106. mount C ROES target 35mm transparent reference is date printed directly on the target Examples Where to Find the Production Charge Number on IT8 Targets of Different Manufacturers LaserSoft Imaging target LaserSoft Imaging target 4x5 inch transparent 5x inch reflective sticker on the protective sleeve written directly on the target bottom right LaserSoft Imaging target DIN A4 reflective printed directly on the target bottom right C ROES target DIN A4 reflective printed directly on the target bottom left SilverFast Manual 7 2 IT8 calibration 439 mtr EZ oa P Non calibrated Scan E Calibrated Scan IT8 Calibration 440 7 2 T8 calibration SilverFast Manual Chapter 7 3 7 3 Addendum The following chapter introduces into basic scanning concepts and why a good scanner usually has more than 8 bits per colour 7 3 Addendum ocan concept 439 Scan resolution Need for more than 256 levels of grey Screening Calculating the scan resolution Which resolution does SilverFast indicate Optimizing scanner resolution for inkjet printers Selective colour correction Colour model relations Keyboard shortcuts Mac and PC 7 4 Index 7 5 Glossary 437 454 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 454 455 470 471 491 442 7 3 Addendum SilverFast Manual Scanning Concepts What is a brilliant image Do really need very high resol
107. mum setting for Unsharp Masking or descreening and GANE Output RGB LAB or CMYK Select Scan RGB LAB or Plug amp Play CMYK Select the appropriate separation profile in case you scan CMYK for your type of printing Scan 112 5 Tools SilverFast Manual Workflow of Optimising Images 4 Image Auto adjust Defining highlight shadow Y Adjusting gradation curves Y Global colour correction Selective colour correction Retouching SilverFastSRD Clone tool Size adjustments Y Filters Unsharp masking descreening GANE Output profile Y Output scan SilverFast Manual 5 e Tools 113 5 1 Image Auto Adjust Auto Gradation The auto adjust is a convenient tool for achieving a quick image optimisation This function investigates the end points of the image data i e it looks for the brightest and darkest points of the image in the current frame and sets highlight and shadow points respec tively Also the distribution in the half and three quarter tone is checked and depending on this distribution a gradation curve linear or logarithmic is generated for correction In SilverFast the the image auto adjust button can have the following states Grey otandard setting with most scanners Clicking the auto adjust button triggers the image automatic
108. n xer am nid asi mia a Pune n d a 7 ji ELE MEH Kan a s CRE MELKE sa amp lt Cyan Magenta Yellow Black md bees Ge aim ibus xal Coe mus baas pid m ier m a a sapra ir m m I Cl 4 mmm sz oe dij B eaa jad BI ym si et lt fe Combination C M C M Y 92 4 Prescan concept SilverFast Manual Changing the Separation Parameter and Control on the Effect of Shadow build up for Example It appears to be very practical to already show the effect of various separation profiles in prescan A J una Activate the permanent softproof function and choose e g black K C M and Y are to be deactivated In the prescan window the image els lel will now be displayed in accordance Qi gt v with the pre selected separation 45 gt 39 Qs 29 5 profile w 2 z 162 145 Plug amp Play CMYK EuroscaleCoated icc E In order to switch to a different separation profile open the Options ge Options dialogue e Prescan f Scan RGB Sf Quit Frame Densitometer x HONEs u s Sheethed Coated vz icm z re a Switch the profile under C5 ColorMatch 3 01 SWOS2BSB icc OA ET Plug amp Play CMYK in the CMS ssa v FuresealeCoated c IUe r EurascaleUricoated icc k m enenc CM leiti Scanner gt intemal Calibration palette f hn eode ditis e internal
109. name will become the actual file name If no name has been allocated there the Save dialogue will propose Unnamed 1 It is advised to allocate an individual name here Nae Sibeerf att Sax As ONE Asahia Fermi x tut Where Deian x Fel Forma TUFF E 242 6 9 File formats SilverFaste Manual 5ave Wwe rFas Ease Az MF Bahia Tevl x til Where Documents E Format TIFF Scan Mode Batch Mode Normal File Batch Mode File TU lt Scan Batch Save erf ap Where m m Format TIFF Tel Bach Counter cal Rater for exery batch ican 1 Cancel r F Save 4 File format You can choose between various file formats under Format The file formats that are offered will depend on whether the scan will be in the RGB see red arrows or in the CMYK colour space see green arrows The existing table will give you an overview In the case of some formats i e UPEG and DCS an addi tional box Options will become active Additional param eters for these special file formats can be set up Save Siberian Sart Sibeerl ail Gaie A amp F Calmage leg hir As SF Caprn ge leg White 2 Darme ni bi M LI Where 1 Dat same ri lii r d el Fa mar JPEG ne Opteors Forrua pcs i l Optices Cane fre Case ie PEG Ogreni DCS Options nali tj F _ File Format Loss g aley High qial t e Si
110. numeration of the index is freely selectable Even a negative starting point may be chosen This is com monly used with film strios which already contain the film strip number of 1 and have one or more exposures Do padding with zero Image numbers that have less positions than the previously set index number are automatically filled with zeros in front of the number An image numbered 13 will receive a 4 digit index number i e 0013 Ignore existing frame names Current file names are complete ly ignored and are replaced with new names Use image number instead of sequence number Only valid for film scanners With the check box activated the actual number of the scan frame is selected instead of the sequential number Starting the Real Scan Processing eo A click on the Start button in the JM window will initiate the auto mE x matic processing of selected entries This process can take more n j Ay pe time depending on the intended settings for image optimisation BM Ime particularly when using maximum scans high resolutions large B greyscale or multisampling etc BIY E gt The advantage is the user can now leave his workplace take care B esprime ja of other things and allow the scanner and computer to processes i in 81 IW the job by itself SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFastJobManager 355 jobMiznager lab Mnrirted 1 00 beh onga 0 AILES NE i T dah
111. o dne X uraeninm L E na AE Page PELIS Ha eaput A Ar Asma i lur barkazq All directories containing image data are identified and saved by means of the browser The central album window now acts as an organizer for these images Any number of individual albums are available By clicking the album names in the album palette the user may switch between the albums directly When switching merely the album window window is changed The browser and the overview window remain untouched The path for saving the albums may be set to General palette Options Special palette For SilverFast DC Pro the size of the cache memory may also be set here 2 8 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual an n mann nan n Choose all All images in the active album can be chosen by the Command A combi nation Windows Ctrl A Drag amp Drop Drag amp drop is the quickest and easiest working method Images may be dragged out of the browser out of the overview out of the search dialogue or even directly from the desktop into the album window Capture the files drag them over the album window and release the mouse button Even entire folders may be copied directly from the desktop by this method If the album window is hidden images may be dragged directly onto the Show hide album button or onto an album name in the album palette Each newly dragged image file is active this
112. of the scanner can clearly distinguish This can be seen when two lines being very close to each other can still be seen as two different lines and not as one Interpolated resolution is mathematical resolution which as we will see later is only important for line art scans not for greyscale scans It is calculated via hardware or software Greyscale Greyscales are of very high importance for scanning technology because in order to reproduce a greyscale image the scanner has to sense every single image point with a certain depth of data in order to reproduce the different levels of grey correctly A good scanner should be sufficient to distinguish 256 levels of grey 8 bit but as we will see on the next page this is not enough The scanner should distinguish more than 256 levels of grey internally 444 7 3 Addendum SilverFast Manual Need for More than 256 Levels of Grey Images are rarely ideal Furthermore the scanner itself can deviate in itself while scanning images Adjusting the highlight shadow values of an image on a prescan lets a scanner with an internal 10 to 8 bit transformation expand the reduced tonal range fig 1 to a full range of 256 levels of grey By expanding a reduced tonal range with only 8 bit transformation gaps in the tonal scale are produced where grey values are missing Detail and sharpness of the image are lost or reduced This can also happen when the transformation algorithm from 10 to
113. on Delete X f c f Leave 88 4 Prescan concept SilverFast Manual eoe 23 Programs e m F n Forward View Path Computer 69 items 1 58 GB available v f Adobe Photoshop 7 Ki Adobe ImageReady 7 0 9 Adobe Photoshop 7 Adobe Photoshop 7 0 Install Log 3 Helpers y E Plugins gt Adobe ImageReady Only LT Adobe Photoshop Only 3 Digimarc 3 Effects EPS and PDF I File Formats r Filters I Import Export Y SilverFast Epson SF LogFile v 3 SilverFast 51 Help IT8 Reference C Jobs PPCMYK Profile a Prefs S Previews _ SFprofR Epson GT 9700 SilverFast Epson 3 SilverFast HDR gt 3 SilverFast NikonM E 2 TWAIN a Import Export Alias y E2 7 Y Y YV Y Y Y y Activating Scan Frames In order to activate a scan frame simply click on it The scan frame will show the marquee being active Deleting a Scan Frame In order to delete a scan frame activate the frame by clicking onto it then click the Delete Frame button in the vertical tool bar Reset All during Deletion of the Prescan Frame If only one scan frame is still showing in the prescan window a general reset can be accomplished by clicking the icon for deleting the frame In this way all parameters are set back to work settings and the content of the folder Previews is deleted Are you sure to delete ALL previews and ALL preview files and
114. pages 306 Centre image in printout 302 Centre on page 309 Changing the image clipping within the image frame 305 Click dragging 308 Composing images and texts 328 Context menu 331 Control buttons 309 Copyright notes 317 Create freely positionable text framework 316 Crop image 304 Cut image 309 Cut image option 303 Delete button 309 SilverFast Manual 7 4 Index 469 EXIF IPTC data 298 Export 309 Export print documents 318 Grid frame 327 Help lines and grid frames on print pages 326 Image list 405 Invert button 303 Keyboard shortcuts in PrinTao 332 Layout menu 307 Load 309 Navigator File Browser 300 Number of pages 307 Page and layout settings 405 Page number 405 Printer Settings 405 Printer setup 391 Printing area 405 Print single image 302 Priority 307 Exact size 307 Long side 307 Small side 307 Reflect vertically horizontally 309 Rotate button 303 309 Rulers 405 Save 309 Scaling 323 Scaling images on a print page 324 Scaling images within the image frame 325 Stacking sequence buttons 309 Templates 298 316 319 Activate Deactivate templates 322 Adapt template 320 Application of default templates 321 Apply to all pages 320 Create layouts 320 Delete image frame 321 Delete template 320 Drag amp Drop 321 New template from page 319 Template modifiers 320 Undo 320 Text tools 309 310 Close text box 310 Colour 312 Copyright note 317 EXIF 314 Font window 310 GPS 315 IPTC 314 Meta data 311 314
115. pargi SAR TT KA a 0S e Fi dm 2 3 rM M m se ALE se 2 M co s lo NENNEN A Tons Carn n rya di 24 Panes lora Gima O 0 0 i E Wises nds ama Bi u Eii La ner a D 11 s a ne pi tasa is Pur iir acd MIT 11 aide vitri a EI ma al lia LI bakir a PER B w i E E In our example we have placed a short text left hand within the image For changing the copyright note at any time afterwards the dia logue can simply be opened again by choosing the entry in the text menu SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 317 Save Save as Export Load Export Print Documents as XML Files Print page layouts can be saved from within PrinTao for a repeated application By the Save as function existing and modified tem plates may be saved under a new name Files are saved in XML format containing all frame parameters and text but no image data When exporting print page layouts they are saved in XML format ted files as well including the images used on the page The image data will be named PictureExport 00000000 JPG PictureEx port 00000001 JPG It is advisable to create a new destination folder for each Export Via loading both the saved and the exported print page layouts can be reloaded into the PrinTao 318 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Templates in PrinTao Under the second tab in the PrinTao dialogue the user can find a number of predefin
116. period of 3 or 6 months SilverFast welcomes you with a dialogue that reminds you of any available updates This dialogue allows you to directly update the software provided that an internet connection is available SilverFast Manual 1 2 Installation 33 QuickTime Movies SilverFast on line Training with QuickTime Movies SilverFast is the first imaging software using 1 1 QuickTime movies a i 65i including sound for on line training The user immediately learns Qusime Quicktime M Movie what the function does and how it is to be applied D Training Never has complex software been easier to master 4 Please check back with our home page which movies are available we will be constantly adding more movies We will eventually have QuickTime movies for all SilverFast functions Here is a selection of the growing number of movies ees etaa n s re ee MI n wma hem M r e as zma jJ ga Deel ji Ubrum s La r aran t dm SS General introduction in SilverFast SilverFast MidPip4 Silverrast SC2G SilverFast SRD 34 1 2 Installation SilverFast Manual 2 Overview This chapter introduces into how to start Si verFast It gives an overview of the Si verFast main dialogue and a brief explanation of the Si verFast tools 2 Overview SilverFast Dialogue Window Macintosh Version Windows Version SilverFast Dialogue Overvie
117. points at the value 33 Therefore some of the highlight details will be lost Depending on whether more or less pixels with a bright tonal value are present the auto adjust with this extreme threshold of SO will disregard more pixels 120 5 1 Image auto adjust SilverFast Manual Asio T nae h l WHighligha Bd Ds Auto Threshold Shack f Auto Threshold Highlight and Auto Threshold Shadow Auto Threshold Highlight and Auto Threshold Shadow are adjustable within a range from O to 100 steps and can be varied in the Options Auto dialogue These adjustments influence the function of the Image auto adjust and become visible in the histogram dialogue At using the Image auto adjust the triangles for highlight and shadow are placed automatically in the histogram as set in these defaults Highlight Shadow Highlight triangle triangle triangle i i Gaer Cari Remepa me Gis Come E RGB mode Hemember The histogram window depicts the whole range of greyscale in 8 bit RGB mode from step O to step 255 right hand and in 8 bit CMY mode from 096 to 10096 left hand If one or both boxes Levels are marked the factors Auto thresh old highlight shadow are treated as real RGB steps and not as relative factors that correspond to the total quantity of pixel Work ing with the CMY mode it is the same Example The adjustments should be used wit
118. si iman Facrar Sergen Wiest L it n wo m By using the resize box the scan frame can be pulled to any desired size After resizing the scan window it is recommended to launch a new prescan On Windows OS the prescan windows can be scaled by dragging or pushing the prescan frame SilverFast Manual 3 2 Overview Windows Version By dragging or pushing the right or lower edge of the prescan window the prescan window s size is enlarged or reduced SilverFast v5 0 1r36 SilverFast Scan 800 SilverFast Ai Risa e t zz General Frame Densitometer Scan Type 36 524 Bit Colour Y Filter Sharpen LSM Setting save x Image Type Standad Name untitled frame Original Scale Output eos 1000 la 05 _inch 4 j n 1000 P ans inch Q Factor Screen MByte ho fe i oo Ez za l len es lez um Prescan Note Most screen shots are taken from the Macintosh version The Windows version user interface is with exceptions in the Options dialogue identical to the Macintosh version Windows keyboard short cuts can be found in the addendum located at the end of this manual 2 e Overview SilverFast Manual SilverFast Dialogue Overview Within the SilverFast scan window all adjustments are clearly vis ible All important parameters may be adjusted by tools which are accessibl
119. submenu By selecting the desired entry from the menu the job will be deleted Addi tionally there is a menu option All Jobs which will delete all saved jobs Mulit Job Opens a window with a list of all saved jobs Selecting of one or more jobs and clicking on start launches process ing of all selected jobs The status of finished jobs can be reversed by clicking the checkbox reset status before execu tion SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFastJobManager 363 Workflow of the Steps in JobManager The following graphic representation shows a possible sequence of the steps in the It starts with the addition of job entries to the JM window or the collecting of job entries tor a job The image files can be imported from outside or they can be taken over directly from the prescan window of SilverFast HDR Of course you can also retrieve existing jobs directly Step Q oubsequently an individual image representing all others in the Job or several or all images of the job one after the other can be optimized Step and If a selected image optimization is valid for additional image files the parameters of the optimized image can be copied Step by means of many desirable additional files without any problems Finally the job can then be rendered Step Several jobs can be combined and calculated The image files whose calculations have been finished are immedi ately available to the network
120. target values and instead can retain a certain colour tone as a result of the midtone correction If the user alters the first line or the source values then the midtone correction effect will have different original colours in the picture details Adjusting Neutral Values to a Determined Density An additional development of the midtone selector tool appears in the Auto tab of the Options dialogue If the active check box next to Midpip Fixed Target is chosen the following clicks of the midtone selector will lead to more neutral mid tones whose target value is not dynamically determined to retain the brightness of the clicked picture detail Instead a deter mined target value is used here It can be any CMY value if preset as per default it has a value of 5096 RGB 128 Deleting Neutral Points In order to delete neutral points click onto the midtone pipette hold the Alt key depressed and click onto the neutral point you wish to delete Alert Messages An alert message will always appear when the tonal values of the desired point are too distant from the destination value and fall outside a reasonable correction range Further indications of limiting errors are If the third or fourth neutral point does not exhibit the desired results and casts are not neutral ized you have obviously hit the limits of the correctable range 128 5 2 Pipette SilverFast Manual Highlight and Shadow Offset You may
121. the histogram for example the cyan channel click on the appropriate button To manipulate two channels simultaneously hold down the Shift key and click an a second channel button To activate all three channels click on the grey button om Em ul ejm Ml L ES Z E m A n i Histogram in standard mode Histogram in three part mode only cyan is selected only cyan is selected emmmumis mmus EN dd a rs Histogram in standard mode Histogram in three part mode cyan and yellow are selected cyan and yellow are selected 136 5 3 Histogram SilverFast Manual Automatic Colour Cast Removal The procedure for removing colour casts from scanned artwork has been greatly improved since the SilverFast version 5 Now the user can not only remove a possible colour cast automati cally but also determine the degree of colour cast reduction by means of a slider The changes will appear in the large preview of SilverFast in realtime Of course the automatic function can be deactivated or acti vated as desired by using keyboard shortcuts and the degree of the automatic colour cast adjustment can generally be limited to desired optimum values see Options V Auto Colour Cast Removal The automatic function for colour cast removal can be activated or deactivated by presetting depending on the scanner and its quali ties If the icon for auto adjust is normal meaning it has a grey
122. the horizontal grey axis The preview window will reflect the change immediately If you do not want this point purely neu tral you can drag the point into any other area of the colour space It is now up to you which tint you will give to your grey colder and more blue warmer and more red or 5 Curves Menu Save the newly Created Profile Click on Save as button and give uve EEG Fue Type and Exposure Nega i the newly created profile a new ib Agfa name Ej HDC Plus ia 200 neutral F NgFm Resource name i E ig Agfa HDC Plus 200 neutral f Cancel f 0k Custom profiles will appended in the pop up ASA ISO La dE k Auto tolerance p SilverFast Manual 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives 225 zig pb E TE TE M 686 thts BAGFA HDC 200 plus B8 m m The Expansion Menu in Detail The upper portion of the expert dialogue the Expansion menu monitors the orange mask histogram and how NegaFix will opti mise the orange mask The histogram will also allow optimisation of the orange mask manually Automatic Mask The upper half shows the negative histogram and how the mask automatic has set the highlight and shadow points The automatic mask is continuously active indicated by the check mark left of the button Auto In case the sc
123. the printer driver as well as the specifications in the chosen Output profile SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 331 Keyboard Shortcuts in PrinTao Action Activating deactivating templates and Activating deactivating guide lines and activate de activate grid frame Delete image frame from print page Rotate image with template frame Rotate image counter clockwise Cropping Mode Not Active Crop Ie desis ve eeetanat eae aes a4 baste Crop image symmetrically Scroll image clipping within image frame Scale image proportionally Macintosh Shift backspace Alt click lees on rotate button Shift click on rotate button Alt click dragging edge or corner Alt Shift click dragging edge or corner Shift click dragging within image Shift click dragging edge or corner Moving Image and Template Frames via Keyboard Shortcuts Adjustment by 1 pixel Adjustment by 10 pixel Adjustment to the next guide line or rather edge of printable area Command cursor Command Shift cursor Command Alt cursor Windows Delete Alt click on rotate button Shift click on rotate button Alt click dragging edge or corner Alt Shift click dragging edge or corner Shift click dragging within image Shift click dragging edge or corner Ctrl cursor Ctrl Shift cursor Ctrl Alt Cursor 332 6 11 Sil
124. the selected image position your scan frame 2 Zoom In order to see more image details if required start a zoom click zoom tool 3 Image Optimization otart with auto adjust with different adjustments if needed such as midtone top slider contrast bottom slider or global or selective colour cor rection all tools for image enhancement can be applied If you are not familiar with the best possible work flow the ScanPilot can help you effectively e SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFast SRD iSRD 373 Name Untitled frame Original Scale Output gt z5 2500 fla ss cm ge 23 i200 Wy 57 cm Q Factor Screen Mbyte 15 60 ipem 1 16 aH c o p 228 dpi i I L al a a gt i eel PLA Coad JL DE F 5 amp 4 J 4 3 None Sharpen USM Descreening USM amp Descreening GANEG USM Dialogue in SilverFastAi Output Resolution A You have to set the required output parameters for your image Scaling or width and height and output resolution It should be noted that file size increases MB with increased resolution as well as recognition of image artifacts such as dust and scratches Small resolutions will show less scratches than higher resolutions Sharpen Image USM From version 6 SilverFast will have a sharpen dialogue with before and after preview combined with automatic preset
125. to reset the scan frame wo em When opened again SilverFast will have a white empty prescan window and all parameters will have default settings SilverFast Manual 4 Prescan concept 89 Mac T k Win k 9 10 Moving and Copying of Scan Frames All SilverFast plug ins from version 5 on have modified the use of scan frames The moving of a scan frame by click dragging remains the same as before However during moving a track of the original position of the scan frame remains at the exit position This makes it easier to orient yourself As you release the mouse key the old frame track will disappear At the same time the new scan parameters will update the frame content at the new posi tion You can now copy a scan frame by click dragging while hold ing down the Alt key A Plus sign will appear next to the Cursor You can continue to use the previous function for copying Hold down the Alt key and click next to the active scan frame SilverFast will produce a copy of the previous active frame in the prescan window including all parameters and settings that it contains Copying Parameters into another Scan Frame Macintosh First activate the source frame Then click into the desired frame you want to copy parameters to with Alt key a depressed Click another time into the desired frame this time without Alt key The desired frame will be updated by the parameters cop
126. until the densitometer reads the value 5 Notice that we had to move the triangle slightly to the left of the first pixels Had we moved the triangle exactly onto the first pixels the densitometer would have read a value of O for cyan Qii5 gt 5 25 gt 25 2a gt 24 SilverFast Manual 139 5 8 Histogram b Optimising the Magenta Channel in the Histogram Click on the magenta button As above we now define the magenta channel By moving the triangle we also realise the value of 5 for the magenta display in the densitometer Ea La haduw 97 EE D Min Max 100 e 18 3 i i 25 25 w Color Space Compression 1 amp 24 A Color Cary Ra ma vali Kir X am 9 gt 9 c Optimising the Yellow Channel in the Histogram Click on the yellow button Here too we move the triangle until the densitometer shows a value of 5 We now can see that within the image a beautiful neutral white has developed as shown on page before olw Space Compression ron Color Ear Abe reall Aa X a E 9 cl E 140 5 3 Histogram SilverFast Manual shadow point set highlight set Minimum highlights Miximum shadows Compression of Colour Space in Histogram In order to adjust the colour space to certain output or printing requirements you can compress the colour space in the histogram dialogue This does not mean that the source or scanner colo
127. was found the image Please refer to our website for a complete list of supported cameras If no profile can be found none will be used In this case a sim ple linear conversion of the RAW data is done which does not always deliver adequate results In case your RAW data images in SilverFast DC Pro generally have colour problems it is likely that no RAW data conversion profile for your camera has been installed These RAW data conversion profiles are found in the installa tion folder of SilverFast DC Pro in the folder Camera SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 261 Defaults e Manually selecting a camera specific ICC profile General Aura jew Special ia By means of the implemented IT8 calibration of SilverFast DC a meral ColarSync Pro it is possible to generate an ICC camera profile manually dwirn l Monigr e NONE Ez atnan uror RGE The ICC profile that was generated by SilverFast DC Pro by ip aia cai E means of the embeded IT8 Calibration can be selected in mu Adobe RISE hex F SilverFast s main dialogue General Options CMS in Gray NOME H 11 i 11 11 me the menu ColorSync profiles Input seri bient f parcepinal eni Please ensure the following settings Colour Management T A m Input gt Internal set to ColorSync Windows ICM Embed iCC profils fl Peer e qd rmhrd GatstsECETU5 icr Mov Y
128. will show the frame numbering Now one of the Batch modes will be activated 86 4 Prescan concept SilverFast Manual Sileerfast Al Batch Made tiu l BL asd Normal File Batch Mode File LESTIE TI dn Batch Mod Fiket Options gt penr l Sean Barche o Suir J av r Frame Dar l Qani b r f Options Lc elit V f Open Scan Bah Ou C 3 7 Ge Er Wd Frame l Densitemeter In the General panel click the pull down menu Scan Mode The following scan modes are available Batch Mode and Batch Mode File a Batch Scans directly into the Imaging Application In order to scan all frames one by one under Scan Mode go to Batch Mode and click the scan start button Scan Batch all frames are scanned into the imaging application the order mentioned All scans will be numbered accordingly b Batch Scans directly to the Hard Disk In order to scan all frames to hard disk one by one go to Scan Mode Batch Mode File After clicking the Scan Batch button the following dialogue will come up nav SilverFast Save As Baich Where L Stans HE New Folder AddtaFavontes 7 format TIFF E Barch Counter ial Reser for every batch scan ae a In the dialogue window you can define the file destination hard disk and the folder as well as define the general file name which will automatically be append
129. zoom levels can be applied Re activation of the full preview can be done by choosing Full in this menu When switching from a small to a larger zoom value a white frame is displayed initially This frame is moveable by dragging the mouse do not drag do not click just move the cursor Once the desired part is reached a click will fix the frame and the contents of this frame are displayed Illustration below right Soret HOF n herika lt BR 2 ZI 98 4 Prescan concept SilverFast Manual Zooming by Click Dragging the Mouse After clicking the magni fier button a help dialogue e A which explains the new func tions appears S o 1 iim Hrs rui in opm re mar muc turtle aad abri EE KHH D DOCS DV IH WO e y d J Ret TY ee J F ce Pane i Fe hi ae ca ew xrav e gt xut oid Feo armia iain e Praes mai pma avia al La Chi Ld Li a r ves en unam L Eu e ra i ard opm ne a Or M Dc we bern rani uox hs cust Urn pac mes TEH DeC He PI DAT SAT By subsequently click dragging the mouse in the large preview area a new frame may be drawn middle illustration below The contents of this frame are enlarged when the mouse button is released Illustration below right ECCE EE LET sasea iam Tarnat HDA Ld KNEE Sierras MOR Tarmac HOR sii B e B c BR taf u RW etal FE lt E 01 2 s raz cmm KH imm hzar d me 7 apm mina d A P enn B
130. 2 Installation SilverFast Manual el LaserSait Inra For Problems while Entering the Serial Number If the dialogue for entering the serial number cannot be closed with the OK button then Si verFast does not accept your entry Please determine the following e f you get the message Please insert the SilverFast CD and restart SilverFast please cancel out of the serial number dia logue close SilverFast insert your CD and launch SilverFast again The key is that the installation CD needs to be present while SilverFast starts up It won t be recognized once SilverFast is running e At least one letter must appear in the text soaces for your name and company If you are using Si verFast privately you may enter private in the space for company e The serial number for Si verFast used up to now always has 20 digits It consists of numbers from 0 to 9 and the letters A to F so that the letter O cannot appear It can only be a zero Some upgrades will require a 30 digit code in future which is made up of 6 groups of 5 values each This code consists of numbers between 2 and 9 no ones and no zeros and all let ters between A and Z except the letters i and o e Please make sure that you use only capital letters e Enter the serial number without any spaces or other symbols If you still cannot close the dialogue with the OK button please contact us Update Reminder After a
131. 23 M23 Y22 the colour tint has become neutral SilverFast Manual 5 2 Pipette 125 MidPip4 Multiple Neutralising Pipette MidPip 4 Advanced Colour Cast Removal allows removal of col our casts comfortably which e g result from a mixed light situation TE 4 In order to achieve this you can set up to four neutral points in P 4 Mer your preview window The neutral values of any such point can be directly edited in a special dialogue To activate the MidPip4 you click onto the pipette in the tool bar and then onto the desired image detail in the preview window The neutral points set will be marked with a numbered cross a JE E L m i a i E a If you want to set several neutral points at once click onto the pipette and hold the Option key while setting up to four neutral points The pipette will remain as a cursor until you either click the pipette again or you have set the fourth neutral point In the examp le below 3 neutral points have been set e0 o SilverFast HDR Letters 48bit tif dC Jee i a Lun 126 5 2 e Pipette SilverFast Manual lt l l a X um Gg 2 nm HEE lt MiP 1 Dest MidPip Z Sre Midian 2 Didi e f Cancel CMY lt gt RGB Switch Conversion of values measured from RGB to CMY and vice versa Editing the MipPip In order to fine tune a neutral point double click onto the pipette tool an
132. 293 Red eye correction 43 291 Reduce window 108 Reflective 70 103 Remove red eyes 291 Renaming images 272 Automatic re naming while unloading 273 Re naming images automatically 2 3 Rendering intent 63 423 Absolute colourimetric 424 Perceptual 423 Relative colourimetric 424 Saturation 424 Reopen SilverFast after processing 56 Reopen SilverFast after scan 56 Reset all 89 Reset button 39 76 Resize box 37 Resolution 77 448 Calculating the Scan Resolution 447 Effective resolution Input resolution 444 Interpolated resolution 444 448 Optical resolution 96 103 444 448 Optimal scan resolution 44 7 Optimum scan resolution for inkjet printers 450 Output resolution 448 SilverFast Manual 7 4 Index 471 Scan resolution dpi 444 44 Screen resolution lpi 446 Showing interpolated resolution Showing scan resolution Which resolution does SilverFast indicate 448 Retouching of images 401 RGB 0 255 values and CMYK 0 to 100 measurement 53 RGB or CMY 53 ROOT 28 Rotation 40 282 Rotate 90 clockwise 4 Rotation Tool Palette 4 Round magazine 239 S Saturation 160 161 228 293 SC2G selective colour to grey See SilverFast SC2G Scaleable prescan 202 Scaling 76 Fixing output width and height 78 Fixing output width or height 8 Proportional Scaling 78 Scaling factor 39 Scan CMYK 427 Scan faster 65 Scan frame parameters 39 Activating Scan Frames 89 Copying parameters into another scan frame
133. 321 Arranging Image and Template Frames via Keybord Shortcuts Image and template frames can be arranged incremental by using the cursor arrow keys e Command cursor adjustment by 1 pixel e Command Shift cursor adjustment by 10 pixel e Command Alt cursor adjustment to the next guide line accordingly to the end of the print page document Activate Deactivate Templates The templates can be activated deactivated via a command of the context menu right mouse click The function key F7 can alternatively be used for activating deactivating of templates The magnetic behaviour is not available when templates are not activated because the guide lines are deactivated with the same command 322 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Zoom and Scaling Functionality PrinTao features many possibilities to change the displayed size of the print page document or to scale the image embedded and for zooming Zoom Print Page Document For precise work in details it is eventually necessary to display the print page enlarged There are two kind of ways to zoom the print page e Print Page Zoom via Inputbox In the lower left corner is a inputbox displaying the actual size of the window which works like a popup menu Different zoom steps can be chosen The collateral scroll bars can be used for navigating inside the enlarged print page e EYN s E ya P nao B LIS SPrinao
134. 39 4 6 PC CONTROL ALT 6 With this very powerful tool single colours can be changed without influencing the overall colours Tool 7 Image Zoom With the image zoom magnifying glass you can zoom into any part of the image Tool 8 Expert Dialogue Mac 6 35 4 8 PC CONTROL ALT 8 All parameters that influence the image are shown by number and can be changed You can switch between RGB to CMY display SilverFast Manual 5 e Tools 109 ScanPilot ImagePilot The ScanPilot ImagePilot is an efficient tool that helps the nov ice with the subjects of Scanning and Optimization acting as a kind of road map in order to reach successful and brilliant results It is an instruction to use the available tools automatic or manual in the correct order It is easy to use and delivers good quality results Click the first uppermost icon and press the green launch but ton after that SilverFast now works its way along the column of the tools pal lette partially automatic e Some tools require additional input fields and SilverFast will halt and open the respective dialogues in order for the user to enter his own parameters The primary stop will for example be done while adjusting the gradation e Regardless of whether changes have been made within the tools dialogue or not hit the OK button or press the E
135. 4 1 Introduction SilverFast Manual SilverFast SilverFast Jij Copyright 1995 2002 Lase rSoft Imaging AG Germany Tel 49 431 56009 0 Fax 49 431 56009 93 US Branch Ph 1 941 383 7496 Fax 1 941 387 7574 Intemet www SilverFast com LaserSoff Imaging ae Dear SilverFast User SilverFastAi is now in its fifteenth year after its introduction in 1995 By now SilverFast has received so much recognition world wide that some already call SilverFast The Standard for scan software That is a great compliment but nothing we intend to rest upon SilverFast has made professional colour scan ning truly manageable and results predictable Significant inventions have paved our way to the new powerful SilverFast 6 such as the unique unsharp masking and Focus Preview Plug amp Play CMYK the easy yet powerful Selective Col our Correction NegaFix for optimum negative film conversion HiRePP for fastest loading of largest image files and now in SilverFast 6 with SC2G Intelligent Colour to Grey conversion Enhanced Selective Colour Correction with layers and masking and Si lverFastSRD Smart Removal of Defects a unique software based dust and scratch removal With SilverFastAi 6 you will also see the advent of the first SilverFastAi QuickTime movies exemplifying the powerful functions built into SilverFast 6 demonstrating how easy these tools can be used We are currently at a threshold of unique change
136. 485 485 486 486 486 487 487 488 488 489 489 490 16 1 1 Content SilverFast Manual Ye hk D QO U X O 1 2 Installation The first chapter explains the system requirements and how to install SilverFast Please carefully check which folder has been allocated as your Photoshop plug ins folder if you install as a Photoshop plug in 1 2 Installation System Requirements Macintosh Windows Scanner Interfaces Installing SilverFast Installing SilverFast Plug in SilverFast as a TWAIN Module Welcome Dialogue Launching and Activating SilverFast via Photoshop Launching and Activating SilverFast via SFLauncher SilverFast Feature CD For Problems while Entering the Serial Number Update Reminder QuickTime Movies 18 19 19 20 21 22 22 23 26 28 30 32 33 33 4 18 1 2 Installation SilverFast Manual System Requirements Macintosh SilverFast requires a Power Macintosh with at least 128 MB of available RAM beside all other running applications The operating system must be Mac OS 9 2 or later H I A nU Please check for latest SilverFast releases on our web site at Not all SilverFast versions are avail able for Mac OS9 2 Some newer www SilverFast com Versions require Mac OSX or better Please refer to LaserSoft Imaging s The maximum performance of SilverFast can be released on a web site for details PowerMac with enough RAM Please note that your imaging s
137. 5 1 Image Auto Adjust Auto Gradation 114 Auto Adjust and Colour Cast Removal 117 Auto Adjust and Colour Cast Preservation 118 Auto Adjust and Threshold 119 Auto Threshold Highlight and Auto Threshold Shadow 121 5 2 Highlight Shadow Tool 123 Highlight Shadow with Offset O 123 Setting Highlight 123 Setting Shadow 124 Highlight Shadow Reset 124 Setting Midtone 125 MidPip4 Multiple Neutralising Pipette 126 Editing the MipPip 127 Adjusting Neutral Values to a Determined Density 128 SilverFast Manual 11 Content T Deleting Neutral Points 128 Highlight and Shadow Offset 129 Preserving a Colour Cast with the Highlight Shadow Tool 130 Preserving Specular Highlights 130 Displaying Brightest and Darkest Point of an Image 131 Displaying Brightest Point 131 Displaying Darkest Point 132 5 3 The Histogram 133 Histogram Dialogue in SilverFast SE versions 133 Three Part Histogram 135 Histogram Channel Selection 136 Automatic Colour Cast Removal 137 Using the Slider for Manual Colour Cast Removal 138 Optimising a Histogram Manually 139 Compression of Colour Space in Histogram 141 Multiple Densitometer Fixed Pipette MidPip4 145 Displaying the Densitometer Measure Points with the Histogram and Grada tions Dialogues 145 Transfer of the Brightest Darkest Point to the Multiple Densitometer 146 Selecting the Colour Space in the Densitometer 146 5 4 Gradation Dialogue 147 Gradation Curves 147 Overview 148 Gradation Dialogu
138. 8 bits is not optimised The gaps in the histogram fig 2 also called spikes become clearly TP wl visible lu Through an optimised transformation of the expansion of tonal O values with 10 or 12 bits in SilverFast the end result that is to say 2 Histogram with spreading in Pho LU toshop the final scan displays a gapless distribution of grey levels across the entire greyscale see fig 4 Ae XR A 1 Histogram without spreading in Photoshop The correct adjustment of highlight and shadow for instance which values on the prescan become white and which become black has a strong influence on the quality of a reproduction Sil verFast helps locate the brightest and darkest points in two ways First the densitometer can be set to CMY and by moving across the prescan indicates where the brightest and darkest points are oecond the highlight shadow tool displays the brightest point when the Ctrl key is pressed and the darkest when the Alt key is pressed together with the Command key on Mac and the Alt key on PC respectively For displaying the brightest and the S ER darkest point of the image on the prescan in combination with the 3 sior on O AS Wit Gul highlight shadow tool click and hold the white or black square matic optimisation respectively E KAE x ra Show brightest point Show darkest point ALA TT o XAR RA 4 Histogram after scan with SilverFast Thus the end point
139. 90 Deleting a Scan Frame 89 Loading and saving single scan frame parameters 86 Moving and Copying of Scan Frames 90 Scan mode 70 87 242 Batch 242 Batch mode 0 Batch mode file O 243 Batch scan 87 Normal 70 242 Normal File 70 242 Scanner gt Internal 62 Scanner interfaces 21 FireWire 21 SCSI 21 USB 21 Scanner with different optical resolutions 103 Scanning concepts 443 Scan parameters 69 Frame palette 1 ScanPilot 39 40 110 Help texts 111 Preferences dialogue 110 Scan resolution 39 76 77 Scan Resolution for Scaled Images Showing interpolated resolution 76 Showing scan resolution 6 Scan RGB 427 Scan start button 39 Scan type 39 71 Scratch volume 55 Screening matrix 446 Screen resolution lpi 446 SCSI 21 80 SCSIID 21 80 Search for 269 Sector correction See Selective colour correc tion Selective colour correction 108 158 452 Activation of selective colour correction 159 472 7 4 Index SilverFast Manual Administration of layers 159 CM12 159 CM6 159 Colour circle 160 164 Colour matrix 159 160 165 Colour space zoom 159 Correcting an image selectively 162 Correction of 12 colours 174 HSL controls 160 Joining presets for a complete correction 166 Masks 159 Brush tool 168 Changing a mask 171 Changing of a mask 170 Creating masks 159 De activating a mask no mask 171 Directly new redraw of an inverted mask 170 Displaying an inactive mask area 172 Hard or soft
140. 9896 Colour Cast Removal Here you can determine how much of an existing colour cast is removed automatically A value of 100 means that the colour cast will be completely removed The automation may be activated or deactivated by checking the active box respectively SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 59 e Auto Pipette Middle Factor The Auto Pipette Middle Factor influences how the grada tion automatic makes an image that is too dark brighter and an image that is too bright darker by means of the automatic adjustment of gradation curves Both sliders generally limit the range Auto Pipette Middle Factor the strength of the auto adjust es Both sliders do only determine how fo Or a much the auto adjust influences the DAE mid tones of an image Highlights and L amp cnc uS shadows will not be effected The downward bent slider determines how much the auto adjust decreases the mid tones of an image ie how much a gradation curve may bend downwards The upward bent slider determines how much the auto adjust may increase the mid tones of an image ie how much a gradation curve may bend upwards Example If the preset values 30 30 are changed to max val ues 100 100 the effect of the auto adjust on the mid tones of an image will be strongest With such settings it may be likely that the auto adjust would react too strong and an image would most likely be over corrected If the preset val
141. Applicable if Normal File and Batch mode File are selected Realtime Correction The normally present realtime correction can be turned off here for use with older and slower computers o6 3 Presets SilverFast Manual Mask Edge Size Width of Soft Mask In SilverFast6 you can define the border softness of masks being used with selective colour correction Previously you had a sudden transition you can now define a very smooth transition per as n The example on the left shows s the old function being repre sented by the value 0 00 On the right the transition is defined by the value 0 05 SHA a gj lt a ECT T ETE TEE By changing the value and clicking onto the button Apply the effect can be monitored in the preview window If the result is satisfactory close the Options dialogue by clicking OK Preserve Settings for a New Image Only available in SilverFastDC DCPro HDR Activating the check box enables SilverFast to preserve all set tings and parameters after correction Opening a new image hence means transferring these settings on to the new frame If the check box is deactivated all settings and parameters are reset to their initial values e Welcome Dialogue Opens the welcome dialogue The LaserSoft Imaging homepage can be reached by means of the respective buttons with the dialogue SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 57 o8 3 Presets
142. E Ewel o _ 262 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual ijur 2 5 BEW x aT a zz E MI M ni z B A l B gt w M ci Ra n ELCT E Ez k m a D l esum o Ka hd b l Bl Sl BE GU EE LE BR Left First select the images that are to be converted Middle Drag them into an Album Right The conversion commences immediately Workflow for Conversion of RAW Data Files SilverFast DC Pro allows a quick conversion of RAW data files in the background This is done by choosing the images to be converted in the over view of the VLT and dragging them into an album iur EYE N n i z 1 fur ale At r j E Ea LZ Mi al us BI EL Bi BK Eu E M R nl i B EL l E E Hi Aem WI M ai x CS Fi Mm nu TI Mi aa i LS E E mi Mi D li EW EB o E Sete HI li EW ES s BBC bl Ml kul E K UE C BE M ki boll Ri su EE EB L EW gm KU The conversion of camera RAW data was fully automated and not alterable until S lverFast DC Pro version 6 1 0 The progress of the conversion was displayed by a progress bar in the header on the VLT From version 6 2 0 onwards this has been changed The user can now decide if and when he wishes to perform a conversion As soon as camera RAW data are moved into the active album from the browser or the overview a small button with a green arrow is shown in the header of the album P 5 of cache used window The amount of used cache memo
143. Europe JPG Air Nostrum JPG Altar JPG Aussichtsturm JPG Aussichtsturm 1 JPG avion 001 jpg Baum guer JPG Berliner JPG Blick durch Forf JPG Blick durch Torf_1 JPG BMW jpg Bunch PG Bus JPG Bus2 JPG Cala Llonga JPG Citationlet jpg Citrus JPG civic center PG Coast Guard jpg Coastline JPG Deja Coast JPG Me jae lo j br n e ber b jal b be b be e ber ban ber ben b er gt Sort overview and album Tool and Control Bar Details Mark Delete active images in the album xo 3 Start JobManager Orientation EXIF image rotate invert info Switch from VLT to Silver Fast QuickTime help movies IPTC image info Miniature Search size for file Browser and Navigation Window By means of the browser the entire directory as well as all exter nal storage medium may quickly and easily searched for images Depending on the camera the images can also directly be accessed from the device The upper popup menu shows the directory It is possible to jump into any folder p lur L3 Archive E Desktop Tia Ji Users 2 MacOSX H Deskrap 1 DC Project Bilder The contents of the folder are immediately displayed in the long roll bar The images may be seen here next to the folders Silver Fast displays thumbnail images for any picture recognized A progress bar describing the background generation progress of thumbnails max 512 x 512 pix
144. F6 Display darkest point W 3 Click on black square F5 Histogram Show result histogram Alt in the histogram dialogue Alt in the histogram dialogue Selective colour correction Select all GolOUIS au sss koe C Command tA a caeso ice e Rara Ctrl A Select additional colour Shift Click into prescan Shift Click into prescan Select additional colour column Shift Click on LED Shift Click on LED below column below column Show inactive mask area EEOSE E T F7 dialogue must be closed Reset Reset all parameters 0005 Shift Click on Reset button Shift Click on Reset button Frame reset K V leeren Alt Click on Reset button Alt Click on Reset button Undo Redo last operation Command Z assscaoedirseaeede kas Ctrl Z SilverFast Manual 7 3 Addendum 455 Action Macintosh Opening a dialogue window Zoom in preview 6 6 es Command 1 Image auto adjust lille Command 2 aa ssa i Histogram dialogue Command 3 Gradation dialogue 00 ee Command 4 Global colour correction Command 5 s sx a as selective colour correction Command 6 Expert dialogue cee ees Command s Leave dialogue Leave SilverFast ESC or Command Period Start scan Process image Return Enter Main dialogue Un
145. Fast main dialogue lt 258 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Working with RAW Data in SilverFast DC Pro silverFast DCPro SilverFast DC Pro is able to directly read the most common gt RAW data formats of professional digital cameras ENSE Apart from the previously supported classical 48Bit RGB Tiff nM format the RAW data formats CRW Canon CR2 Canon CS Sinar DC2 Kodak DCR Kodak DNG Adobe ERF Epson HDR Leaf K25 Kodak KDC Kodak MOS Leaf MRW Minol ta NEF Nikon ORF Olympus PEF Pentax RAF Fuji RAW Leica Panasonic SRF Sony SR2 Sony TIFF PhaseOne and X3F Sigma are now supported The complete list of supported cameras can be found on our website at http www silverfast com show dc cameras raw en html System Requirements Working with RAW data implies working with large files Subse quently the system requirements are quite high System Requirements Macintosh MacOSX 256 MB RAM 150MB free disc space System Requirements Windows CPU 1 GHz 256 MB RAM 150 MB free disc space Presets and Cache In order to ensure optimum usage of the computer system some thoughts should be devoted to memory requirements and the expected file sizes Accordingly 2 presets should be made in the palette General Options Special Setting the Path for the Album Folder Here the user may generate and assign an individual directory fo
146. Fast main dialogue will be hidden al Arrangement of the VLT Album palette Preset palette Tool and control bar Overview window Slider for changing size of Preview window and aloum i EIU SEIL ree ER TES Cmm X FT ET mn TT TT RT PU FR ENT US a TO Propos Bier pl ze 3 des L 2 E a a biri Basan s4 Esi ikar r L da L tU ct IM a iy teste cih kr EH n di LN roads dat Eme Eza d rena l TTE LIII fie daea tarii jmn i hire arta T haft Browser and navigation window Rives nari Ema bivan Saee Mia Fear al CH Salle Cm Sree RAW data conversion Ek ay mn aki kaw zi p SMES z iem a Size of the current window below s Maramena inam the mouse emen Magnifier window X mi Fx Progress bar Album window for generation of miniatures for the overview window The VLT is divided into five areas Browser and navigation window Alternative Album palette with albums or Preset palette Overview window e Album window the actual working area Magnifier window ool and control bar SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 265 Export album Preview s mm BAR M xipi am 1 Show hide album or over view window print function This function is only available with special SilverFast versions Navigator Albums Presets DC Project Bilder hs Agarve JPG Air
147. H Finir d SM 4 223 7m Pa T0 150a Tisi 09m T T iab 5l acagkr Habes Mi FIER Bytia sair li M na oo m TE E pie ae Te af MIT ee EO dei ki D PE Pimp LR Ha Fi Far K mg 2387 w DOE 00 ir t d Td kaca OFZ me s Dar pad eels Aig 3 FP capable magii TE fut ZA Aue pee Babe Fir CT L ET Select all images Mac Cmd A Windows Ctrl A A new directory is chosen in which the newly updated images are to be saved The job now only has to be launched by pressing the Start but ton SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 341 342 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFastJobManager Purpose of the JobManager What is the JobManager SilverFast JobManager from here on referred to as UM is a built in function for the scan software SilverFastAi as well as for the Photoshop plug ins which operate independently of a scanner and the Twain modules SilverFast HDH SilverFast DC Pro What is the Purpose of the JobManager If a user wants to scan a whole row of images for example an entire film strip he would normally proceed image by image The user would sit at his work place with a calculator and scanner and proceed one after the other with image optimising gradation histogram colour correction focus etc and the final scan image by image This is a time and cost co
148. H H S cast 74 Halftoning 65 HDR See SilverFastHDR Help button 40 Help lines 326 Highlight 108 149 Preserving specular highlights 130 Setting highlight 123 Specular highlights 130 Highlight Shadow tool 123 132 Highlight Shadow reset 124 Highlight Shadow with offset 123 Preserving a colour cast with the highlight shadow tool 130 Highlight and shadow offset 129 Highlight Cast 74 Highlight Offset Brightest Point 59 Highlights 141 Highlight triangle 121 High resolution prescan 54 97 100 184 HiRePP High Resolution Picture Perform ance See SilverFastHiRePP Histogram 108 133 141 Channel selection 136 Compressing colour space via histogram 144 Compression of colour space in histogram 141 Histogram Dialogue in SilverFast SE versions 133 Optimising a histogram manually 139 Three part histogram 135 Staggered three part presentation 136 Standard mode 135 Three part parallel presentation 135 Horizontal scaling 76 Hottrack gradation 152 HSL 228 HSL controls 159 HSL Correction by Sliders 161 Hue 160 161 228 ICC printer profile 405 ICC profile 114 195 262 299 414 425 Camera specific ICC profile 262 ColorSync 262 Generate an ICC camera profile 262 ICM 262 ICE 232 371 375 See DIGITAL ICE technolo gies ICM 62 114 262 416 425 Image auto adjust 108 114 SilverFast Manual 7 4 Index 465 lmage compression 245 Image mode 71 Image number 244 Image orientation m
149. I l K e 9 gt For example if the magenta value for the appropriate densitometer point has to be changed select the magenta channel with the top buttons and drag the curve point next to the magenta dot on the gradations curve 186 5 7 Zoom SilverFast Manual 5 8 Expert Dialogue Dialogue for Professionals In the expert dialogue all parameters which are set in the scan frame are shown and can be checked and edited For the experienced user the quick overview of all major parameters is available In order to change expert dialogue parameters simply enter the new values into the editing fields Expert Dialog v CMY RGB switch Grey channel _______ Ele Export Aw Ree Chanmek as text file 012 11 16 9 12 CMY or RGB 025 23 832 18 25 Gradations parameter 9509 48 j 45 50 075 73 82 68 7S 087 86 91 84 87 100 100 100 100 100 Colour space compression Range Max 100 _ 100 100 100 Range Min 0 0 0 0 Highlight Shadow points Pnt 100 100 100 100 ighlight Pnt 0 0 0 Shadows hadow o Middle o 0 LL kE Midtones 0 0 Highlights FONERA ox gt Reset Equal Parameters for a Row Q SilverFast SE v6 4 2r5d To equalise parameters for a row that is to say for the gradation f the CMY values for a 5096 tone
150. MB 500 MB without HiRePP with HiRePP without HiRePP with HiRePP opens in SilverFastHDR with HiRePP in 11 sec 2 5 sec 34 sec 2 5 sec Photoshop 6 in 15 sec 15 sec 90 sec 90 sec 338 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Abestac vc 1r18 SilverFast HDR Ran Oba f Ceneral haa iimte mange Meee 4H 24 Bir Calor Fines 16 28 Hie Grayscale faning 38 Bit Color migi Type 16 Hir Grayscale Mame LG Bir Hcy ale Lian iaki ees Original Tons Taps a T inus le 27 a im T al a ba ar Q hadior Sever Et E zh E Ur T Op feun iB Chait How does HiRePP Function HiRePP functions as a two step system e The first step is to make the image data SilverFast HDR HiRePP compatible or to re scan with a new SilverFastAi software e Second step All HiRePP capable image files can be loaded and edited in real time with Si verFast HDR HiRePP is Especially Significant for Whom Large image files are generally generated on high end scanners with high optical resolution as well as with large format scanners since image files will have no loss of quality with HiRePP but generate a large time saving potential HiRePP is recommended for those types of scanners as mentioned above In addition all users having to process a large number of files Pub lishing companies Image data archives photographers The time saved will plainly increase with the number of images processed
151. Mask No mask B Presets Save me O K Defect type O White Orientation _ Horizontal f f Preview Cancel 2 Longish Scratches The following controls and options are in the menu Longish Scratches This menu is only available in SilverFast full versions and will only be visible after clicking onto the Expert button This alternative method can be applied to e g 35 mm film where the surface has been scratched while reversing the film by small dust or sand particles Mostly these scratches proceed across several images sometime even across the whole film They are frequently always parallel to the edge of the film In order to eliminate longish scratches the following controls are available Defect Type Orientation Length Width Contrast and Continuity Usually using the first three controls Defect Type Orientation Length are sufficient to get adequate results Other controls such as Width Contrast and Continuity can remain at their default set tings The order and position of the controls is related to the work flow SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFast SRD iSRD 387 3 Selection Defect Type ino First you would select the colour of the defect type white or black Longish scratches most likely can be related to one or the other of Oe pay el the two defect types depending on the original you will see a white Width 0s or a black line Contr i
152. Monitor Automatic 3 PhotoshopdDefaultCMYK icc Internal Duanan PhotashnpsDefaulrCMYK ier Profits for Colorsyne USSheetfed ncoated icc Scanner Reflecnwel USWebCoatedsWOP icc Banner Trew paren LotWebWncoabted ior kil sal Gray Generic Gray Profile icc IJ Owiputi Prntee hE E B 0 HORE N SE ie Rendering niet perceptual EL i Embedded ICC probes By clicking on Apply the display in Embed KC prote El the prescan window will be updated Profle to embed UsShecetfegunceated ioc Changes can immediately be seen Pug a Ray cvi USheeedUncoared icc M onthe prescan window s an f Apply J Cancel f ok T N alt When an appropriate separation has been found the dialogue can be closed by OK SilverFast Manual 4 Prescan concept 93 General Frame Densitometer u r Optior s 2 Prescan f Scan RGB t Quit nura 13 14 Automatic Prescan If parameters in the Options dialogue have been changed that require a new prescan Gamma ICC profile it is point ed out by a note that this prescan is required for a correct moni tor display The user can then decide for himself if he should start a new prescan Your changes will be correctly reflected in the preview after the next prescan only Do you want to perform an Auto Prescan now No e Displaying Frame Number By clicking and ho
153. ONE In the section Profiles for ColorSync select the same CMYK pro file under Output Printer which you have allocated in Photoshop Under Internal select the profile of the internal system colour space SilverFast Manual 7 1 Addendum 429 How to save Profiles from Photoshop 5 02 Go to File Colour Settings RGB Setup In this dialogue you can prepare your own settings and Save them Make sure the profile goes into the right folder so the System and Si verFast can access load it The path to save it into using MacOS 9 is oystem folder ColorSync Profiles and Cj System OS9 2 D 5 4GB GW to save the file into GWs Computer Systemordner The path to save it into using MacOSX is Profiles rz ColorSync User user identification Library Color Library Sync Profiles T gw 4 Users System OSX D 5 4GB GW G Ws Computer E WA The path to save it into using Win968 is C Windows System Colors Note Profiles in SilverFast have a different name from the file name 4 1 Be iG Bb _ U Bi Ir E v 5A D R j a04 i 130 SG eae Wer EPA avane Ler afar The path to save it into using Windows 2000 is Ste pai i C WinNT System32 Color Or C WinNT System32 Spool Drivers Color hed a m rite H ice C xc tar En wj ar Folsom iifanonbersenriockee Attenti
154. Ongeral Sena ti Taput Lr 1 d TTE ln DET mm d 2x Dam Jd oC nid cm lJ Fast r engen Mir E e kav L1 Hu p a p Macintosh Clicking on the header of the prescan window while keeping the Com mand key pressed Windows Richt click the mouse in the prescan window Opening an Image with the Open Button Clicking on the open button activates a dialogue used for selec ting the device or folder containing the images za 7 O pen gt Finds tele Ihe image Die g na would like T wiii vez hil From 924 Bit k l 250mjpu Saphir Kugeln tir B Gown 2282211 HI Piyer 24B s c tif E kiiius kien Ong til EB kaktus kein OrigzCurr til ES aiut klein rif J Lady Demo 24 bii til Wl Ladyiake jdim Negril El Lotus 3c til ome Kind Decumeni Size 5 9 ME Creamed 08 01 2091 Modified 08 01 2001 Open an image directly by double clicking on the name or by single clicking on the name and clicking the open button The image will be opened within the SilverFast prescan window f add to FKavarme amp C f Cancel SilverFast Manual 335 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR IT8 Calibration with SilverFast DCPro Differences in Calibration Between a Scanner and a Digital Camera When calibrating a digital camera several factor have to be taken into account The great advantage of scanners is that they work with almost constant conditions it has an almost constant light sou
155. PhotoShop Import SilverFast Import Delete Save Selecting Gradation Curves Gradation curves can be loaded from an existing selection More Curves can be added later SilverFast Manual 5 4 Gradation curves 153 Linear and Logarithmic Midtone The midtone slider is the most important slider to achieve the cor rect over all brightness For normal images correction of the mid tones is sufficient to get the correct tonal balance If however an image has a lot of shades in the three quarter tone it might be necessary to use a different curve to influence the three quarter tone range In order to influence the three quarter tone range click on the N normal at the very left of the midtone slider the N turns into an L logarithmic and the gradation curve changes to brighten up the three quarter tones Gradation Curves Sat t m mw m Fi E Annei o M aD EREQ Normal midtone curve With normal midtone gradation Gradatiar Curves Sait T e m m wi 9 r A Tn Tre gt LLL Logarithmic midtone curve With logarithmic midtone gradation 154 5 4 Gradation curves SilverFast Manual va E EE 9 9 Global Colour Correction Dialogue WA A i Y Colour Balance 9 i i 9 b All SilverFast versions have a very intuitive global colour correction 6 The actual gradation curve will be overlaid in the top of th
156. Placement 313 Spell check 313 Text editor 310 311 Text panel 310 Undo Redo 311 Tools 405 Transfer several images to printout 306 XML files 318 Zoom and scaling functionality 323 Zoom print page document 323 Printer resolution 446 Print image 42 294 295 405 PrinTao See PrinTao Printing contact sheets 282 Printing Directly out of the Prescan Window 294 QuickTime movies 309 Process mode 0 287 Batch Mode 0 Batch Mode File 70 Normal 70 Normal File O To album 70 Profiles for ColorSync ICM 63 Progress bar 264 Progressive JPEG 245 470 7 4 Index SilverFast Manual Proportional scaling 78 Q Q factor 447 See Quality factor Quality factor 39 76 447 QuickTime movie 26 34 43 Quit SilverFast 39 R Radius of densitometer 53 RAM 19 24 RAW data format 72 259 Conversion of RAW data files 263 CR2 Canon 259 CRW Canon 259 CS Sinar 259 DC2 Kodak 259 DCR Kodak 259 DNG Adobe 259 ERF Epson 259 Green arrow 263 HDR Leaf 259 Internal RAW data conversion profile for your Camera 261 K25 Kodak 259 KDC Kodak 259 Linear conversion of the RAW data 261 MOS Leaf 259 MRW Minolta 259 NEF Nikon 259 ORF Olympus 259 PEF Pentax 259 RAF Fuji 259 RAW Leica Panasonic 259 Red square 263 SR2 Sony 259 SRF Sony 259 TIFF PhaseOne 259 Unconverted RAW data file 286 What is RAW data 344 X3F Sigma 259 Realtime correction 56 Realtime processing 83 Realtime Histogram
157. Quit has to be started from the SilverFast main dialogue s 7 Pa Preview Auto Cancel 378 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD SilverFast Manual Defect Type f Ali White Black Detection Defect size ep 1 Intensity 1 Changing Defect Type Before starting a manual correction check whether a different Defect Type could produce better results Switch from the current Defect Type e g from All to White or Black and monitor the effects in the preview window Check the different monitor modes Also check different tiles for more artifacts in other areas of the image uncorrected original Defect Type All Defect Type White Defect Type Black vi Dust and Scratch Fanna Detection ERR bs Defect size _ _ ____ 1 2 Slider Defect Recognition and Defect Size Both sliders have been preset by the SRD automatic Detection represents sensitivity of recognition Optimum parame ters will depend on the image character With sharp or images that have been sharpened detection will be mostly between 1 and 60 With unsharp or images that have been smoothened detection will most likely be between 60 and 100 Defect Size equates to pixel size of the artefact Values are small respectively and are mostly between 1 and 5 Always monitor the effect of both sliders in the large preview win dow if necessary check different tiles of the image
158. Scratch Removal Eliminating dust and scratches by standard means of retouching is an extremely time consuming pleasure There have been quite a few approaches in software to solve this problem but none has reached a professional level so far Those software packages that have tried showed poor quality and did not solve the challenge of How can Software differentiate between the true details and unwanted artifacts How does SilverFast Recognise Dust and Scratches and How will they be Eliminated With SilverFast SRD Version 6 x and above even inexperienced retouchers can obtain convincing results with just a few clicks of the mouse and a small number of masks SRD stands for Smart Removal of Defects More than 95 of burdening retouchings can be saved by means of SilverFast s integrated SRD Smart Removal of Defects SilverFast SRD uses a multi stage process based on masking and layer technology over which the user has complete control SilverFast SE can only use one layer with reduced controls The starting point for this process is an intelligent automatic mech anism which achieves very good results for an average intensity of application and in most cases produces a successful outcome It makes sense to start with fine smaller defects and move up layer by layer and mask by mask to more pronounced scratches and artifacts This elegant method enables to keep the image detail and leave a minimum if at all
159. SilverFastACR Adaptive Colour Restoration SilverFastACR ACR Adaptive Colour Restoration is part of the selective colour correction dialogue and can be switched on and off via a check mark This automatic function enables the user to restore faded out colours or normalise oversaturated colours Using the slider colour saturation can be increased or decreased ACR can be used in combination with the selective colour correc tion All settings can be influenced when the user activates ACR If e g more or less saturation is needed the user only has to adjust the ACR slider The relation between the colours that have previ ously been corrected in the selective colour correction will be preserved If the dialogue box is closed an activated ACR function is marked by a short ACR imprint below the vertical buttons located to the left of the prescan window te H tirr Ciis irt HE YT foe ku i Ku n E e o Type OMS Cui Pop im Pa ads Ban pil L zi p KE f P E e Ex LH SR Ue SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 179 SilverrastSC2G Selective Colour to Grey Conversion SC2G Selective Colour to Grey is a unique function to control how colours of an image are converted to grey By directly controlling the conversion of primary and secondary colours into shades of grey the user can enhance the distinction v Save j RGB Preview bet
160. St K6 11 E WebOpti indd 190606 SilverFast DC VLT SilverFast DCPro SilverFast DC Pro Studio SilverFast DC SE SilverFast DC The SilverFast DC versions are also hardware independent soft 655 ware packages for imaging that have been specially adapted for ss use by digital photographers SilverFast DC can read and open TIFF JPEG 48bit TIFF scanned ET UCTZ B images and most of the common RAW data files of modern digital cameras Which camera and which RAW data is already supported can be seen on LaserSoft Imaging s homepage http www silverfast com show dc cameras raw de html SilverFast DCSE is a special edition of SilverFast DC VLT It can only Zg o open the common 24 Bit standard formats JPEG TIFF and is limited in its functionality and recommended for novice users SilverFast C E Attention Many functions are similar or the same in all SilverFast version This is especially true for the hardware independent versions of Silver Fast This is the reason why the manual should be cross read This is why the following passage only briefly describes Silver Fast HDR since almost all functions are described in detail in the passage about SilverFast DC The principal functions of SilverFast like for example the usage of the image automation etc are described in detail in the main part of this manual 254 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual L Es
161. TA Note When using IT8 calibration make sure you are only using targets with the correct reference data of the appropriate film manufacturer e g Kodak Agfa Fuji 6b SilverFast cannot find the Reference Data File The automatic search is started within the installed folder for reference files In case no matching data file is found Silver Fast will make an internet connection to the LaserSoft Imaging homepage and search for the data file there The reference file will quickly be loaded size 20 to 3OkB The calibration will then be commenced In case no matching reference file is found an options dialogue is opened This may occur if the user has chosen a non Laser Soft Imaging T8 target which does not contain barcodes In this case please locate the matching reference file manually Attention Each reference data file contains exact information about the IT8 target This means that for each IT8 target there is only one matching reference file Not matching the exact targets and reference files will lead to a wrong calibration and false results SilverFast software usually installs some known reference files automatically inside the IT8 Reference folder a subfolder of the SivlerFast folder In case the reference file is not installed you will find more filed on the SilverFast installation CD as well as on out website http silverfast com download it8calibration en html You can easily identify your reference
162. Width and Height In order to keep output height and width or both for example in catalogue production two locks were implemented into the scan Original S amp kal Ausgabe 10 4802 3 E em dialogue lt Rahmen ohne Titel jb 16 4203 nale m Normally the locks are open By clicking on it the lock closes and Q Faktor Raster Mbyte the entered width or height or both are fixed z 3 1 5 60 pem 0 85 Fixing Output Width and Height In order to keep the ratio of height and width proportional scal ing the locks must be closed Move the hand onto one corner of the scan frame and a crossed cursor appears Now you can freely adjust the frame size while keeping the X aspect ratio Fixing Output Width or Height In order to keep output height or width one lock must be closed Move the hand onto one side of the gt scan frame and a horizontal cursor will appear Now the frame width can be changed without influencing the output height Do likewise to alter the height and maintain the output width 18 3 Presets SilverFast Manual Pixel Lock Pixel lock makes sure that no interpolation is taking place with the Original data When the lock is closed the original number of pixels of the original data will be preserved The output size can still be altered but the file size and accordingly the number of pixels will not change Only the output screen and the scaling values will change accordingly
163. Will undo the last performed adjustment or setting 320 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual 633 5 cm a4 5 om 623 5 cm 33 5 cm 528 5 cm RE b Prio dB 5x5 B em i 824 5 crm 554 5 cm 04 5 om bx3 5 cm a Prinkeo B D Prnbe B Ario ll uvm EFES cm amp 24 5 cm x4 cm Bad 5 cm 523 5 cm Application of Default Templates owitch from the General tab to the Template tab Choose an adequate template When choosing the template the according empty image frames will appear on the print page Switch back to the General tab Choose the images to be printed RS Enter the images to the tem plate image frames via the green add arrow Alternatively the images can be placed on the print page document by drag amp drop The according image frame can be chosen individually by dragging amp dropping a single image The subsequent exchange of single images is easy see red circles Activate the image to be exchanged by single clicking on it remove the contained image from the print page by clicking the red remove arrow choose a new image from the list and enter it Delete Image Frame Every selected image frame no matter whether an image has been entered or still empty can be removed from the print page docu ment by pressing Shift backspace or by clicking the red remove arrow SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR
164. a K iera v r Ua GEas a xn imo j NN Cancel SilverFast DC Pro Double clicking a RAW data file in the VLT will start the conversion and will open the file in the main menu after that emn c ka e luin HEB ts p n am a lar d n HAC l iiri ji Siverfas ZU NEA A xr alo 3 SilverFast HDR LI aa r ad a 1 E E li Em y amag t n s BO TTL 128 S Iris lz a role XEN EN M a2 2A ARAA E rwr ner Ux o Iex 4 c Bamesesatus m bam sed Se gee Le EW eae pum sem aza ll LI dos bm e mam mm SilverFast DC HDR Double clicking an image file in the VLT opens this file directly in the main menu All SilverFast tools are again available here This function is only available with special SilverFast versions 286 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual f Process The thumbnails of the RAW data images are marked with a blue dot after successful con version DSC_0052 lt gt lt gt After finishing the optimisation the image may be calculated and returned to the album as a corrected image by clicking the Proc ess button Please note that the option To album is CS selected in the General palette in the SilverFast DC a KW Metz SilverFast menu Process mode If not the corrected image will be placed mmi directly into the application e g Photoshop ee
165. ach This code con sists of numbers between 2 and 9 no ones and no zeros and all letters between A and Z except the letters i and o Finish the dialogue by clicking OK Ti SilverFast will now commence All functions of SilverFast are explained with a help text at the lower margin of the prescan window More help is given by clicking on the button to the left of the prescan window SilverFast Manual 1 2 Installation 29 Launching and Activating SilverFast via SFLauncher e Insert the SilverFast Installation CD into the drive Please ensure that you are logged into your system as ROOT Administrator oe SF Launcher v2 0 0 ba aunch SF Launcher esce sicuri tpe E SilverFast Launcher e ss i e Make sure that the scanner is correctly con Mh EI see pee nected and switched on Please note that she che Folder Systemplatte GOGE GW ns SilverFast Launcher with some film scanners a slide or a filmstrip Y di maa Eran has to be loaded E ve lier XT PEGE Tum ug dA Chara Jan z A 2 s Hoe SF Launcher v2 0 0 ji e 11 E 3 H SilverFast 23h Launcher Open the menu Plug in and choose directly your desired Choose Plugin folder SilverFast version or browse for the directory where the Silver SilverFast IRYL j 0 60 2141 Serial i u es BAVEN XETTEN TETMEZX Mw Fast plug ins are located by clicking lt Choose Plug in folder gt
166. adapter use the appropriate button in the prescan window to open the image overview dialogue The overview scans Index scan will automatically be created or completed respective ly You can select an image by clicking on it and then on the OK button Again you can select an image by clicking on the frame even if no thumbnail image has yet been created Use the Eject button on the left border of the main prescan win dow to eject the film strip 230 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives SilverFast Manual A Attention Functions are different from scanner to scanner and some of the functions are only available with specific scan ners or imaging applications m Ji uo Slide holder e slide magazine Adjusting the Film Strip Position This button enables to set a new position of start or end of a film strip in case the motor driven transport has not positioned the film correctly By clicking on to the positioner button the mouse switches to an arrow With the base of the mouse the exact beginning of an image in the slide is set The scanner will then readjust and update the prescan preview By pressing the Shift key and clicking on the positioner button the direction of the arrow is switched The exact end of the image can now be marked by clicking on it with the base of the arrow The scanner will readjust and update the prescan preview Filmholder for Middle Formats Some scanners support holders f
167. age Measurement unit cm Close Dialogue Printing Area Marked by violet frame SilverFast Manual 6 16 Advanced print dialogue 405 Differences in the Print Dialogue in SilverFast Studio Versions as Compared to DC and HDR Versions The basic functions are almost identical to extended print dialogue of the VLT ref SilverFastDC HDR of the PrinTao versions A more detailed description can be found in the respective sec tions of Chapter 6 11 Some logical differences are derived from the nature SilverFast Ai as scanning software it cannot handle previously saved image files Hence several functions of the A versions such as templates meta data etc are unavailable The main difference however is the 1 1 copy function which simulates the usage of a photocopier e 1 1 copy function When switching from the scan dialogue to the PrinTao dia logue all frames drawn within the preview window including their exact positions and proportions are transferred 1 1 to the selected paper format The individually set frame parameters e g filters are also trans ferred The new qualities will help users that for example have to scan newspapers for archiving purposes regularly It is now easy to de screen images of newspapers while merely sharpening the textures Care should be taken with selecting the batch order in the PrinTao dialogue The batch order depends on the order in which the scan frames have been dr
168. ailable Ra f Adobe Photoshop 7 Ki Adobe ImageReady 7 0 9 Adobe Photoshop 7 Adobe Photoshop 7 0 Install Log 3 Helpers y E Plugins Adobe ImageReady Only 3 Adobe Photoshop Only c3 Digimarc 3 Effects 2 EPS and PDF 3 File Formats pi Filters CI Import Export Y SilverFast Epson SF LogFile v p SilverFast L Help Ra IT8 Reference C Jobs PPCMYK Profile a Prefs amp Previews _2 SFprofR Epson GT 9700 X SilverFast Epson SilverFast HDR gt l3 SilverFast NikonM E 2 TWAIN L Import Export Alias x er2 lt Macintosh Prefs v 4 Y TY Y V vv An AA i DPDDUDBDD 2 E EEFE t El RCO pm pbe Freer peep L POR Windows Prefs SilverFast Preferences Prefs Starting with version 5 all SilverFast plug ins will create a folder called SilverFast in the picture editor directory The folder is paral lel to the actual Si verFast plug in and contains additional sub folders such as Previews for all Preview files Prefs for all preference files PPCMYK profiles for separation tables and Help for PDF Help files SilverFast saves all relevant scan parameters in its Prefs files These preference files are automatically created after SilverFast s first start up The following files are generated by SilverFast 1 SilverFast Preference File Prefs Folder The SilverFast prefs file resides inside the SilverFast folder
169. all SilvertFast SE ver sions and is recommended for novice users Colour channel selector Gradation point Gradation curves Midtones Contrast Highlight Shadow Brightness Gadang Cures r E 148 5 4 Gradation curves SilverFast Manual Adjusting Gradation Curves Gradation curves can be changed in four ways Midtones a By Using the Sliders AJAN By using the sliders the gradation curves can be conveniently Highlights altered The input fields relating to the curve points and those Shadows relating to the slider position are updated accordingly The slider position can also be changed by entering values into the input fields right of the slider Brightness X b By Moving the Curve Points The curve points of a gradation curve can be moved by the mouse Here the values in the input fields below the curve points are automatically updated c By entering Values into the Input Fields The curve points can be moved accordingly by changing the values in the five input fields Curve 5591 d By loading Saved Gradation Curves Job JohnLtd u Mag 5 Cv 1 You can load previously saved gradation curves out of the list PhotoShop Import and these will take effect immediately SilverFast Import Delete Save SilverFast Manual 5 4 Gradation curves 149 Gradation Curves Save PhotoShop Import SilverFast Import
170. allest point in a scanned image Line art pixels are black or white greyscale pixels can be from grey level O to 255 and colour pixels can be from O to 255 for each HGB channel Plug in module ooftware that runs from within another application posterisation Visible tonal banding in an image ppi pixels per inch The unit of measure for a pixel based image such as an image displayed on a monitor Also used for scan ner resolution prepress The industry that prepares the film from which printing plates are made preview A low resolution version of an image that appears in the SilverfasteAi Preview window to help you set the scan area and scanner controls proof A representation of what a final printed piece will look like so that it can be evaluated before the expense of printing SilverFast Manual 7 5 Glossary 487 R RAM Random Access Memory The short term chip based memory in a computer that applications load into to run RGB Red Green Blue The additive primary colours used to display images on a monitor S scan head The part of the scanner containing fluorescent lamps that passes across an image screen frequency See lpi SCSI An acronym for Small Computer System Interface An industry standard interface that provides high speed access to periph eral devices SCSI chain A group of SCSI devices linked to each other through SCSI peripheral interface cables and linked to the SCSI port o
171. an be done by means of the buttons located left of the printing window ees i _ Prinlan B Uu a j Fr ja aha SPrinlao B Left Centre image in printout Right Fit image to printout 302 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual The orientation is also alterable By clicking the Rotate button the image is rotated in 90 steps By means of the nvert buttons the image may additionally be inverted vertically and horizontally Egil il e V All previous changes left the image in its original size relation If you want to change the proportions of this image simply activate the Cut image option In the activated mode the selection can be done in an active image by click dragging the image Doing this on the edges allows cutting of the image Clicking and dragging will reestablish a once cropped image to its original dimensions admit tedly only within the actual dimensions of the original image If the Cut image mode is deactivated the proportions of the image may not be altered only size position and orientation is alterable A cut image can be protected against further changes Lower left Image in its original pro portion Cut mode deactivated Centre Cut image Cut mode acti vated Right Cut image fit to page Cut mode deactivated SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 303 6 X Y 58 10 0 150 cm 1537 x 2304 Pi
172. an frame must be altered after optimizing it with the NegaFix function it is advisable to turn off the mask automation If this is not done NegaFix will calculate new values and hence alter the current colours Clicking the button Auto will activate the automatic mask manu ally NegaFix will analyse the negative again remove the orange mask and show the resultant histogram and preview image Note This icon indicates a warning when the automatic mask is inactive It will appear in the upper area of the NegaFix control window It will also appear after clicking the button Reset ASTE IT EL The orange mask removal will be indicated or controlled through the position of the vertical delimiters left and right of the single histograms The orange automatic mask will move the delimters to the initial pixels in the single histograms channels 226 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives SilverFast Manual The numbers beside the delimiters will indicate the corresponding tonal value The delimters can also be used as sliders and actively control the orange mask removal process The strength of the orange auto matic mask can be controlled with the slider Auto Tolerance Moving the slider to the far right will have the greatest effect Any change can be monitored in the NegaFix dialogue window and also immediately updated in the large Si verFast preview This way you will always be in full control over the results
173. are taken with the flash QuickTime Starts a QuickTime movie and help features for the current window Preview in fullscreen Is used to display the active image in the preview in a full screen mode in front of a white background colour Clicking the preview again will close the window Film holder for middle formats Some scanners support holders for different formats Here the buttons for the middle formats 6x4 5 6x6 6x7 and 6x9 cm are shown Film holder for panorama captures Some film scanners are delivered with special holders for panorama formats In our example the button for a regular 35mm film 35 as well as the button for 35mm panorama 35P are differentiated By clicking on the respective button the mode is changed Holder transport For scanners that operate together with regular slide holders special buttons for the transport of the holders are required The first button opens the Set current position dialogue box Enter current position Here the current posi use Position tion of the magazine are to be Max Anzahl der Dias im Magazin 100 entered the slide case number Z Rundmagazin in the cassette The preset h ja lei Cancel OK The size of the inserted maga zine can also be entered max 100 The option Round magazine is to be selected when using such a magazine The second button moves the film magazine forwards and back wards The current posit
174. ast will calculate the optimal resolution and scaling factor for you SilverFast v6 0 1r30 SilverFast Ai o o o m PEL e L Scan Type 48 24 Bit B Filter None W Setting Save H j Image Type Standard W Name Horizontal scaling Untitled frame 1 File name Output rigina eS 16 9 1000 Original width ER n Output width Original height a jas mr melt Output height Factor Screen Mbyte ts 157 iem 35 30 File size Vertical scaling 60 ce Scan resolution Quality factor Dot screen Reset button Fixing width and height 16 3 Presets SilverFast Manual Showing scan resolution By pressing the Ctrl key SilverFast shows the hardware scan resolution in the edit field Showing interpolated resolution Ctrl key and Shift key shows the resulting interpolated reso lution for the actual scan In order to allow the proportion of width and height to be varied simply click on the lock to open or close it Scan Resolution for Scaled Images You can either scale the image by entering a scaling factor or by entering the desired output size SilverFast will calculate the miss ing factor and do the scan accordingly For example if you have a 35 mm image in the scanner and wish to enlarge this to 4x6 you just set the output size to 4 x 6 inches in Silve
175. ates on or off bitmap An image made up of a matrix of dots or pixels byte A unit of information equal to eight bits C calibration The process of setting equipment to a standard measure CCD Charge Coupled Device A light sensitive electronic chip used by scanners to measure light channel One greyscale scan or one of the three RGB components mak ing up a colour scan CLUT Colour Look Up Table A collection of most often used colours stored in a file or the System 482 7 5 Glossary SilverFast Manual CMYK cyan magenta yellow black The subtractive primaries also known as the process colours used for colour printing Colour separation Dividing a colour image into its four CMYK components for printing Also refers to the C M Y or K film negative from which printing plates are made comp comprehensive A test print used to evaluate layout and design compression The process of decreasing a file size contrast The range between the darkest and lightest areas in an image D daisy chain link together sequentially as in linking multiple drives on the SCSI bus DCS Desktop Colour Separation A format that contains five Post Script files for each colour image densitometer A hardware device to measure the amount of light transmitted through film to check the quality of imagesetter output Also a software feature for measuring the grey and RGB levels of an on screen image ditheri
176. awn or modified It is however still easy to select the correct order of the batch scans by means of the two batch buttons in PrinTao dialogue An example of the workflow of an old brochure 406 6 16 Advanced print dialogue SilverFast Manual Preview Scan In our example 9 scan frames were drawn One for textures green frame and eight for the images red frames The scan frame for the eight images all have identical parameters and were duplicated and positioned immediately after the first frame has been set PrinTao j Switching into the PrinTao E dialogue activates the 1 1 copy function All scan frames are automatically transferred to the print page Batch Order If necessary a different scan ning order may be allocated to all images on the print page To do this click the scan frame and may be re allocated forward or back ward by use of the two batch buttons ILI T TNI SilverFast Al Di HT Lula Poe et az tne Vee bers maran am pe p LN a Pi t rp s ul mam Tima H t ay Pt im imm j 6 j al ha Ep P i 2 Eu F Fran TE Da ae J Scene he EL 7 al i a a 6n an Bim risum ee mme an Prinlo B LINT RI Ip TT ee ee TIME a a j is Silver Ill amp SilverFast ELE Eg Aser Men amer deinen om Lado v i r m in LN TIT EE g che ma TAR A x wie d TrurTau Venerat image liat Prerna images Te
177. bManager 340 343 See SilverFastJobMa nager JPEG 2000 file format 246 JPEG file format 245 Format 245 466 7 4 Index SilverFast Manual Quality 245 JPF 246 K Keep original resolution 340 Keep output height or width 78 Keep the ratio of height and width 78 Keystrokes in SilverFast 454 Kodachrome film 232 L L logarithmic 154 Lamp brightness 66 Landscape 4 Lasso 167 382 Layers 159 175 383 Adding layers 1 6 Delete 1 7 Moving layers 178 Stapling order 178 Switch 177 Less auto sharpen 199 Levels 122 License 4 Light contour 203 Light source 292 Limit gamma slope 66 Linear midtone 154 Line art scans 215 Threshold 216 Zooming for optimum threshold definition 216 Lock 39 77 79 Logarithmic midtone 154 Ipcm 446 Ipi 446 Luminance 160 161 228 293 M Macintosh 19 Mac OS 9 2 19 Magazine for slides 239 Magnifier 97 277 See Zoom Manual focus 250 Mask edge size 57 169 175 Masks 57 159 167 175 382 397 Changing a Mask 1 0 Delete 1 2 Inverted mask 383 Move 1 1 New mask 167 No mask 1 1 Matrix 200 Maximum cache size 66 Measurement units 39 Meta data 311 314 Middle format 43 Middle formats 237 MidPip4 126 145 Adjusting neutral values to a determined density 128 Alert messages 128 Delete neutral points 128 Editing the MipPip 127 Midtone 108 141 149 154 156 Linear and Logarithmic Midtone 154 Setting midtone 125 Minimize window 39 Mirroring 40 Flip 47 SilverFast Ma
178. back ground Si verFast will remove an existing colour cast by clicking on the icon F Histogram The result can be seen in the n histogram as follows a The sliders for highlight midtone and shadow areas are off set indicating differ ent values and the amount of colour cast removal is shown in the indicator panel as a EN V A percentage 17 Highlight Lo Shadow 88 Min Max 100 T EE A Fs Calor 5pace Compression 100 Color Cast Removal 100 6 mas Q SilverFast Manual 5 3 Histogram 137 IN If the icon for auto adjust is coloured SilverFast will retain an d existing colour cast and it will not be removed by clicking on the icon The result can be seen in Histogram the histogram as follows The sliders for highlight midtone and shadow areas are all vertically in line indi cating identical values and the amount of colour cast removal is shown in the indicator panel as a line with no value 2 Min Max 93 Ww z al Pug PY Color Space Compression 100 Color Cast Removal y a ai c Pr Using the Slider for Manual Colour Cast Removal By using the slider you can determine how much of an existing colour cast you would like to remove By moving the slider with your mouse you can see the resulting changes in realtime in the preview as well as in the individual diagrams of the histogram dialogues A value of zero f
179. beeat Ey vb D 1539 SilverFast HDR kb OAs image Mode 24 Eit Codor ES Filter Hane H Setting Save J Image Type Standard e Bree Kind iles frama v ant v r EFH A x cs ELM Ri a Eu E Ri KI ZI xa M a E h Mi i ma EZ EE ls EL j EE E EE mas n SilverFastHDR SilverFastHDRStudio Opening an Image with the Open Button Clicking the Open button activates a dialogue for selecting the device or folder containing the images Kiran F O pe ri NA Pipzur sehn iha ovas Fig Tera would Lhe 10 werk at s k Front 948 Bx bi BNTITETII TS wc TW HDW 2 r Lad ibn B Go up ORO Neg tif m Ladybaxe2 500 ties be M Lesters abiri si HER tco Sag n rge ikia ttbi Er neh 43 aga E Prr b ke Pappe 140 Modified 15081337 jan tienes Hos dba j K Open an image directly by double clicking on the name or by sin gle clicking on the name and then the open button The image will be opened within the SilverFast HDR prescan window The Virtual Light Table VLT The Virtual Light Table named VLT is available from SilverFast Version 6 0 2 onwards and replaces the previously used dialogue Image overview The VLT is an outstanding tool because it combines the four most important steps in one single window while working with images Viewing getting an overview and searching Sort look over a
180. ble JM is thus a tool used to drastically increase the workflow efficien cy and also a means of lowering costs Compare the normal workflow to the one made possible by JM See next page The graphic representation shows the traditional work flow represented on the left and the new workflow controlled by SilverFast JobManager represented on the right In the traditional manner the operator has to continuously remain at the scanner workstation since the short wait does not make it practical to work at a second workstation Each image is proc essed individually and made available to the network With SilverFastJobManager there are long free periods in which the operator can pursue additional activities at other workstations As the computations show scanning 72 slides can save 6 full hours of work SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFast JobManager 359 A traditionally repeating workloop using high SilverFast JobManager time consumption of personnel automated workflow with minimal time CELEB K RE Of personnel a na u a a PTT ETC Th LE E P L L j raw data scan data storage automated by ADF Network WWW image optimising for each slide I image optimizing and return to JM for each image file Network WWW a data storage for each slide Rende ring inclu ding data storage final scan of all selected image files MENDA os e Network WWW v
181. bove the window The pages may be switched by click ing the respective thumbnails By clicking the Plus and the Minus buttons respectively printing sheets may be added or deleted manually In case there are many pages the images may be switched between these pages Moving images Select and click drag the thumbnails of the current page and simply drag them on to the desired page These images are then removed from their original position and disappear from that page e Copying images Select images of the current page and while keeping the Shift key pressed drag the thumbnail on to the desired page The images will them remain on the original page as well The size of the images that will be printed out is adjustable in the presets under the Layout menu The Priority determines if all images use the same long page the same short page or the exact entered values on the printout fom r Prinia B 9 Print n i B li d ry raam E r mt ae y Priority small side The selected images were all inserted with a short page of 8 cm Priority exact size The selected images were all inserted with an exact size of 4x8 cm Since in this case the image contents were larger they were cut to 4x8 cm SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 307 Naturally all single images may also be varied in size by click drag ging them manually in the printout window Click draggin
182. buttons 371 Control menu 3 1 Creating masks 3 1 Defect recognition 379 Defect size 3 9 Defect type 3 9 387 388 Delete Resources 385 Detection 379 Environment size 381 386 Expert mode 3 71 386 Extension 386 Intensity 379 380 Layers 383 Add layer 384 Move layer 384 Multiple layers 383 Length 38 7 389 Longish scratches 387 Manual correction 378 Masks 371 382 Adding to mask 383 Drawing amask 382 Drawing an inverted mask 383 Mask tools 382 Selection of mask tool 382 Subtracting from mask 383 Monitor modes 3 76 Artifacts highlighted 377 Corrected view 377 Original view 377 Navigator 3 6 Navigator window 3 1 Orientation 387 388 Output resolution 374 Overview 3 1 Presets 3 1 Preview 3 5 Red framed tile 3 6 Save Load settings 385 Using SRD and iSRD simultaneously layer tech nology 396 View of artifacts 371 Width 387 390 Workflow 372 373 Yellow framed tile 3 6 Size adjustments scaling 76 Skin tones 74 Snow 74 Soft mask 57 Softproof 91 195 416 427 Changing the separation parameter and control on the effect of shadow build up 93 Softproof of CMYK colour separations 92 Sorting images 279 Special defaults palette 65 Special functions 39 193 Specular highlights 130 141 SRD See SilverFastSRD SRD Smart Removal of Defects 369 sRGB 416 Stand Alone Application See SFLauncher 476 7 4 Index SilverFast Manual Start volume 21 Studio upgrade 253 Studio versions 401 405 Super fine s
183. cal focussing of the scanner 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR Scanner independent SilverFast products and their differences to SilverFastAl 6 12 SilverFast JobManager The high end development of batch scanning 6 13 SilverFast SRD SilverFastiSRD Smart removal of defects remove scratches and dirt by the software 6 14 SilverFast AACO Auto adaptive contrast optimization 6 15 Clone tool Retouching tool 6 16 PrinTao The extended print dialogue of SilverFast Studio 6 17 Image settings Important image parameters in an overview including real time output histogram in SilverFast Studio SilverFast Manual 6 Special functions 193 6 1 The Densitometer Colour models supported in the densitometer are RGB CMY LAB CMYK K LCH and HSL O Densitometer O Densitometer l l lel Qu 2 112 66 i54 gt 178 Q5 Qs gt e Y 69 Q 151 TETT Densitometer Densitometer imi m s55 2 s Qaa gt 5 ioo 9 O20 gt 133 els lel els lel SilverFast SE versions The densitometer values in SilverFast SE versions only show the CMYK values RGB and K values N Di 34 23 14 s4 233 18 9 jaz Y _Densitometer O _Densitometer Densitometer O Densitometer O Densitometer Kel lel Les gt 69 Qe gt fer io 116 aj 31 36 4o gt s S 31 32 2 24 Fee gt s Das gt 54
184. can 67 Switching scanners 80 Switch SilverFast from RGB to CMYK 427 System requirements 19 259 Macintosh 19 68k 19 Windows 20 T Technic 74 Templates 298 316 319 See PrinTao Default templates 321 Modification of templates 319 View templates 301 Text tools See PrinTao Three step slider 155 Threshold 59 119 200 213 216 Auto threshold highlight 121 Auto threshold shadow 121 Thumbnail size 268 Toggle switch 195 Tool bar in the prescan window 40 Auto adjust 46 Expert dialogue 46 Global correction 46 Gradation 46 Histogram See Virtual Light Table VLT Reduce window 46 Selective colour correction 46 Setting highlight mid tone shadow 46 Zoom 46 Tools for brilliant images 107 Tools palette 39 108 Tools 46 108 Transparency 70 103 TWAIN 25 U Uneven scaling of images 77 Units of measurement 52 53 Unload images 2 1 Unsharp masking sharpness 73 199 209 Automatic USM 199 Manual USM 199 Manual USM in the expert dialogue 203 Light contour dark contour 203 Over sharpening 203 Shadows soft 204 Sharpen from only in negative mode 203 Sharpening up to 203 Matrix 200 Pixel zoom 201 Setting of the output parameters 199 Strength 200 Threshold 200 USM dialogue with scaleable prescan 202 Zooming into the Preview 201 Update reminder 33 Upgrade button 32 USB 21 80 USBSCAN SYS 21 User defined 74 User forum 27 USM 209 374 See Unsharp masking sharp ness V SilverFast Manual 7 4 Index 4 f
185. changes go back to the full image by clicking on the magnifying glass a t L r r y amp Hara HIS 14371 Lame J eer Day HERM i i a After editing the zoomed prescan you can easily jump back to the 2 overview scan frame by clicking onto the zoom tool 102 4 Prescan concept SilverFast Manual Reflective Transparency 3x Reflective 3X Transparency 3x Up Reflective Original 3X Up Transparency 3x Mid Reflective 3x Mid Transparency 3x Low Reflective 3x Low Transparency Menu Original On top a scanner model with one optical resolution The scanner shown below has three optical relutions to switch over A NOTE Functions are different from scanner to scanner and some of the func tions are only available with specific scanners NOTE some film scanners allow only a maxi mum scan area of 6x9 cm even if the material holder itself allows for much larger originals Please refer to your hardware manual for maximum allowed original dimen sion Scanner with Different Optical Resolutions A few scanners have the ability to use different optics to supply different optical resolutions Normally a higher optical resolution has to be switched on with a distinct commend This will result in a different smaller usable scan area Very often only a small vertical strip in the middle of the flat bed can be used Even with the sof
186. controls the sensitivity of the auto adjust If the auto adjust is set to small values it will react to few pixels If the threshold is set to very larger values it will skip more pixels at the end points in the histogram This is made clear by the following two examples 1 Automatic Threshold on 0 Tu eren The auto adjust is set to greatest sensitivity If the threshold is ALT RB set to O the highlight shadow points are set on individual eman I as pixels This could however lead to undesired results in some images since these first pixels could represent insignificant image information not visible to the eye For this reason the threshold should be set to values between 2 and 10 Histogram A a Shadow 9q 2 Min Max 98 gt a 0 Color Space Compression 100 Color Cast Removal dem SilverFast Manual 5 1 Image auto adjust 119 Defaults a General Aum CMS Special Aino Thresheld Highlight ad ie Levels Aata Threshold Shadim 0 a Level Histogram o m m m E a A a Shadow E 2 Min Max 98 PY AM a a 0 Color Space Compression 100 Color Cast Removal me ST ME oe gt Cancel 2 Automatic Threshold on 30 The other extreme of the auto adjust threshold is the value 30 It can be clearly seen in the histogram that the highlight triangle
187. d have an ICC profile defining this colour space in which you can select later in the S lverFast CMS dialogue under Profiles for ColorSync ICM Internal If you do not have this profile use save to save the profile into the System s profile folder Now bring up SilverFast from Import menu Go to CMS under Options in the SilverFast s main dialogue Select ColorSync ICM in the Colour management section under Internal gt Monitor and Internal gt Output Scanner gt Inter nal is also set to ColorSync ICM in our example This is only possible if you have a Scanner ICC profile either from SilverFast s IT8 calibration or supplied from the scanner manufacturer The profiles of the hardware manufacturer are not very accurate since they are more generalized instead of scanner specific 428 71 Addendum SilverFast Manual Defaults General Auta ji Special Color MEn JEEP 1 DYA ieierna Clarine EI Qem Mantar Colerbync menma Gurus RCE E PriAes F r C lortun Somer Agie WET nik amp d OTT 41 yeanear ITrankp aren NOSE H imernal Adobe RCE 1998 j Cray CGanenc Gray Profile ioc eJ Output Printer Rendering laiene pencentual EI Embedded HOC profiles Ernihed amp t oll j Fr he to embed BAdnbe RGB Soa Plug Fry CMT neh E Canin Default General Cmecial r I Colar Mar egemen Era
188. d be placed on a point on the image where sufficient visual details can be differentiated Move the mouse to the picture the mouse pointer changes to a pen symbol Click on the point in the picture where you want to set the focus A small circle with a cross appears the focus point is set 200 6 10 Focus SilverFast Manual Manual Focus with Preview The focus button depicts a black symbol together with the letter P The focus value is displayed in millimetres in an additional icon below E CH E First set a sufficiently high output resolution for the current frame Le INE intel Pir krna 1 Original Scale X Taput ins m fig 8E Tan omes fat Ghama Screen Mice hs 1 4n E Kul AL la i 9 r Click first on the focus button Move the mouse across the picture E until the mouse pointer changes to a pen symbol Next click on the point in the picture where you want to set the focus The point will be marked with a cross symbol The focus preview dialogue appears and in the before and after window a preview is produced with the entered resolution A new scan will automatically begin Focus Preview ku Fp Before a EN 0 00 z340 Manual Point i Auto Cancel j OK y SilverFast Manual 6 10 Focus 251 In order to change the focus in the dialogue window the following tools are available 1 If the focussing is suffic
189. d click on the deri t th t ti t f TEE apneni abi detto icon or er O prevent the au omatic colour cas remova rom eliminat ing this keep the Shift key pressed down and click the aperture button The highlight shadow points will be optimised the colour effect will remain untouched in the image The highlight shadow triangles of the above histograms will look like this Histogram Histogram Histogram o mN NS a emm a QUILL Der gt A a A 3 Highlight L 3 Shadow 937 3 Highlight L Shadow 97 A A 3 Highlight L Shadow 97 2 Min Max 98 2 Min Max 98 2 Min Max 98 NE w b y b d w A a A a A a 0 Color Space Compression 100 0 Color Space Compression 100 0 Color Space Compression 100 Color Cast Removal Ve y Color Cast Removal Qazan Se ME Color Cast Removal pem C Cancel Cancel ROKR oc3 gt Cancel pem Kote gt Cancel gt Cancel an Cyan highlights set to 9 Magenta highlights set to 9 Yellow highlights set to 9 The values for highlight and shadow points are 9 in the highlights and 97 in the shadows This way the colour cast is completely retained in the image Original not optimised Optimised with colour cast removal suppressed 118 5 1 Image auto adjust SilverFast Manual Auto Adjust and Threshold SS Se Under Options Auto a threshold can be determined for the auto adjust This threshold
190. d the Options CMS card where you can adjust the colour management settings T Prescan Sean RGE Bul The CMS Palette has Four Different Sections 1 Colour Management Here you can define whether and how SilverFast will communi IAM cate with its imaging functions and the different devices scan GIRS Reid Calibration ET ner digital camera monitor printer nord RAN 2 Profiles for ColorSync ICM pre In case you have chosen ColorSync Windows ICM as your 2 E f preferred colour management system you have to define the canals eek Sorte in and output profiles for the different devices here kemdeting meen perceprual EI B esae ll 3 Embedded ICC Profiles iai E ed Er Here you will define whether SilverFast will embed a profile into er ESR IR the output data in order to render colours on another output 9 C Amph Y tances ok 7 device correctly at a later instant CM ae alge The name of the embedded profile in the current image is also displayed in SilverFastHDR DC Defaults I Genaral Aute cms Special Color Management 4 Plug amp Play CMYK When using P amp P CMYK you have to chose a separation ICC CMYK output profile to seperate your images for the printer 4 Scanner gt itera Calibration Wiernal Monta Automatic wes Interral Output Par CMTE PraBies for Coker yne Scanner iPoeffe enhn waer
191. d the MidPip dialogue window will appear The value fields show the before after RGB or CMY values of all neutral points They are fully editable SilverFast version 6 offers the possibility of the most sophisticated colour cast corrections gt MidPip eu Siverfayt HDE Leners amp Bhirtil mm ee 2 B E B Lr MsdPig DE l 1 fe 6 Midfio i Dest 172 172 172 la i Emael Cz EY jme k ww E uw eal EN MidPip li w b te t0 d MigPpl1Dew w2 ww om om d m Magio sit 18 09 2 o E Midin 2 Diit xo soo 300 l0 E FL l1 E r v Cancel z m 8E ua Cm MidPip aoe i er amp amp tr re M dPip TL Sr il iis A l amp MidPip 1 Deut 172 073 if AA t M sfip 3 r w 9T Se ur Mid amp nz0eu mn cn cm n il Mite m cz m D z Mi dr j J Dgn zz T n g x ne hc img B Lj ai SilverFast Manual 5 2 Pipette 127 Bi MadPig D Em l l MidPep 1 Desi rea Cancel Detail MidPip E B Ur i is b TTE UK _ 172 li oe The first line MidPip Src represents the RGB or CMY source values The second line MidPip Dest represents the RGB or CMY destination values The latter will normally show the same val ues for the three colour channels since the midtone selector pulls the chosen midtone to neutral Now the user can change these
192. d to your Macintosh or PC it is required to select the desired scanner Otherwise you can via Search Device have the bus system of your computer search for the devices connected e Picture SilverFastHDR DCPro HDR Open image HDR Overview The names of the current image as well as the recent images HDR SF Callmage jpg i j i T i HDR Target 021023 24b noprof tif are displayed here By clicking Open image a new image in Image v HDR Target 021023 48b noprof tif HDR Target 021023 24b retnoprof tif the directory can be searched for and opened AN Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 69 Scan Mode EM mauri Batch Mode Normal File Batch Mode File AN Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software Original BAPE ela Document Feeder Pos Neg vf Positiv Negativ Import Delete Frame set EST Scan Mode Process Mode Under scan mode select between Normal Batch Mode Normal File and Batch Mode File With Normal the current scan frame will be scanned and the image will directly appear in a window in the imaging applica tion e g Photoshop
193. de vi use AACO Settings for AACO Strength na nenn 50 6 Shadow width v M 75 Saturation 5 Preview u Cancel J OK __ Proesa Mithe B usa AACO iting Te Anc ci Strength waz 21 x aed cow videh P L amp S Dr ar l n ir a Preview l2 Cancel Dk Manual corrections can be done by means of the 3 parameter set tings After each change of a parameter the preview is updated by pressing the Preview button Clicking the Reset buttons sets back the parameters to the origi nal preset values Strength The upper slider regulates the intensity of the effect on the image The values range from 0 to 10096 Default setting is 5096 Shadow width This regulates how deep the AACO is to interfere in the highlights i e up to what brightness is will apply omaller values only affect the very dark areas of the image High values will also interfere with the mid tones Saturation The third parameter regulates the saturation of the colours but only those which have been altered by Intensity and Shadow width adjustments The example shows that even INDE BT ILLAS severe changes to the shadows in n pou in da will not affect the highlights 41 b 4 s while the shadows have been s f corrected NEU 400 6 14 SilverFast AACO SilverFast Manual 6 15 Clone Tool The powerful clone tool in the new Studio versi
194. der P amp P CMYK a suitable separation profile is selected Please make sure that the same separation profile is selected in your imaging program Internal gt Output v RGB ColorSync CA P amp P CMYK Plug amp Play CMYK ELI Oh ze U S Sheetfed Coated v2 icm CS ColorMatch 3 01 SWO 2B5B icc EuroscaleCoated icc EuroscaleUncoated icc Generic CMYK Profile icc JapanStandard icc Photoshop4DefaultCMYK icc Photoshop5DefaultCMYK icc USSheetfedCoated icc USSheetfedUncoated icc USWebCoatedSWOP icc USWebUncoated icc After establishing these settings you can switch between the RBG and the CMYK settings in the densitometer window as often as you wish To achieve this click on the button for softproot By activating this icon with the mouse softproof is turned on or off If softproof is activated the icon is bright otherwise it is dim EE SilverFast Manual 4 Prescan concept O1 12 Softproof of CMYK Colour Separations Densitometer If the permanent softproof function is activated the respective colour can be displayed in the prescan window when clicking on C M Y or K buttons of the densitometer Any combination of these colours is thus judgeable prior to scanning Clicking on the summary symbol will turn back to the full CMYK display Colour separation softproof uw Lire nii j ain milia oP aar mom iuri am cd iim bius r dee EE imr um r ken T n Lari B
195. descreening GANE Descreening not Descreened Descreened _ intense moir amp ilx amp Preview Wi detect screen Descreening Parameters Screen Custom y 128 p __ use Unsharp Masking a Cancel OK Descreening This dialogue allows an automatic Descreening not Descreened Descreened and manually adjustable descreen ing In order to judge the quality of the descreening a before after view is available Here a freely sizable 10096 view of the image is shown intense moire gji amp Descreening Parameters Screen Custom l 300 ip use Unsharp Masking EM Cancel j OK In order to generate a preview simply click the Preview but ton within the opened dialogue The mouse pointer changes to a square with which a homogenous part with medium brightness of the image should be chosen and clicked The scan starts immedi ately The previously activated input field detect screen ensures that the correct screen is calculated automatically The result of the descreening is displayed after the end of the final scan in the After window Simultaneously the detected screen is displayed in numerical values in the Descreening Parameters window In case an inadequate part of the image was chosen an error message will be displayed In this case please choose a different more homogenous part of the image nar Lescreened Lescrepned The detection failed Pl
196. do Redo last action Command Z ces Show current hardware resolution e HMM Show calculated scan resolution Ctrl Shift e a rcx Masks in SilverFast SRD Hide mask frame lessen Cul Shade inactive mask area Alt Ctrl oo eee eee Reduce mask leen AE Lucem S ed mE BM SE Extend mask 0000 cee eee eee pi lJ EMDN m ecartrd gt gt RDnEHEHnEnmHRIZT JobManager Select all job entries 0 0 0 0 Command A Windows Ctrl Alt 1 Ctrl Alt 2 Ctrl Alt 3 Ctrl Alt 4 Ctrl Alt 5 Ctrl Alt 6 Ctrl Alt 7 ESC or Ctrl Period Return Enter 456 7 3 Addendum SilverFast Manual Action VLT virtual light table Macintosh Windows Context menu in album and overview Ctrl Click XXX Hight mouse Preview mode full screen Command Shif F Ctrl Shift F fit to screen Display EXIF AMOS ces mee uar Pai EESS Command Hl 244 acea de s Ctrl l Album mark all images Command A CtrltA Album delete image Command backspace Ctrltbackspace EP extended printing dialogue Crop opposing edges corners Shift Click amp Drag Shift Click amp Dra simultaneously SilverFast Launcher Terminate h oe e eic Command Q sss dues Ctrl Q SilverFast Manual 7 3 Addendum 45 458 7 3 Addendum SilverFast Manual E j Biu conhecimento sabedoria a
197. dow The default display is the RGB scan but by pressing Ctrl Shift and holding down the mouse button in the large preview scan the infrared channel is displayed nae l 0 71 11 e al al a Eam rediit a nu rasan lr r Frame Cites Bedi euch ee Paka jm l Pale l T JFT EZES IA BAI nan er j ji Dalee sm kurr Compote Demo Mur Fir mad wi 1 Pear ahon o H Le Ts ERO IER SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD 397 398 6 13 SilverFast SRD iSRD SilverFast Manual 6 14 SilverFastAACO Auto Adaptive Contrast Optimization SilverFast AACO is an excellent tool for the correction of dark too much contrast bearing image parts while preserving the details in the highlights s gt a AACO button coe left not active AACO is activated by AA right activated clicking the respec WI tive button located in the vertical toolbar left of the preview window ZJJNEA LII MS IE A dialogue will open and the therein set parameters are directly projected onto the current image Process Mode H R use AACO Settings Tor ULM U s rangih L a x Shadow width M o x Bin Preview ia Cancel Ox Process Mode 5G Cancel GK For checking the before after effect AACO can be activated and de activated by means of the checkbox SilverFast Manual 6 14 SilverFast AACO 399 Process Mo
198. dure for selecting profiles on pages 5 section 1 to 5 2 Expansion Menu Using the slider Auto tolerance will adjust the strength of the auto masking process The effect can be monitored in the histogram and preview window The slider at the position utmost left indicates minimal effects 3 Curves Menu Adjustment of curves Change to Edit mode click on pencil Drag the curves so that the image in the preview window will look as desired oingle curves can be selected by clicking the colour patches red green blue for single curves above the curves dialogue to select all curves click grey patch All curves are selected by default oingle curve points can be moved with the mouse For a more precise adjustment it is possible to zoom into the curves plus magnifier pressed Alt key Minus magnifier In the zoomed mode the visible area may be moved with the pressed Shift key T d 224 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives SilverFast Manual 4 Curves Menu Set Neutral Grey Sometimes image areas that should be neutral have a colour cast This can be easily neutralized or even changed into another colour With the curves in edit mode click onto the colour cast area in the preview This point in the gradation curves is marked by vertical lines and marked in the HS and L dialogue display below by a single point or a line respectively Drag this point in the HS dialogue verti cally down to
199. dust and scratch removal using SilverFast SRD is the addition of hardware linked technologies which use infrared light This solves the problem faced by any software which has to both recognise and remove dust scratches etc differentiating between dust to be removed and image information to be retained How does iSRD work Thanks to the long wavelength of infrared light it can penetrate the colour emulsions of film negatives and slides virtually unhindered There are only problems if it encounters scratches dust particles lint etc which also cast shadows in infrared light ISRD exploits this characteristic by scanning the image in two passes The first pass is the infrared scan and the second pass the normal RGB scan Once the software has completed both scans an additional image channel created automatically from the infrared image is used for the dust and scratch removal calculation On completion of the calculation the results can be displayed in the large preview window The default display is the RGB scan but by pressing Ctrl Shift and holding down the mouse button in the large preview scan the infrared channel is displayed SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD 393 Which Films can iSRD be Used With ISRD can be used with conventional colour negatives developed using the C41 process colour slides developed using the E6 process and paper proofs Due to the silver content in c
200. e 3 Perform the required corrections gradation highlight shadow selective colour correction 4 Jump back to the overview preview click the zoom tool again While in the normal preview you might need to look into the Zoom again You can do this by clicking on the zoom tool once again Only when you change the selection substantially on the preview a new zoom scan be initiated 5 Now pull out the zoom selection across the whole image the correction you have done on the zoom selection will be auto matically applied to the whole image SilverFast always keeps two prescans in memory the main pres can of the whole scan area and a zoomed prescan As long as the selected frame lies inside the area of the zoomed prescan in the memory no new zoomed prescan will be initiated If you have zoomed into an image and have decreased the frame size afterwards clicking the zoom tool will not cause SilverFast to do a new prescan with a higher magnification Instead push the Prescan button again when in zoomed mode SilverFast Manual 4 Prescan concept 101 Editing a Zoomed Prescan A zoomed section can be edited at any time All SilverFast tools are available The zoomed selection can be made slightly bigger or smaller Move the mouse over the frame border until horizontal or vertical arrows indicate that you can move the selection marquee The arrows show in which direction the frame can be moved After you have made your
201. e shadow Global correction Wut Zoom ie Selective colour correction Expert dialogue Auto adjust Reduce window Gradation Activity Indicator for Change of Setting The icons turn dark grey when the settings have been changed Even on large monitors it can also immediately be determined whether settings have been changed or not and in which tool they have been changed 46 2 e Overview SilverFast Manual SilverFast Ai anet la E Pesca Sean tH Get l l le Rotation Tool Palette The palette for orientation of the image can be found on the densi tometer index card or in the densitometer window Here you can may assess how the respective image shall be orien tated in its output This may be a rotation in 90 steps or a vertical or horizontal reflection Attention The adjustments shown here always overwrite the settings shown in the vertical column heading panel left of the prescan window Hence it is possible to display the prescan image in landscape format but let it be scanned in portrait format by means of the densitometer buttons This has advantages when working with large scan areas The entire scan bed may be used regardless of the orientation The prescan may be rotated for each image The output orientation is simply set in the densitometer T Rotate right Flip vertical Flip horizontal Switching between pixel zoom and image orientation monitor elt
202. e dialogue window It will now be easy to determine exactly what is D happening in the gradation curve during global correction ae One mouse click will determine if the total tonal value area will be T IM corrected globally or only in portions i e only the highlights the 2 Co qua midtone selector tones or the shadow areas For the total tone Miss T pee value region click on the three yellow red batched points below JE E ae the miniature gradation curve for a portion click on one of the 2 gt 2 single red yellow points 3 9 below the value indicators Desired SHIFT portions can be combined by holding down the Shift key and clicking once A red point below the value indicators and a red frame on the respective greyscale will indicate that this tonal value region has just been activated and can be changed Global Color Correction In addition a three step slider has been included which will allow adjustment for the degree of change The bottom step allows small changes The upper step will produce more intense changes SilverFast SE Versions The dialogue is simplified in all Silver FastSE versions and is recommended for novice users The other operations of global correction have remained the same the use of the slider or click dragging within the colour circle 25 so s a a 25 8 50 S 84 B 2 2 1 A a x wi VA E 4 d n T n lt i d P 25 s 70 s T J 25 s
203. e how the image has gained in brilliance In general a strong difference between the parts of the image within the scan frame and the parts outside this frame can be seen The effect of the automation is also shown by the change of colour of the neighbouring buttons for the histogram and the gradation dialogue Histogram In the histogram we can observe that the little black triangle o u la al a marker shows that the highlight is now at 13 This means that every point which has had a value of 13 in the previous image now has become the colour white 2 396 Simultaneously we can observe that the red colour cast has vanished from the brighter IM oe on areas The auto gradation has eliminated the colour cast Min Mia s F a Coler Space Compression rin Colar Cay R em val in x 2 Caw SD Histogram with auto adjust The gradation curve on the left shows that the auto gradation has made the image slightly brighter in the midtone Please note that the artificial intelligence inside S verFast evalu ates images on the basis of what is inside the scan frame selec tion You can change the effect of the auto adjust by making the selection smaller or larger 10 21 44 70 2S5 100 Gradation with auto adjust 116 5 1 Image auto adjust SilverFast Manual Image Tyne Landscape Skin tones Gold tones Technic Evening An H 5 Cast Shadow Last user dened gt
204. e image The range is generally 3 apertures White balance The white balance of the image can be set by this slider By this an incorrect alignment can be compensated Light source By means of the popup menu presets for certain standard light sources can be chosen e g Daylight The preset is unchanged as long as the value is set in the camera else the colour temperature will be set by SilverFast s automation Pipette The colour temperature of the image can directly be measured by the pipette For this a colour neutral grey white black point should be selected The white balance slider will instantly jump to the measured position Colour Colour tint The colour cast in the image is affected by this slider Simply said the colour temperature refers to a shift between RED and BLUE By means of colour an element of GREEN can be added or subtracted from the image 292 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Brightness mid tones This slider regulated the brightness of the mid tone values of the image The slider is coherent with the mid tone sliders of the gradation and histogram dialogues Contrast This slider controls the contrast of the image The slider operates like the one within the gradation dialogue Saturation This slider affects the saturation of the image In the far left position the image appears completely unsaturated and looks like a greyscale image Smoothing of luminance T
205. e character of the original film manufacturer profile For a more precise adjustment it is again possible to zoom into the curve Plus magnifier and with the Alt key pressed the Minus magnifier Within the zoomed mode the visible area can be moved by pressing the Shift key and moving the mouse oingle points on the curves may be touched and relocated with the mouse For a more precise adjustment it is possi ble to zoom into the curves plus magni fier pressed Alt key Minus magnifier In the zoomed mode the visible area may be moved with the pressed Shift key oelecting any of the RGB selectors above the curves will acti vate any of the red green or blue curves accordingly Clicking the grey selector will active all curves The button Smoothen allows to smoothening of an active curve which might be slightly rough This function can be used repeatedly Additional clicks will invoke further smoothening operations Several clicks will increase the effect SilverFast Manual 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives 229 Neutralizing Colour Casts First click the edit button to activate the curve dialogue Move the cursor into the image preview window and click onto the area you want to neutralize While moving the cursor you can monitor the colour values CMY recommended in the floating densitometer Clicking onto the image will bring up a new dialogue below the NegaFix curve dialo
206. e from the tools palette occurring in the floating window on the left Stai w Be36 SilverFast Ai te A B Su etaz D Le General estan Type 48 274 By e Filter Sharpen UM m moou n saang Save an Image Type Sundard _ E Tools palette zoom auto adjust histogram gradation global selective correction setting highlight shadow expert dialogue Minimize window Frame palette General palette Scan type colour depth greyscale line art HDR chooser Filter unsharp masking descreening Scan frame parameters save load Image type presets selection of different presets File name Scaling factor uneven scaling with open lock image proportions will be distorted Input dimensions high and width corresponding to prescan frame r OD OVOZ C V W X Bief ait Output dimensions high and width corresponding to prescan frame Quality factor Output screen Out put file size Scan resolution in dpi or dpcm Reset button Prescan launch button Scan start button switchable to RGB CIE Lab and CMYK scan Quit SilverFast Lock closed proportional scaling of the scan frame Lock for fixed width or height Measurement units pica point pixel inch or cm ScanPilot window with help text Active scan frame Special functions and scanner specific functions Densitometer palette SilverFast Manual
207. e in SilverFast SE versions 148 Adjusting Gradation Curves 149 Saving a Gradation Curve 150 Deleting a Gradation Curve 150 Gradation Curve Channels 150 Deactivating Gradation Curve Points 151 Resetting Deactivated Curve Points 151 Hottrack Gradation 152 Marking the Condition of Gradation Points On Off 152 Extended Gradation Curves 153 Loading Photoshop Gradation Curves 153 Selecting Gradation Curves 153 Linear and Logarithmic Midtone 154 5 5 Global Colour Correction Dialogue Colour Balance 155 Colour Balance 156 Resetting Colour Balance 156 Changing Colour Balance 157 5 6 Selective Colour Correction 158 Colour in Colour Correction 158 Overview 159 1 1 Content SilverFast Manual Objective of Selective Colour Correction Selecting the Correction Colour HSL Correction by Sliders Correcting an Image Selectively Colour Circle Selecting Colours Colour Correction Presets Presets for the Colour Matrix Presets for Controls and Matrix Combinations Working with Colour Correction Presets Joining Presets for a Complete Correction Working with Masks Selecting a Mask Tool Hard or Soft Mask Edges Changing of a Mask Belated Inversion of a Mask inverse Directly new Redraw of an Inverted Mask Correction of 12 Colours Selective Colour Correction with Multi Layers and Masks Creating new Layers Changing Layers Switching Deleting Layers Moving of Layers Change order SilverFastACR Adaptive Colour Restoration
208. e overview 2nd button if for example a new film strip has been inserted or you can pause the refresh that has already begun 3rd button Clicking on the 2nd button will tell the scanner to produce an over view of the whole film strip m Ihe overview progression will display on your monitor I and can be stopped and started Selecting Desired Images In the resulting image overview you can select individual images by Command click Win Control click or you can select a connected sequence of images with Shift click SHIFT Win SHIFT or select all images with Command A 5 Win CR A The activated images will have a wide white frame in the image overview The frames of the non activated images will remain grey Add By Clicking on the Add button the images will be k added to the JM window 348 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual Setting Add make HiR PP EL W Keep original resolution _ Aute adjust L Adjust images automatically image type re r dik K di TEA femal Ed 1r EIE tip eoim E ees C Camel J oince no parameters have been defined for these image files in contrast to a scan frame in the preview window a dialogue will appear after you click on the Add button from which you can choose a previously saved presets or the SilverFast basic setting as a parameter substitute for the imag
209. e visible LL 35 Intensity indicates the magnitude of the effect The maximum Ni GB aranca E Monectrams value 100 indicates GANE will try to eliminate 10096 of the S men Hereme RH noise in all of the image Tcr An ideal image without any noise will easily be interpreted as ED 2 artificial by the human brain For instance an ideal single colour flat area will seem artificial to the onlooker On the other hand an area containing a small amount of noise looks much more natural Due to these facts it seems to be reasonable to reduce the intensity with high quality scanners to 8096 or less or when the results look unnatural or artificial Threshold Here GANE tries to distinguish between unwanted noise and image details that have to be preserved A small value means a smaller level of noise SilverFast Manual 6 4 GANE Graine and noise elimination 213 214 6 4 GANE Graine and noise elimination SilverFast Manual 6 5 Line Art Scans 1 Bit Resolution of Line Art Scans Line art is 1 bit information where the number of pixels effectively the resolution is the key factor whereas with greyscale images the number of shades or colours is most important standard flat bed scanner With SilverFast the scanner can scan different optical resolutions depending on the scanner hardware with interpola tion up to 4800 dpi But is such a resolution necessary The answer is NO Generally a resolut
210. ea Directly new Redraw of an Inverted Mask Depressing the Alt key with any of the mask tools activated will invert the mask function The mask will become kind of a negative mask Now encircle the area with the mask tool you do not want get affected by the correction This function is similar to the invert mask function from the mask menu 170 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction SilverFast Manual Changing Masks On layer four we switch from the cur rent mask Arm to mask Hat lt Ha mask lt New mask Change masks zinvertz x Delete Body v Hat Mak 1 armi car reght flawer Mew mask j Change mask gt zinvertz x Moy x Delete 2 Body Hat Mask 1 arm car reght flawer Changing a Mask The menu Masks shows all previously created masks Masks can be created and deleted here The mask currently active is highlighted by a check mark before the mask name Changing from one mask to another is accomplished by clicking onto the masks name The dialogue is closed and the preview window will be updated Merk x nask kurt awi HENE Coen lie t kerl n E Decr Dene E I cM des maux Chee mask i Lieto aza lalale Tix Tae Bowe Olu Pea ar Hat Ferat biret Hi Mink Musk ar kid r BEES EEE lr xer H mn 1 amp a h 6 s amp ES amp aT 78 at 7u E i i ro ow e 4 e d ji LT y f du S MN lace C ren nnn Kil Ak R ja
211. ease selecta m r umiar area intense moire ilk d p Preview Y detect screen Desureeniog Parameters tren lt 4 torn gt EI 128 use Unsharp Masking Epei Cancel SilverFast Manual 6 3 Descreening 207 If the result is satisfactory the dialogue may be closed by clicking the OK button which closes the window Descreened If any artifacts can be found in the Descreening not Descreened LE d d 4 After window a different screen may be entered Alternatively the field intense moir may be acti vated This makes sense while descreening a rough raster with small screen widths The After image is generated immediately after altering any numerical values The intense descreening needs ES notably more system resources and G a Sa is hence more time intensive 4 M intense moir Elix amp Preview M detect screen d eters Screen Custom B iz I pi Due to the low monitor resolution of the large preview window the effect of the descreening cannot be simulated by SilverFast Only once the final scan has been launched will the parameters for de screening be calculated into the scan lt is however still possible to get an idea of the quality of the final scan prior to performing it the dialogue window of the Studio and Plus versions may be scaled Simply drag it open by click dragging the lower right edge of the window By pressing the Shift
212. ection 1 9 fo S 2 sv i ER K 1 i n oUm x a T T EU Adding Layers Starting with the original top left layer up to four layers can be created and colour corrected On layers two to four masks have been applied in order to colour correct single items of the costume Creating new Layers A new layer is created by clicking onto the layer button Up to four layers can be created Each new layer will start with default set tings but will build upon the underlying layer In case as shown in the example below red is turned into blue on the first layer the second layer will not show red as red but as blue since it has been changed in the first layer ic lali mte T e E t E LI a S a F E KE ni _ ri a eles ma Code Cae recte a i e i i i 1 RN K C k Iz Tune PH dE Daily Pra uan ET ael rail Imm al mec as ENS um ev j m E Eo lS 7 Vos s amp I e w F wq EEE zam A uj Soe All settings within one layer are somewhat independent but always built on the underlying layers with reference to its results For this reason it is vital to understand the difference of the functions Moving layers and Changing layers 176 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction SilverFast Manual Turning Layers over Starting with the original layer all lay e
213. ective owners SilverFast Ai is a protected trademark of LaserSoftlmaging AG Germany The SilverFast Ai software was developed by Karl Heinz Zahorsky Nils Heidorn Eric Flyvbjerg Dr Martin M nier Ralf Magnussen Hon Pokriefke Thomas Belli Martina Steidele and Nick D Amato Manual written by Karl Heinz Zahorsky and Gerhard Wolff Editing by Gerhard Wolff All photographs by Karl Heinz Zahorsky Patents EP 1594301 EP 1744278 1997 2010 SilverFast Manual 1 Introduction 3 SilverFast amp Software License Agreement Please do not open the software package or use this software until you have read and agreed to the terms and conditions of this software license agreement If you cannot accept these terms and conditions please leave the software in its original packaging untouched and send it back to LaserSoft Imaging AG immediately SilverFast is a software package comprised of software and a user manual which is used for generating scans for the subsequent production of colour separations and printing of images LaserSoftImaging AG LS Imaging has developed SilverFast and owns all rights of it 1 Copyright 1 The user and licensee acknowledges that the copyright of the software in both source and object code form is owned by LaserSoft Imaging AG 2 Manual and other documentation are protected by copyright Illegal usage also of the images of the manual will cause claim for damages 2 License 1 LaserSoft Imag
214. ed templates in order to place numerous imag es in certain adjustments or alignments on numerous pages very Quick and very easy As a matter of course one can create their own templates This is where PrinTao creates many opportunities for creativity Any image can be placed anywhere on the print page document All parameters for the modification of templates as well as creating your own templates can be applied in the lower area New Template from Page New Template from Page This is for creating image frame templates in three easy steps 1 Create your own print page document Include image frames according the desired layout crop or place randomly Then switch to the Templates tab 2 By clicking the button for New template from page a small save dialogue will pop open for naming and saving the new template Enter a name By clicking OK the template will be included under the list of user defined templates 3 Open a new print page document and activate your own template by clicking the new entry under the template list The placed frames will appear instantly in the chosen sizes A 1 aum Hamm rn Ni __ Prnho ll Fz day nibum Cancel Y gt OK SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 319 Delete Template Will delete the selected template from the list Create Layouts Generate L 2 Efa The number of images per template can be entered here X Y Images The xvalue
215. ed with numbers 1 to As file format you can choose between TIFF JPEG and EPSP SilverFast Manual 4 Prescan concept 87 Import Delete JM e Frame Set Name new frame setting Frame 8715 M H r Cancel p f Zar 35mm Slides Frame 5et wv 4x5 Import Delete ELCHE Saving and Loading several Scan Frames as one Setting SilverFast allows to save a whole set of all scan frames on the prescan with all its individual settings and reload them a any time This function is of special significance for flat bed or large format scanners The function saves all settings including scan frame position scan mod highlight shadow values gradation curves scaling and resolution This way you can quickly allocate settings to repeatedly upcom ing tasks e g several framed 35 mm slides and also set up the required processing In order to save a set of scan frames with their settings go to Settings under the General Panel and input an appropriate name In case this name does already exist Caution he ch is al i s you will be asked whether you want hesen name ts already in use to overwrite replace that name Replace f Cancel Delete Resources In order to delete a settings go to Delete under the same menu You onm Slides will get a list of all existing settings i Select the settings you would like to delete and click
216. el Lelsleb Clicking onto the small zoom button switches back to the image orientation window to show the degree of rotation flipping By clicking onto the small up headed triangle the image will be rotated 90 clockwise during scanning the triangle turns red and points to the right Each click on the rotation icon will rotate the image another 90 clockwise In order to rotate counter clockwise hold the Shift key and click on the rotation tool triangle SilverFast Manual 2 Overview AT 48 2 Overview SilverFast Manual i 0 EM OQ 3 Presets This chapter explains the various options and presets you can use with SilverFast Before you do a scan please check important options such as setting the highlight shadow presets for the auto adjust 3 Presets 50 SilverFast Preferences Prefs o1 Units of Measurement cm inch Pica Point Pixel 52 Options Dialogue 53 General Defaults 53 Auto Defaults 529 CMS Colour Management Settings 62 Special Defaults 65 Adjusting Scan Parameters 69 General Palette 69 Frame Palette 1 Size Adjustments Scaling 76 Scan Resolution for Scaled Images d Uneven Scaling of Images te Proportional Scaling 78 Pixel Lock 79 Drag amp Drop 80 Switching Scanners 80 50 3 Presets MSt K3 E WebOpti indd 190606 SilverFast Manual eoe Programs Ce ss EB n View Path Computer 69 items 1 58 GB av
217. eler for overview Cache Celie for album Cache Delete for album for the overview for the album Cache Dai re all Cache Clete all With help of the the context menu Macintosh Ctrl click Windows right mouse button images may be deleted too Seletti all Sore l j pure hort iy sive uat by date Snap rumbrnalls t grid Select all Context menu for the overview for the album By the drag and drop function entire albums may be pulled to the trash Deleting the Cache Memory The cache memory saves temporary files as Digi lalis s well as help files from the RAW data conversion vei This cache memory may be directly deleted by the popup menu Delete The path for saving and the cache size may be dee AMA DRE entered in the main menu of SilverFast DCPro General palette Options Special palette Album Delete all Alburn Delpte marked Cache Delete for overview SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 285 Optimizing Images Direct Optimization in SilverFast Main Dialogue By double clicking an image in the overview or album window it is directly passed on into the SilverFast preview window Double clicking on an unconverted RAW data file only possible in SilverFast DCPro will commence the conversion The progress is displayed in the window Tierart Pri ILLE ELI IE T converting Image EL m Ez a m zn 2 El m ee emi mm mai ma e an a
218. ellow framed tile represents the image in the high reso lution preview window The yellow framed tile can be freely moved to any position inside the Navigator window while the high res window will be updated accordingly By clicking into a red framed tile the image selection related will be displayed inside the high res window The selected tile will then become yellow framed There are three Monitor modes available which can be acti vated by clicking the appropriate button a Original image without correction b Corrected image artifacts eliminated c Original image with artifacts highlighted in red 3 06 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD SilverFast Manual Monitor modes a Original view Preview f Auto Cancel C ox X G San RGB_ gt Qui In modes b and c you can temporarily switch into mode a original view by clicking into the high res preview window Keeping the mouse depressed will show mode a original Heleasing the mouse the display will show b or c L Li H d T g LI b Corrected view c Artifacts highlighted In case the result is satisfactory the SRD dialogue can be closed with OK and the scan can be started from the Silver Fast main dialogue If it is not further use needs to be made of the manual mask and layer technology Activate Deactivate Real Time Correction Clicking onto the blue red arrow will activate or deactivate the SilverFast SRD real time co
219. els is displayed below the magnifier window Reading thumbnails for album ee The thumbnails are saved in the cache of the file SFthumbs The cache may be emptied by the context menu at any time When using read only files on DVD or CD no thumbnails are generated as they cannot be saved on the medium 266 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Navigator Album for RAW conversion EE i Wa Yar Wu Su Album f r Konvertierung Autos Flugzeuge Nikon coolpix Nikon NEF RAW 230603 kur u Ba E HEC EZ HELL UR 1 I a fi E u NA Sans nom 1 Sans noam Z 1 1 hk i el Senza Titolo 1 Senza Titolo 2 Transport Unbenannt 1 Urlaub Urlaub 2002 a I Bi i Tl R ka Hm T 1 i Navigator ie nur Ubersicht nur Album bersicht amp Album Ubersicht amp Preview in Album Album amp Preview in bersicht Benutzerdefiniert Album128 Exif Album Palette The images are managed in the album palette and the respective album window Any desired number of individual albums may be created The contents of the album are displayed in the VL T window and can be processed there New albums are created as an empty directory in the Images folder located in the sub directory SilverFast V Albums By dragging images from the overview window from the navigator or from the desktop into the album window cop
220. en allows another size adjustment mz m j size AT By the Preview mode Colour option the back ground colour of the monitor may be selected White Black Custom By clicking the button PrinTao Contact sheet overview the contents of the overview window may be prin ted like a contact sheet The adoption of the image sizes is done automatically Contact sheet of Overview PrinTao The header of the contact sheet includes the path hal and the page numbers 2 0 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Windows Desktop user data user Images SilverFast Albums Export album Unload removable media bi Export Albums The images of any album as well as all set parameters may be saved by clicking the Export Album button By default the albums are saved in the Images folder of the registered user in the sub directory SilverFast Albums Mac OS X Choate Folder J Pictures d j Applications a I i t HB Desktop i i T Dexumsnti B Library m Movies Music lad Pichures Ew Xl P b IE From E New Folder Add to Favoriter Go to F Save all files 5 Save anly marked files Unloading Camera Storage Media SilverFast allows reading and copying of data from a camera or for example flash cards directly on to the hard disk During this proc ess predefined IPTC information of the images may be entered Th
221. ening 3 GANE 3 211 USM 3 199 FireWire 21 80 Fixing width and height 76 Flash cards 271 Flip 47 282 Focus 41 249 Auto Focus 250 Focus preview 251 Focussing the Scanner 249 Focus switch 249 Manual Focus 250 Manual focus with preview 251 FOGRA 298 Frame deletion 42 Frame Inset 61 Frame number 86 94 Frame number indicator 42 Frame palette 39 Frame sets O Frames on Prescan 85 Full screen preview 66 G Gamma gradation 55 Gamma Gradation for HDR Output 55 Gamut Expected in 48bit HDR 55 Gamut 196 Gamut Warning 196 GANE Grain and Noise Elimination 211 Activating GANE 212 Before After preview 211 Expert Mode 213 Intensity 213 Threshold 213 General palette 39 69 Global colour correction 108 155 Gold tones 74 Gradation 108 147 155 Adjusting gradation curves 149 By entering values into the input fields 149 By loading saved gradation curves 149 By moving the curve points 149 By using the sliders 149 Colour channels 150 464 7 4 Index SilverFast Manual Comparison of the different gradation dialogues 111 Deactivating gradation curve points 151 Deleting a gradation curve 150 Extended gradation curves 153 Gradation curves 147 Hottrack gradation 152 Loading Photoshop gradation curves 153 Range selection 156 Reset 156 Resetting deactivated curve points 151 Saving a gradation curve 150 Selecting gradation curves 153 Grain and Noise Removal 21 1 Green dot 277 Greyscale 444 447 Grid frames 326
222. ep enlargement of the view with each click In the second example 2nd image left a double click has been done and the zoom has increased from 5596 to 10096 in two steps The value of the current zoom is displayed on the lower left of the preview window The maximum zoom value is 20096 Simultaneously a new palette Naviga Mass SENE tor is added to the Image Settings Saad Advanced MNA window The entire image is shown here The smaller red frame shows the current position of the window on the image The current view can be changed by Picture Settings dragging the red frames 3rd illustra SLIL _ _ Z S tion left or by clicking the mouse 4th illustration left The large preview window changes accordingly This Zoom by mouse click function is only available in the SilverFast Ai Studio versions if the High resolution Prescan has previously been set to level 2 or higher in the Options General settings menu SilverFast Manual 4 Prescan concept O7 Silrerfast HOR sionis Ru et 4 irum jan rr ase p i Ji Keeping the Ctrl and the Alt keys pressed while clicking the mouse makes the view jump back to the full scale preview The let ter P then appears within the mouse cursor magnifier Zooming by the Zoom Display Popup The value field of the current zoom level also functions as a popup menu By this any of the preset
223. er function in Photoshop This is especially significant with overlap ping mask areas IIl Mi a gt HI dil imei Ef nen ard prach Removal Dele Tera Phan maa Bari Darter wine Se oll 5 e Bala vert pira su NE aer ges Hla wam Back Dle Se Beit Hir mm s Wiper 100 F revin metrana nr usr _ Layer2 Correction of more distinct artifacts with more aggressive setting Remaining artifacts from layer 1 can now one by one with help of masking be eliminated without problems 384 6 13 SilverFast SRD iSRD SilverFast Manual Presets f Carrection Sky lt Delete gt lt Save gt 7 Save Load Settings Clicking onto the Save menu will Save the current settings In the Save dia logue you can input the desired name for your setting In order to delete previously saved set tings highlight the settings you want to delete in the Delete Resources dialogue and click Delete Name of correction Correction Sky f Cancel OK Delete Resources Corection Sky 4 Delete f Leave SilverFast Manual 6 18 SilverFastSRD iSRD 385 DET i ir ee moi gt BI a i 0 M B baa amd Sir ach Kern ab Delect Tyee Ghan wane aun Delect side rja arae Erardr mant dir wj ja C Longish scrabch memenall Deit ope oss
224. er you have set the Auto Adjust or set manually the darkest brightest point you can enlarge the scan frame SFprefs Scanner Individual parameters of all scan frames are automatically stored within a SilverFast Prefs file 2 Multiple Frames on Prescan You can create any desired number of scan frames on the pres can image In order to do this move the mouse to the upper left corner of the desired new frame hold the mouse button and drag the mouse to the lower right corner of your desired frame Only one frame is active at a time and the image inside can be changed with Si verFast s tools By clicking inside an image the appropriate frame becomes activated The starting point of a new frame must be outside existing frames The new frame can then be positioned anywhere in the preview resize frame as needed o SilverFast v6 0 1r30 e 9 9 SilverFast FS 4000 SilverFast Ai General Densitometer Scan Type 48 gt 24 Bit H4 Filter None k n Setting Save B Image Type i Standard HJ Name Untitled frame Original Scale Output C 69 1000 73 Wy 69 inch 4 45 1000 la 45 inch O Factor Screen Mbyte 135 157 Ipem 35 30 e EE JI Ra o 9 j lt cs b e e gt L7 n od ASENO 600 dpi j ia Luwa f Scan RGB f _Prescar Scan RGB f Quit Multiple scan frames Here any desired number of frames can be drawn on the preview area represe
225. erFast HDR What is a Job A Job Job entry is a collection of settings parameters and ma nipulations which can be used a for an image to be scanned b for an already existing image file or C for complete folders with image files A job or job entry can also be seen as an instruction list from which images image files or image folders can be processed automatically How is JobManager Different from Batch Scanning When using a flatbed or drum scanner the automatic processing of image frame parameters in the preview window will be by batch scan Thus the batch scan is restricted to the preview window of the flatbed or the drum scanner With regard to film scanners the batch scan is defined in a similar way Only now you have the choice of scanning additional images in a filmstrip with the same or with individually modified param eters You can also choose to scan selected images instead of all of them Changing individual settings for subsequent images is generally not possible in a batch scan With SilverFast versions that are independent of scanners such as HDR and DC JM accepts 48 bit raw data from files directories containing RGB image files and disks over the net work etc HGB scans of negative films transparent material and reflective material can be processed simultaneously in any desired se quence 344 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual Overview sas To acti
226. ersions 2 Prescan Scan RGB Quit 6 7 NegaFix Scanning Negatives 1 Optimisation of Negatives Film with Integrated Profiles The negative positive conversion of normally exposed and devel oped negatives using Si verFast s NegaFix can be achieved with a few easy steps Go to the General panel and switch the menu Pos Neg to Negative mode When this occurs the Negative dialogue win dow with NegaFix will appear Film Type and Exposure Negari teens Tim i Other Standard HA xx QO 00 Auto tolerance fl 9 The NegaFix window offers three pop up menus and two sliders The pop up menus are used for the selection of the appropriate characteristics of the negative film a Manufacturer or film brand b Film type or film name C Film speed sensitivity By means of the slider Exposure or the input field the film exposure of the negative can be adjusted within plus minus 3 f stops The slider Auto tolerance allows adjustment of highlight in the automatic Film mask recognition Begin with a prescan in order to obtain an overview of the image The preview will display an uncorrected positive image Please fol low the steps on the following page SilverFast Manual 219 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives Film Type and Exposure M Lad bar aka m Le m 100 Auro tolerance Film and Exposure i Tyne po Mingai
227. erview SilverFast NegaFix can be activated from the General panel by selecting the Negative pop up f lm Type and Expesene Regain SilverFast v6 0 1r28 L xen m moe SilverFast Ai i Or se J J a ASUS Na e Allgemein Rahmen Densitemeter Scanmodus Normal a Original Durchsicht ad Pos Neg Posiliv Y Negativ NegaFix dialogue in SilverFastAi under Macintosh Prescan AGE Beenden Option NegaFix dialogue in SilverFastAi under Windows Overview SilverFastSE The extended functinality of the expert dialogue is only available in the full versions of SilverFastAi SilverFast HDR SilverFast DG a elc In SilverFast SE versions the expert dialogue is not available All film parameter selections can be fully applied NegaFix dialogue in SilverFast SE Finin und Bekch ung under Macintosh m r B Jane NegaFix dialogue in SilverFastSE e under Windows TT SilverFast Manual 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives e C __ Film Type and Exposure Negal j lt Other gt 4 Other n Standard B ef O bara zx inin nz D Q Auto tolerance NegaFix Dialogue Standard dialogue editing of nega tive film contains these controls I Pop up to select film manufacturer Ei Pop up to select film type as Pop up to select film speed n Slider for film exposure contro
228. es In addition you can designate if image auto adjust should be ap plied before the processing of these images job entries The images selected are only visible in the JM window If images without thumbnails are added to the JM a standard icon will be display as done beled x D iuge with the third image here WT CIR uoc a nipi r Arr gen SH DT aed E k bun XE ava DINE EO ME Se HD r i dikar an LL EET WT Tal ES Fie E Tari b m eee mde Ui T k HE E T v Hr Ub LN KE Qutput settings Macintosh HIVI sera gar r Gal Ausg eF att Miri poe E hkeFucnol os TEF DTE Adding All Frames of the Preview Window By clicking on the 2nd button all frames displayed in the preview window will be added to the JM window In the example below 3 frames were displayed Each frame encompasses a different image section and was optimised with dif ferent parameters Each frame enfolds a different name a different display window and contains different parameters for optimization in T jebdlanaoer Jnh ty 1 r 7 x ali hune le Sharpe Ug FEE EI dar CE mih TOC IPIE EE m TENEO 6 m a I deu Br Tor L3 he hanger LPH ESTE det iy QUE ardi E ewe m TOR DIC aD EFI TM pi T HE e url Map Pr amp r AS ODD sc im t E ELE mik TORCER HE ERI TTE di 17 5m HE Er pr Ir lt Cutput seins fens press ilipli dii TEF tart SilverFast Manual 6 12 S
229. es can now each become a different colour Most complex colour corrections can very comfortably be achieved Selective colour correction is one of the most significant func tions of colour reproduction The new selective colour correction increases the correction ability of the user without making the workflow more complicated A single click onto the object the user wants to change and SilverFast recognises its colour Using the controls it is now very easy to change the colour By adding layers and masking objects one colour can now be split into different colours The special function Mask Edge Size under the General panel in the Options dialogue can even define the degree of smooth edges of the masks The user can also define the appearance of the selective colour dialogue The whole colour matrix can be hidden when not need ed by clicking onto the small triangle left of the colour channel indicators n A La ic n ilm c m dil s 1 YEE E xun FH re 5 cens Ch 12 Type 7 CM cw rea rx ieri E Preterm deha a Praec BIK Sae Dan Mode b n m 25 Mik xMomaske fq Mk Hu mak GM Ben kk Qmm HEE REM a 0c i a g B 8 q TT W i ir Lana menn aw n T mna TT Lal f t A Appearance i z i aai su Left CM6 with closed matrix Middle CM6 with open matrix SEED mmie Won Right CM12 SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour corr
230. es have been added to JM or no saved jobs have been loaded First add the image files as individual job entries to JM Each job entry will define the parameters for exactly one scan All job entries within the window will be combined as one job There are Several Ways you can Produce Job Entries There are three buttons in the tool list of the JM window which control the addition of image files to a job lin el The first buttons are used primarily for framed individual images Ct The first two buttons are mainly used for single images that are R already visible in the preview window The third button is used for unframed film strips or complete films Attention Some functions are only found with certain types of scanners SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFast JobManager 347 Selection of images Macintosh 6 38 SHIFT Windows additional single images image sequence all images additional single images image sequence all images Image Overview of Inserted Film Strip Index Scan Click on the third button to get an overview of the inserted film strip contents The window Image overview which may still be empty will open The size of the window i e the number of thumbnails is restricted and depends on the scanner type and the length of the film strips You can print an overview by using the buttons at the top 1st button refresh th
231. es in detail HDR Open Image Opens a see page 255 Open an image with the open button dialogue box which requests the device or folder with the images HDR Overview Opens a see page 255 Open an image with the image overview window dialogue box used for selecting an image from the over view window 290 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 257 SilverFastDCVLT DCPro DCProStudio SilverFast DC versions are especially adapted for use with images that were captured by digital cameras Hence Si verFastDC ver sions are able to directly read most of the common native camera formats An overview of the formats and the version of SilverFast that can read the specific formats can be found in section 6 9 Reading different file formats of the manual The virtual light table called VLT is an excellent tool that com bines the four most important jobs of digital imaging in one win dow Viewing getting an overview and searching Sort look over and organizing e Processing and optimizing of images Printing of contact sheets and single images If the interaction of camera and computer functions properly the images may be taken directly from the digital camera by the VL T for further processing When launching SilverFast DC the VLT will open By clicking these buttons the user may switch between the VLT and the Silver
232. es will be saved under the ASA ISO pop up menu list and can be reused at any time SilverFast Manual 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives 231 4 DIGITAL ICE technologies used with Kodachrome and b w films The much implemented scratch and dust removal solution Z N DIGITAL ICE technologies which is hardware implemented in many different scanners does not operate properly with Kodachrome and conventional b w films for both negatives and slides Because of the tanning that occurs while developing the film a structure is generated on the film which gives different calculation indices in the different layers of the film This and the high percent age of silver in these films may lead to unsatisfying scan results It is hence advisable to deactivate the DIGITAL ICE technologies for such films The SRD function implemented in SilverFast works fine with all types of film 232 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives SilverFast Manual o SilverFast v6 0 1r43 SilverFast Ai oil Ob as e 292 7 Densitometer Device USB EPSON E Scan Mode Normal H j Original Reflective Pos Neg Positive Frame Set Options y 2 fPrescan f Scan RGB Quit ee d k kred ks uc ufa I I I F lm Type and Ekp iar Hemis l Uher d B inher E m esanari cz Or lal Auro pole ran jeee 5 Reference Card SilverFast NegaFix Ov
233. escan Cons aA llis Double zoom prescan __ e e meyen me T T ay leise den Was die be iden Zellen nutzi Uu all Ro rel 216 6 5 1 Bit SilverFast Manual J L p ri F n ri mn A ri m ri ZAN Attention This function is hardware dependant and is only available for some scan ners Multisampling is done by software and is available for all SilverFast iStu dio und SilverFastSEPlus Versions 6 6 Multiple Sampling Multiple sampling can be applied for some scanners that show a visible strong noise in the shadow areas in order to eliminate the artefacts From Version 641r6 onwards SilverFastAi Studio and SilverFast SE Plus allows any scanner that runs with SilverFast to perform the multi sampling function This also includes scanners that were not initially meant to support this function This does not work with scanners having weak positioning behav iour Frankly speaking most scanners are mechanically not precise enough and overlaying several scans for noise reduction would result in unsharp out of focus scans Therefore we had to devel op a special process that would eliminate the lack of mechanical precision between the sampling scans This process is called Multi Sampling with Auto Alignment The result is sharp scans with the noise artefacts eliminated or signifi cant reduced depending on the number of samples 4 8 or 16 Now in principle ever
234. escan Design Zooming in the Prescan Zooming in SilverFastAi and SE Zooming in SilverFast High Resolution Prescan Zoom and Difficult Corrections Editing a Zoomed Prescan scanner with Different Optical Resolutions 82 83 83 83 84 95 95 97 100 101 102 103 82 4 Prescan concept MSt K4 E WebOpti indd 2010 02 08 14 45 SilverFast Manual SilverFast Prescan Concept An entirely new prescan concept was developed with SilverFast It allows you to make all necessary corrections on the prescan All parameters for the individual scan frames are retained Realtime Processing otarting with version 5 by SilverFast all image corrections such as gradation global and selective colour corrections which the user would like to use by inputting or slider are presented in Prescan in realtime This is of particular advantage in colour processing tonal values and gradation correction The Prescan Concept Advantage It is very important to understand the prescan design concept because especially with a scanner you want to take full advantage of the internal capabilities of your scanner For this reason it is vital to control all quality factors based on what you see and measure on the prescan oince the prescan is fast and is only a low resolution image of the final scan all operations are realtime so that you get an immediate response from what you are doing to your image Another advantage is that everything
235. ese images can also be renamed automatically Workflow for Unloading e Launch SilverFastDC HDR and the VLT e Attach camera or card reader observing the security regula tions for these e Ifthe camera or medium is detected the Import dialogue Unload images appears Unload image media Please select a medium which you want to import into one of your albums Input Path NO NAME DCIM 100NIKON FS Transformation Renaming Rename files during import P s l Include PTC during import f Output f Albums Unload folder GW r _ Path Close Import New album vi Show this dialog when new media is inserted SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR zr Input kw he detected storage mediums are LEXAR_MEDIA DCIM 100NIKON No NAMES Loon E displayed under Input Path If V NO NAMEDCIM TOONIKON more than one medium is found please choose the correct one Transformation Renaming Rename files during import IPTC include WTC during import WB e The field Transformation describes how images are to be treated when importing The menu Renaming allows complex changes of file names of single or all imported images The menu IPTC offers additional link to IPTC information of the imported images Output Albums Unload folder GW e The destination of the imported images can be set under the Output dialogue By clicking New album a new and e
236. etermined where in the colour management work flow Scanner Reflective Scanner RGB Profile icc HE which profiles WIII be used Internal Adobe RGB 1998 EX ow Gener Gray mme H o Inbut SilverFastDC HDR Output Printer Menge foret paene M ColorSync profile for the input device e g the digital camera Scanner Reflective SilverFastAi SE ColorSync profile for the reflective unit of the scanner e Scanner Transparency SilverFastAi SE ColorSync profile for the transparency unit of the scanner e Internal ColorSync profile for the internal colour space Profiles for ColorSync Grey Here you can select a Grey Profile for greyscale scans which can also be embedded into the image file e Output Printer ColorSync profile for the printer Rendering intent oelection of the Rendering Intent perceptional relative colouri metric saturational absolute colourimetric AN Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 63 Embed Profiles Embedded ICC profiles Embed ICC Profiles AUN ST DD This option enables the user to pass the image data to an appli cation which would do automatic matching with the embedded Embedded profile lt NONE gt profile When a TIFF file is generated from SilverFast the ICC pore eee
237. ets By means of the PrinTao Contact sheet of album button the sorted contents of the album window can be printed like a pho tographic contact sheet The adoption of image size number of pages etc is done automatically Each album is to be printed individually Only the page number is printed in the header of the contact sheet ES C3 amp z E EZ EN EX E x 3 M x M Bl HB m di 282 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual IPTC Image Information in the Album Attention This function and the respective button are only available with SilverFast DC Pro By clicking this button the exten IPTC parameters sive IPTC image data may be m viewed and edited for an active f Cancel J image in the album Cantian Writer IPTC means International Press m and Telecommunication Council Headline load Y and includes a standardised col cT C e lection of information data which 222 may be used by the image authors the holders of the image rights as well as image users for database purposes Apart from copyright issues the author may enter further data such as image title date of image keywords etc By means of a database the images may then be searched for specific criteria making specific searches easy and fast IPTC parameters A variety of palettes is available in the Selection qM S Keywords 362 Section Caption M menu Categories 363 Credits 364 Origin 365
238. ew image will receive it after conversion The contents of the cache memory remain until the user active ly deletes it The cache may be deleted directly by means miyaw Dum Bl a i of the popup menu Delete Alfur Dalana all Album Delene marked Cache Dalana for aververe Cache Delete for albam Cah Delete ak 260 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Picture Settings f Standard Advanced Exposure 0 00 r a Light source As Shot p Colour Temperature 3950 m 4 oo c a t 2 Settings Save i eo j Camera C3 wu ER mv Darstellung L Camera 10 jeka j SilverFast L9 SilverFast DCPra ra j E on ES Importieren Exportieren e 3 FummnM r Zusatzmadule b L KODAK F Adobe Ph h i E LEICA 2 Adobe Photoshop C4 j i L MINOLTA 8 Applications i e D won 9 Systemplatte t e LJ OLYMPUS ow r b PANASONIC Ss 7004 18 07 E LS PENTAX 01 05 2004 16 07 D soe 1i 05 3004 15 07 Internal RAW Data Conversion Profile for your Camera SilverFastDCPro LaserSoftlmaging has developed special internal RAW data conversion profiles that are can also be installed with the soft ware Note Only if such a profile for your camera has been installed will a third slider Colour tint and the light source pipette appear in the Image settings window If this is missing either no RAW data file was opened or no internal RAW data conver sion profile
239. flow of the Steps in JobManager Keyboard Shortcuts in SilverFastJooManager 305 306 309 310 318 319 323 326 326 331 331 332 335 336 336 337 338 338 339 339 339 343 343 345 346 346 347 347 347 348 348 349 350 350 351 357 358 358 359 359 361 362 363 364 367 SilverFast Manual 11 Content 19 6 13 SilverFastSRD Dust and Scratch Removal 369 How does SilverFast Recognise Dust and Scratches and How will they be Eliminated 369 Overview 3 1 Workflow of SilverFastSRD o72 Image Optimization Workflow with SilverFastSRD 3 3 Activate Deactivate Real Time Correction Dr Manual Correction 3 8 Expert Mode 386 Activating the Expert Mode 386 SilverFastiSRD 393 Dust and Scratch Removal with Infrared Technology 393 How does iSRD work 393 Which Films can iSRD be Used With 394 Activating iSRD 394 iSRD Automatic Mode 394 ISRD Manual Mode 395 Using SRD and iSRD Simultaneously Layer Technology 396 Use of Freehand Masks in iSRD 397 Infrared Channel Display 397 6 14 SilverFastAACO Auto Adaptive Contrast Optimization 399 6 15 Clone Tool 6 16 PrinTao Extended Print Dialogue of SilverFastAiStudio Contents of the Extended Print Dialogue PrinTao 401 405 405 405 Differences in the Print Dialogue in SilverFastStudio Versions as Com pared to DC and HDR Versions Image settings in SilverFastAiStudio 7 Colour Management 7 1 Colour Management Introduct
240. flow with film scanners 357 With flat bed scanners 358 With SilverFastHDR DCPro 359 Differences in working with scanners 359 Differences in JobManager between SilverFastH DR DC and SilverFastAi 346 Difference to working with film scanners 358 Error messages 366 How is JobManager different from batch scan ning 344 Image information 346 Job entry 344 347 361 Copying of complete job entries 362 Copying of job entry parameters 361 Deleting job entries 350 Processing job entries 351 Managing complete jobs 363 Mulit job 363 Name of current job 346 Output options 346 Overview 345 Processing time example 359 Purpose of the JobManager 343 Save as 363 Tools 346 Unconverted RAW data images 288 What is a Job 344 What is the JobManager 343 Workflow 364 File naming menu 354 Image overview of inserted film strip 348 Index 355 Job status 356 Leaving the processing mode 352 SilverFastNegaFix 70 233 SilverFastPhotoProof 298 299 331 SilverFastSC2G 180 Activating SC2G 180 SilverFast Manual 7 4 Index 4715 Changing a colour image to grey 181 Changing the conversion factors 183 Saving loading deleting SC2G settings 182 SilverFastScanPilot 351 SilverFastSRD 41 369 Acministration of layers 3 1 Activate Deactivate realtime correction 377 Activating SilverFastSRD 375 Activation of SilverFast dust and scratch removal 371 Auto 3 5 Continuity 387 392 Contrast 387 391 Control
241. for highlights and shadows in the histogram The range between highlight and shadow points set will be pro jected to Min and Max values for the final scan and should the situation arise be compressed Movable Triangles and Value Fields Colour Space Compression Colour Space Compression triangles position represent the abso lute values 096 and 10096 in the histogram For the final scan the whole range of the histogram will be pro jected into the colour space range marked by the two triangles and will be compressed accordingly Final Result The visible tonal range in the histogram occurring before the white point O to 996 and after the black point 88 to 10096 will become 12 to 2296 resp 59 to 69 after the colour space compression Tonal values between white and black point 9 to 8896 will be projected to Min and Max values 22 to 59 Pressing the Alt key will simulate the final scan histogram already here mm cL Mn RE Dhani TT R T F ar al eder y pe Resulting histogram Mee 24 14g P rstunlik Ph bham Tr Carba awek In Photoshop 142 5 3 Histogram SilverFast Manual Histogram Bz od Color Space Compression 100 Highlight L fo Shadow 91 Min o gt a Color Space Compression Max 98 a 100 Example for Colour Space Compression After doing a prescan height and shadow point are manually set with the highlight
242. g within an image moves the entire image ner alters the image size pro i portionally if the Cut image button is deactivated i e i fit appears grey 308 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual 3 Attention This function is available in the Pro and Studio Versions only and operate only under Mac OS 10 3 1 or newer Control buttons By means of the navigation buttons left of the print window rotat ing inverting etc Is possible Add The images selected and marked are passed on to the print ing window Delete The selected images are removed from the printout Clears the selected picture frame Stacking sequence upwards in the printing area marked pictures are shifted upward one level in the stacking sequence Stacking sequence downwards in the printing area marked pic tures are shifted downward one level in the stacking sequence Rotate The selected image is rotated in 90 stepps The dot at the circle shows the orientation Reflect vertically The active image is reflected vertically in the print window Reflect horizontally The active image is reflected horizontally in the print window Centre on page Places the image centrally in the printout Adapt to page size he active image is proportionally adapted to the printing area Cut image If this mode is activated the are of the image can be selected manually by click dragging the mouse If this
243. gged directly on to the print page of PrinTao i After choosing the image directory and selecting the images that are to be printed these images are passed on to the print page and arranged there The next paragraph describes the procedure for printing single images SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 301 Print Single Image Z VLT Album all files By means of the navigator popup menu an image directory an VLT Album selected files album or the overview of the VLT may be chosen The images are VLT Overview all files i i i VLT Overview selected files displayed in the dialogue window Select an image by a mouse click in the image list and enter the values fort he desired printing size in the Layout here 15x8cm The dimensions of each individual image can be changed after placement on the print page document by changing the image settings X Y numerically The actual output resolution is symbolized by the rainbow gradient coloured slider underneath the size input box The values itself are displayed in the input box next to the slider The image file features a ready to print resolution if the handle of the slider is within the yellow or better green area of the slider By clicking the Add button the image will be gt passed on to the printer and automatically be placed in the upper left corner of the printing sheet by SilverFast If you want to change the placing or the size this c
244. gue window The image point you have clicked onto will be monitored as a small point in the HSL colour space and the tonal values will be indicated as vertical lines in the film gradation window Again the markings in the HSL dialogue represent controls which can easily be moved with the mouse For more subtle control zoom buttons can be clicked to zoom in and out of the colour space All changes of all controls will immediately be displayed in the SilverFast preview window Neutralizing a colour cast is achieved by dragging a point in the HSL dialogue down to the neutral grey axis 230 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives SilverFast Manual Producing a Colour Cast Deliberately Naturally any point within the HSL colour space can be moved to any other colour This will produce a colour cast With many images pure neutrality will look unnatural Think about pictures of a sunset E j A warm reddish colour cast is surely desired versus a cold neut ral rendering ka ee Image with Image with yel neutral grey lowish grey Saving Changes as a New Profile Once all changes are done and the preview window shows the de sired results the updated settings can be saved as a new profile Clicking the Save button will save all parameters in the current profile Of course the previous profile will be overwritten It is safer to use the option Save as Here you can give the profile a new name New profil
245. h Print Page Zoom via Keybord Shortcuts Zooming can be done in 10 steps by using the keybord short cuts All images need to be deselected prior to the zooming Command plus enlargement by 10 Command minus reduction by 10 SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 323 Scaling Images on a Print Page image Properties Every single image of a print page can be scaled as a whole thus F X XJY 75 150 93 em TI I s including it s frame The inputbox mage settings displays the scal e 2505 T ing value in percentage as well as the X Y size of the image Slider The coloured slider can X X Y 75 change the size of an image infinitely variable by dragging the handle Caution is necessary if the slider is moved into the red range The resolution of the image does not suffice for a high fidelity print e Keybord shortcuts Image frames can be scaled step by step by keyboard short cuts Command plus will enlarge the whole image frame by 10 Command minus will decrease the whole image frame by 10 Command Shift plus will enlarge the whole image frame by 1 Command Shift minus will decrease the whole image frame by 196 eee a qar Finke B Shrine B ML rine B WXY 925 WKY 55 WXY 75 Clicking and dragging Clicking and dragging the edge or a corner of an image frame with the mouse will a
246. h motifs of flat bright or dark background It is also worth using it for scanning texts and graph ics on coloured grounding see following example SilverFast Manual 5 1 Image auto adjust 121 befits 3 Ann alteration factor of 50 effects a defined skip of the position of m ew memos highlight and shadow triangle within the histogram Starting from prices i e the first columns near the margins of the histogram 50 RGB steps TIRE are skipped Hence each alteration in steps is an absolute move Ud e Pare inea winin ment of the triangles Wed dam E quest Using the CMY mode see picture below 50 RGB steps are Hi rr to j Beton um by Adi Ze skipped too dace kere gav r oy Ker enis a The example shows that highlight and shadow triangle are shifted KERE RENG Da identically red arrows are of equal length Using Levels emphasises the text from the background clearly LET Defaults If the boxes Levels are not marked the adjustment will just effect cms Special a relative change of the triangle position The alteration factor is he muestra Cines then related to the quantity of pixels within the edge areas of the Aut Threshold ihasta B a Level histogram If the marginal columns are high and contains a big amount of pix els the alteration factor of D0 effects a relatively small movement of the triangle short red arrow for highlights compared to a long shift fo
247. hadow Pnt Highlight Pnt Shadow Middle Highlight gt f Cancel M 16 32 57 82 91 Grey channel 188 5 8 Expert dialogue SilverFast Manual Expert Dialog d ru o m i Ez W Tu Gr 7 A jo a a a 13 11 n ao a 12 mes FF w a cok 4d Te T aa x TE sA 15 Dim 435 I H ET l00 X ME a a TH Kange Max 100 oo 100 100 Range Min o o o je Shad dev Pril thn tht Lira iit Highlight Pn 6 harto a f Mitdis C a Highlight L a 3 ae I SF Statistic txt Example file Exporting the Image Parameters as a Text File All set parameters for image optimisation are exportable into text files by SilverFast This allows independent archiving of important parameters i e especially in regard to critical scans It also allows for an easier exchange of adjustment values between different operating sys tems In order to export previously selected optimising parameters simply click on the text icon located in the vertical icon opening on the left side of the prescan window A dialogue appears which allows you to choose the save position of the text file By mee ae clicking Save the dialogue is closed and xs the parameter file is generated 2 rena rule a b Skea Xalk n B ro a Priis PPP Bmw Falla Bcd so Fme l p 2e j gt Toma abg pror ep ees da rra Baf rer na Ji Rin l Li k man eeu
248. have noticed that where the highlight is set to 0 the highlight details got lost that is to say there are no fine details vis ible any more In order to prevent this from happening SilverFast enables to change highlight and shadow offset in the Options Auto dialogue Here you can enter values between 0 and 10 for the M highlight and 90 to 100 for the shadows a rd For the highlight offset a setting of 6 means that 5 696 remains within the highlight This means that where you place your highlight point 5 696 of the halftone dots remain Likewise in the shadows the density must be set at less than 10096 In the following example this is shown more clearly the details in the highlight are preserved see Mi m uD J Jl JL SilverFast Manual 5 2 Pipette 129 Preserving a Colour Cast with the Highlight Shadow Tool You probably have noticed that colour cast removal is related to the highlight shadow setting If you desire to preserve the colour cast press the Shift key while setting highlights or shadows and the colour cast will not be removed Preserving Specular Highlights opecular highlights are reflections of light on sparkling surfaces like glass jewellery etc Specular highlights shouldn t have print able dots so that the image maintains brilliancy In order to keep those specular highlights under Option Auto set Highlight Offset to O or fix a densitometer point wi
249. he Colour Matrix The small triangles indicate the presets in the colour matrix For each single colour several corrections can be made In order to delete a preset from the list keep the Alt key PC Shift key pressed down while dragging the mouse over it Helease the mouse button and the preset is removed Presets for Controls and Matrix Combinations Presets Save n Using the button Save in the dialogue window you can save cor rection combinations of matrix presets and slider positions under the pull down menu for the active layer SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 165 Working with Colour Correction Presets Open the selective colour correction dialogue and click onto the preset symbol in RED You will see a pull down menu with red presets Choose a cor rection and release the mouse button v Sees he respective values will L JE JE E JL lI now be entered into the col our matrix automatically Red Magenta 4 Red stronger e eO PF Red_duller s Red warmer Red brighter Red Magenta Red weaker mczmEx U NES 43 By the same method each of the six correc tion colours can be loaded 30 31 B 1 If In order to delete a preset from the list keep the Alt key PC Shift key pressed while dragging the mouse over it Release the mouse button and the preset i
250. he completion of the last step the scan frame will be scanned into the imaging application All running processes can be halted at any time in order to allow manual intervention with the help of the tools in Si verFast s main dialogue SilverFast Manual 5 Tools 111 E ES TT The Concept of Optimising Images When optimising scanned images using the tools in the correct order significantly influences the results that can be obtained and leads to the optimal output quality 1 3 4 Basic Choice of White Black Point and Colour Correction The black white points and colour correction can be set manually or by using the auto adjust function Optimising Gradation If necessary further individual optimising of the image with gradation curves midtone and contrast is possible Global Colour and or Selective Colour Correction If necessary individual colours can be corrected by using selective colour correction or the total colour characteristics can be corrected by using global colour correction It is also possible to use an ICC scanner profile for applying colour correction Size Adjustment and Scaling ocale the image and scan frames individually in height and width Retouching Removal of dust and scratches by means of SilverFast SRD and or the clone tool Applying Filters Sharpening Unsharp Masking Descreening GANE Choose according to type of image and scaling the opti
251. he small prescan can be moved by holding down the Shift key only in the zoom mode and click dragging with the mouse cursor CELIE 5x SilverFast Manual 6 2 USM Unsharp masking 201 Liwa har Marking Parameters laiens by am T heri cid i TT Wl Mase low Ji Zinal pz Pear cfs jas E j f rame J f ee Se N Ussturp Masking Parame lanai i d l Thepshodd i TEA NE Mort JE i Pinel rE i Pristi S NE Oi Cancel c gm USM Dialogue with Scaleable Prescan In the latest Studio versions of SilverFast the USM dialogue is now fully scalable By this means it is possible to obtain a realistic sharpening preview on a larger part of the image The size of the dialogue box is now resizable by means of a resiz ing button By clicking and dragging the corner button the USM win dow can be expanded up to the entire monitor size Initially the contents of the prescan window are only enlarged by pixel enlargement the same effect as press ing the button The real expansion of the visible area is achieved by keep ing the Shift button pressed while clicking the Prescan button i e it functions like an Update button Ref Illus tration lower left Hesizing the window pre serves the captured part of the image Ref Illustration lower right Shannen QISM Mare 3x 3 Pixel x Fresebu Save Hel Cam Af OK 4 202 6 3 Descreening Silve
252. her colour Space Ctrl Click on Right mouse button Click on Scan Process button Scan Process button Zoom Ctrl Click amp Drag Ctrl Click amp Drag Image frames Duplicate frame 6 eee ee Alt Click amp Drag Alt Click amp Drag Entire Window in one frame Command A Ctrl A Delete frame extended keyboard Delete 0 cee eee Delete Delete frame normal keyboard Alt Backspace Delete Frame reset 0 cee eee Reset button 0 Reset button Copy settings of one frame Alt Click on active frame Alt Click into inactive into an other frame click then into target frame target frame 454 7 3 Addendum SilverFast Manual Action Macintosh Windows Auto adjust Resetting auto adjust Alt click on C y Alt Click on Auto adjust button Auto adjust button Highlight shadow midtone tool HSM tool oet highlight 0 0 0 c ee eee Click on white triangle of HSM tool Set midtone uv vacui Lauro ucc e t es Click on pipette of HSM tool Set shadOW e qoe aic irc ye ic Click on black triangle of HSM tool Multiple attempts with pipette Hold down pipette for multiple hold down Alt hold down Alt attempts only highlight shadow Reset highlight shadow Alt Pippette of HSM tool Display brightest point 4 Click on white square
253. his operates like a filter By this the highlight noise within the luminance channel of the image can be corrected The filter thus only affects the luminance The L chan nel in the Lab colour space and not the colours Colour distortion reduction This is a filter that corrects the noise in the colour channels a b channel of the image Settings Saves parameters for RAW conversion for reloading Realtime Histogram At the lower edge a result histogram of the current picture frame is indicated to the standard dialogue The display reacts in realtime In contrast to the normal histogram dialogue the picture settings dialogue shows the final or result histogram Thus the histogram of the resulting picture after the conversion in SilverFast DC All parameters applied in SilverFast are thus already contained herein In the normal histogram dia logue however the source or input histogram is shown which displays the picture before the editing with S lverFast DC Only If one presses the Alt key in the normal histogram dialogue the goal histogram is indicated there also SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 203 Printing Directly out of the Prescan Window In SilverFast DC version 6 it is possible to pass on the contents of the active image frame in the preview window directly to a connect ed printer Hence it is unnecessary to save and reload the image in an imaging software for a quick printout
254. i Embedded ICC profiles Saturation Prior to this SilverFast has utilized the Rendering Intent which was Embed ICC profile abs colorimetric preset in the profile thus generally Perceptual Match Instead of this default setting one of the three other Rendering Intents supported by ColorSync ICM such as relative colouri metric saturation and absolute colourimetric can be chosen In comparison the effect when choosing absolute aolourimetric appears to be the most similar to prior behaviour because of the differences of the Media white points that appear here Image data which has been produced from computer graphics or from renderings might require adaption of the Rendering Intent Rendering Intents 1 Perceptual Helative colourimetry is used A reproduction which provides a x perceptual perceptual or pleasing appearance This general means both rel colorimetric in and out of gamut colours are modified from their colourimetric saturation representation abs colorimetric Example usage would be for scanned images SilverFast Manual 71 Addendum 423 4 perceptual rel colorimetric saturation abs colorimetric di x perceptual rel colorimetric saturation x perceptual rel colorimetric saturation abs colorimetric 2 Relative Colourimetric Helative colourimetry is used For reflection print this mean
255. i in the raw data scan mode are D output correction and output resolution All other software tools will become unavailable as soon as the Image Mode is set to raw data scan mode Scan Type EPSP ey In addition to the pure raw data ei NE A 14 78 Bit Grayscale output SilverFast version 5 5 2 and ieee a higher features the high bit colour corrected output In this 16 Bit Grayscale mode all image correction tools remain available The corre 48 Bit HDR Color sponding selections are 48 bit colour and 16 bit greyscale 16 Bit HDR Grayscale For more information about the advantages of high bit data please refer to chapter Meaning and purpose of the JobManager AN Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software 2 3 Presets SilverFast Manual e Filter Filter v Nana Depending on scanner type and require None More Auto Sharpen ments you can choose between different lev es ria Sharpen els of Unsharp Masking Sharpness None USM amp Descreening uto Sharpen T amp T GANE Less Auta Sharpen Less Auto and More Less Auto Sharpen Or you can directly bring up the USM dialogue In addition you I auae can select descreening or USM Descreening or GANE Descreening USM amp Descreening NOTE Only one fi
256. i CMYK B at 72 dpi RGB Typical time requirement Min prescan zoom each 30 sec 1 optimising 2 USM prescan 0 5 Batch scan A 1 and B 3 min 4 L 7 5 x 72 slides yy 540 min 9 hours Time requirement with JM Min raw data each 4 min 4 prescan zoom each 2 sec 0 033 optimising 2 USM prescan 1 sec 0 0167 rendering A 5 sec B 40sec 0 75 6 8 x 72 slides yy 489 6 min Less machine times Min for raw scans 72 x 4 min 30 min 258 for rendering 72 x 45 sec 1min 55 gt 313 yyy 176 6 YYY lt 3 hours processing time saved 6 hours The JobManager with SilverFastHDR DCPro Differences in Working with Scanners The JobManager provides the greatest advantage when used with the scanner independent plug in Si verFast HDR DCPro In combination with these plug in the user will find the greatest potential for saving time Normally image files are digitalized in one step with a scanner The user sits at a workstation with a computer and a scanner and opti mizes the images gradation histogram colour correction sharp ening etc and the final scans for each picture one at a time If the volume of images is high and maximum image quality is desired itis atime and cost intensive procedure The time required for the hardware in order to carry out prescans fine scans and saving the files is dead wasted time for the user In today s fast workflows it is considered unaccepta
257. ialogue will appear You can delete the job entry delete Cour fd e BL ABER all job entries or determine the loca tion of the missing file U ptcsr Delete deletes the aisockibed job entry Delate Al deletes all jp anz la wit mie Mew Sench allres you to specihy the meva Tile lacacion __ Deiebe a Search Deki Ali C i Cancel You can search for the job entry and assign it by means of an ad ditional window Choose a File After the new relocation you can trans pue pet 2 i Li Appbcamena Anabar User Dara fer the path change to the job entry or CETT ML to all respective job entries zen A inc Add 10 Favorites cence 366 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual Keyboard Shortcuts in SilverFastJobManager Macintosh oelecting images in the JobManager image overview add additional individual images Command click lt a sequence of images Shift click SHIFT all images Ctrl A 38 4 Windows oelecting images in the JobManager image overview add additional individual images Ctrl click CTRL a sequence of images Shift click SHIET all images Ctrl A CRI A SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFast JobManager 36 7 368 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual iSRD LaserSoft Imaging Description of the special functions of iSRD can be found on page 389 6 13 SilverFastSRD Dust and
258. id api ini ET m pes s 4 i Lass GA Beccary ies quif u Ew E beui imal iir T H BRE feel bibr iud Creer image Prope mia Transfer Several Images to Printout By means of the navigator popup menu an image directory an album or the overview of the VLT may be chosen The images are displayed in the dialogue window Images are to be selected from this list by the Add button to pass them on into the printout window SilverFast will auto matically try to place these images in an optimum manner on the print sheet In case the printing area is not enough A e Lo TY al imi 35AN ba a ee rapa y E Tir SilverFast will ask if more printing sheets eem are to be used za ezm rino B By clicking New SilverFast automatically attaches the nec essary additional pages Choosing interleaving causes all images on the current page to be added Supernumer ary images are collected at the lower right edge of the printing window They may then manually be arranged deleted moved etc 306 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual HE Layout Priority long side Priority small side 4 Priority exact size image crop Prnko B s b F k p Bi a i i T e Ez m GE C Priority long side The selected images were all inserted with a long page of 4 cm The number of pages as well as the number of the active page are displayed a
259. ied Windows First activate source frame Hold the Alt key depressed and simply click into the desired frame 90 4e Prescan concept SilverFast Manual Genera Frame Densitometer 4 Options A SS FE UD rew EE Yey B T Levy ie J q gt Prescan f Scan RGB Quit e Detaults General Auto Calor Management Scanner gt Internal Calibration H l ln arnal gt Monitor Aut rn ti imema Duyur PAF CMYK Prefiles for ColorSynt Scanner Reflective scanner Framsparenri i Til P mer Adobe RGE 19981 Ei Cay Cen ric Gray Profile koc H Gumpert Pinner MCINE E Rendering halant perceptual iH _ Lmiredded OC arbre mbd aL pretile i Profile ta embed DursscaleCaabed icc Pay A Play EMYK EurotcaleCoated icc MM e f Appy AE Cae f Ok oo Ex gm zc ua e Ds a 9 ir hi iT on 11 Permanent Softproof Starting with version 5 of all SilverFast plug ins the normal RGB colour monitor display of the prescan window can be perma nently converted to a CMYK colour simulation In this way it ensures that the user can inform himself about the colours that he can choose in the text before the actual scanning The precondition for switching is that P amp P CMYK is selected in the Colour Management internal gt Output found in the CMS settings under the Options dialogue and that in the same palette un
260. iently precise leave the dialogue by clicking OK The entered focus point will be employed in the end scan Bcc 2 he Cancel button ends the focus dialogue Focal change will not be used in the end scan The window closes and the Silver Fast symbol is available again Point A 3 If the focussing is insufficient or if the focussing needs to be checked against a different point in the picture a new focus point can be placed on the picture via the Point button A new scan will be started 4 Alternatively the level of focus can be changed by moving the TUT mouse through the slide controller between preview images 2 40 By pushing the right arrow you can adjust the level of focus via the mouse The distance of this push is shown in the box under the right preview window and on the button next to the focus button using mm as the unit of measure 3 4 By clicking on Manual a new scan is started and the resulting preview produced By clicking OK the level of focus is 0 00 accepted and used in the later scan 5 By clicking on Auto you can return to the normal auto focus function 202 6 10 Focus SilverFast Manual iz UHuverFas 2 SilverFast A m _ e 5 J 627 ww iU ilverFast 2I 5 a 6 11 Description of the Special Functions of SilverFastHDR and SilverFastDC The scanner independent SilverFast versions SilverFast HDR and SilverFas
261. ies of the original files are created The original files always remain untouched By means of the Plus button a new album is created By clicking the Minus button the active album is deleted Presets Palette By means of the five defined paame entries in the presets palette the user interface of the VLT may be changed by a single mouse click These are the parameters of the VLT the visible VLT window the thumbnail sizes setting of the mag nifying window and the parameters of the full image view Individual settings of the user may Yhes be saved and deleted by clicking on to the Plus Minus buttons L a os ma DE e 9 J Pictures Ce 2 von 58 Objekte ausgewahit y SilverFast y Albums le pri Airplanes gt 3 Cars gt ri Flowers y 2 Hollyday 2002 beer jpg Blaue Berge jpg buffalo steam jpg flower jpg house2 jpg panorama jpg PICTOOSS JPG plane jpg rock jpg SFthumbs DC VLT 2 ai 989 bal bal har bali bal Pel H Sonnenuntergang jpg 2 Wasserlilien jpg e pi John gt 3 Untitled 4 Ni EL i j k a a l m lI l wj 2 2 ER EU LC xa al sa E J4 ai Mi hi i n E kl i E dae ata li CEL zn EW B B gt EFE E B Mi a EZ m z DESC bil bed ii Fk TT KM E aa Pe 2 a l BI ll wj m z Bi Ki z ka ai ma E l4 ai MI hi i k K TIY Bees K al li CEL aum E NE FE Ka cz SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR
262. ii 3 SCODO PP modern inkjet printers are equipped with drivers which generally SC G00_ POP lec SC900_Standard lec take these issues into account but they can not so well be inte LiIWS Hen tf ad aated icc Deindc grated with ColorSync USWeblncoated ice After having chosen Internal Output ColorSync ICM under colour management you have to select the output profile of your printer or imagesetter here This profile can be embedded into the file at your request RGB CMYK HGB Data de E Pinter SilverFast e Embedded RGB ICC Profile Profile Embedding with Output on Non PostScript Printer CMYK Data PostScript CMYK m Pinter SilverFast Embedded CMYK ICC Profile Profile Embedding with Output on PostScript Printer 422 71 Addendum SilverFast Manual Rendering intent for ICC Profiles Profiles for ColorSync ICM now has an additional popup menu Profiles for ColorSync Scanner Reflective lt NONE gt in the CMS tab of the Options dialogue Now Si verFast s sannar Ian peran ee Rendering Intent which can be utilized for all ColorSync ICM Internal Adobe RGB 1998 i ZE _ operations can be switched on Gray Generic Gray Profile icc Output Printer EuroscaleCoated icc A differentiation of the Rendering Intent for various operations i e y Tuum input monitor and output matching is not possible rei colorimetric bara
263. ilable in the Pro and Studio versions only and operate only under Mac OS 10 3 1 or newer Shmue B Which SilverFast Versions include PrinTao PrinTao is a component of all scanner independent SilverFast ver sions in which it is implemented into the VLT Other than that PrinTao is also a part of every SilverFastAiStudio version and may be launched by clicking the respective button located in the vertical toolbar left of the preview window SilverFastDCProStudio and SilverFastHDRStudio The Studio versions of SilverFast DC Pro und SilverFast HDR contain additional functions in PrinTao e Sets of default Templates for automatic alignment of the imag es on the printing pages e Selfconfigured templates for page layout are saveable e Freely define and positionable picture text e Selectable EXIF IPTC data to be embedded into Image text Users which have the optional SilverFast PhotoProof function enabled will find the additional PhotoProof settings in Prin Tao for embedding a FOGRA media wedge and the according reference profiles Please examine chapter SilverFast PhotoProof for more information SilverFastAiStudio Since the scanner dependent SilverFast versions do not have direct access to the previously saved image the functionality of some Prin Tao functions are different or reduced For example e The file browser is not available Instead all drawn image frames are displayed within the image list e The input
264. ill commence SilverFast pate Please read the License agreement carefully Ei MN If you agree with the terms click Accept eaa em des m me ma Tiren or nir rhage 8 r e Click Install The installation will be prepared and the compu SilverFast Progress Searching for Photoshop ter will be searched for a Photoshop installation lems remaining ta be installed 147 LaserSoft Imaging SilverFast Manual 23 1 2 Installation oe me werd tert k In the next dialogue the results of the search are shown Their aT A brii abaia Choose the target destina tion of Photoshop and click j SilverFast oen SilverFast Ete sg ce q alikak lr AEE Agger wa Fighe sisl xane rected YS Hetan tanari se If Photoshop is not found on Peas Select Pretoahon nin eae a a m the computer SilverFast will De Sass Mer den faceres cmo a seeker Red k installed into the SF Launcher e j Frese conse Adobe Photoshop 7 English on Lane ro ere EM directory Harisi nomaini ie be imitallsd 144 naling Easy eal EM diem pmi bp Mid liar VEM u EAP A K vor am IET e Close the dialogue after installation by clicking Quit q Quit r leave rhe Installer If yau wish ta perform amairianal ingallanans cick Contmus CY ZAN Important Mac OS 9 Users only Before beginning to work with SilverFast and starting Photoshop please check your RAM allocation for
265. ilverFastJobManager 349 Tip E di E HEK lt 7 j az NET K R lol E Adding a Single Frame By clicking on the first button with the mouse the currently acti vated frame of the preview window will be added to the JM window p Gba ager HE ra ar D Pro asm cia Ir Ceut peat seiga Maris prev A wil bier dii TET You can also mix the three types of job entries If you make changes in a job or job entry and the job changes have not been saved yet they will be designated with an asterisk behind the job name N Attention If an image overview appears above the JobManager button in the margin to the left of the prescan window the keyboard short cuts found there cannot be utilized This overview appears only for the purpose of selecting a single new image for the default preview scan You cannot transfer an image from here to the JM Deleting Job Entries Individual job entries can be deleted at any time To do this you must select the job entries to be deleted in the window of the JM One click of the delete button will remove the marked entries 350 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual Processing button on off processing button off selected job entry Workflow of optimising images Image auto adjust Defining highlight Shadow Adjusting gradation curves Global colour correction Selective colour cor rection Size adjus
266. in the VLT Heide J ame Mera Pil okei SHAE Win f bie e VLT Album all files Displays all images of the current album SLT Album fsetecped Eres VLT Dnereies am fileti VLT Granata selected fih i Mores rima laren Doen file Verus Fe Imewver Vier al urd WLF Album allies e VLT Album selected files Only displays the selected images a YLT Aiju jey er TL diras Jaime em within the album Ver careless Open file 300 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Verve fil we wis Hit album WLT Album all Pres YUT All m iselecred Filesi s VLT Overview 133 filesi WLT Overvies velecned files Vorw rampla Open fl Miro File wene Nen albums WLT Album daii Piers WLT Album selected Elek VIT Gere xs bei VLT Curves prin di mier Wear r mg lan n Eman Aie kira Pile FOAL Mer album WLT Alikum dil aii YLT Altiim sel cped Meri VLT Qwervin all bes WLT Gremie selec Nissi Mors temalari Gan file Mor Pile b rw L View albums WET Alleum i aii fes WET Album iseleered Fieri WLT eres 138 Mesi WLT Overview selected fies Vires Eemplanes e VLT Overview all files Lists all images in the current overview of the VLT e VLT Overview selected files Lists only selected images in the current VL T View templates Displays all current templates that were cre ated with PrinTao e Open file By this Open dialogue a orate single image may be dra
267. individual images later a LOL CES Caa Print page document with empty frames and no text re PE EET 2 Feri Posies Pn pn irm freies Je SER AS T A 10 1 mL SN som E 9 PrinTao E B z r 1 a AG MN um r ar Sire BI Holidays 20723 Tena zr utes Di awa 2i ir EF E Ia Pha Py iiez A Le man cas E LI EC TTET ess MSS Nn ll es mj femme ld i fr M A F pes jme MESA T ione j c Sj LED yu i FH lt k st r a Xu z z Holidays 2002 DECH E Print page document with images Print page document with images and text and a free mov able text title SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 329 330 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Select all th smbsnall en thie pa g Delete all thumbnails on this page Delete selected thambnails an this page Delete all Ehumbnailsonn all pages Insert page Delete this page Delete dll pages Rotate selected thu mbnalls en this prot clorkwyse Rotate selected th urribnalls on this nage counter clockwise Flip selected thumbnails an thes page hnrizantal Flip selected thumbnalls on this page vertical Center image om page Fit image t page witch cropping made on Image Text for selected thumbnail Image rext far multipla thumnails Hide Ierriglatas Hila guides Delere guides on current page Delete guides n all pages ZAN Attention SilverFast PhotoProof is only a
268. ing AG grants the licensee an exclusive and non transferable license to use the software object code and user manual for his or her own use 2 This license authorizes the use of SilverFast on a single personal computer at one time Separate licenses are required for use on multiple processors and or multiple sites 3 The user and licensee is not permitted to copy in whole or in part SilverFast except for the purpose of making a backup copy The licensee is neither allowed to copy in whole or in part supporting documentation supplied with Si verFaste 4 The software contains confidential information this license does not allow the licensee to change adjust reverse engineer or otherwise disassemble the software to obtain access to the object code 5 The licensee is not allowed to rent lease sub license or loan the software Transfer of software and documentation is possible under the condition that all software and documentation is transferred no copy including backup software is retained and the third party accepts this License Agreement 9 Validity 1 This license will be valid from the day the software package is opened It will be valid until the day LaserSoft maging AG or the licensee terminates this agreement 2 This license agreement may be terminated to the terms and conditions as follows a LaserSoftImaging AG may terminate this license upon written notice if the licensee is in breach of the agreement in whole or parts of it
269. ion The CMS Dialogue 1 Colour Management 2 Profiles for ColorSync ICM 3 Embedded ICC Profiles 4 Plug amp Play CMYK CMYK Output with Colour Management Example Settings SilverFast Photoshop 5 02 406 409 412 413 A13 417 418 420 425 426 427 428 14 1 1 Content SilverFast Manual 7 2 Calibration of your Scanner using SilverFast IT8 Calibration 433 Differences in Calibration Between a Scanner and a Digital Camera 437 Sequence of IT8 calibration 438 Examples Where to Find the Production Charge Number on IT8 Targets of Different Manufacturers 439 7 3 Addendum 442 ocanning Concepts 443 Scan resolution dpi 444 Input Resolution 444 Optical Resolution Interpolated Resolution 444 Greyscale 444 Need for More than 256 Levels of Grey 445 Screen Resolution lpi 446 Calculating the Scan Resolution 447 Which Resolution does SilverFast indicate 448 Optimum Scan Resolution for Inkjet Printers 450 Selective Colour Correction 452 Colour in Colour Correction 452 Colour Model Relations 453 Contaminating Colours 453 Keystrokes in SilverFast 454 7 4 Index 460 Symbols 460 A 460 B 461 C 461 D 462 E 463 F 463 G 464 H 465 465 J 466 K 467 L 467 M 467 N 468 O 468 P 469 Q 411 SilverFast Manual 1 1 Content 15 N lt X Z K C i 2 7 5 Glossary A B C D E G H J K L M O P R S T U V 471 472 Af T AT T AT T 478 478 478 478 482 482 482 482 483 484 484 485
270. ion between 800 and 1200 dpi is enough Only in rare cases is there a need for a higher resolution that is to say slide scanners need higher opti cal resolution because of the high level of enlargement that is possible D i 21 0 SilverFast Epsom GT lt D0 _ Sus Olas Terral f Frame Dernsitpmeter Bis li bean Type Ad 3 Rolleifles 2 8 FX Win mlumriauxssn g won ln jr a hen in cen Ser urd Wi i ka Jahra baqyaskResm aieht waimibe in dan Wririman le er da der Fera h manan du swera goma PM zilan Tea Vitter None Setting Cane k Sus mage Type 5aandard Marr bird rox Panse aF a HE jU Rf BA 9 gt Chea abr E Pul put Line art image SilverFast SE versions This function is not available in Silver FastDC and HDR versions SilverFast Manual 6 5 1 Bit 215 Zooming for Optimum Threshold Definition Normally prescans are not useful in determining a threshold value In order to do so however the zoom from SilverFast is an excellent help Zoom into the line a and adjust them by rt image so that you can see the critical lines means of the threshold slider The zoom on the left shows that you can zoom into every detail of a line art image so that the threshold can be adjusted perfectly Gradarion Curves Soe Seas B 5s T liz aa E V I2 Threshold settings E in single zoom pr
271. ion of the IT8 target should be as shown on the left 2 Click Prescan the Scanner performs a Prescan 3 Click the button Calibration 4 The Window IT8 Calibration pops up The preview window and the grid will open SilverFast Manual 7 2 T8 calibration 433 image of the dialogue win a way that all edges are dow the grid is reset to its l l standard position precisely covering the IT8 target A By clicking into the IT8 Position the grid in such Teel feted RUE Ieee o d g i fee Re ee 5 Start the Calibration If the frame is correctly set up the calibration can commence by clicking the Start button SilverFast will now search for the respective reference file for the chosen T8 target 6 Identifying the IT8 target and Searching for the Correct Reference Data File 6a SilverFast Locates the Reference Data File on Its Own This usually happens very quickly and runs automatically the IT8 target is identified by the barcode on its front SilverFast then searches for the respective reference data file and then launches the calibration 434 72 IT8 calibration SilverFast Manual Make sure your reference file text file corresponds to the production charge of your IT8 calibration target when in doubt ask target manufacturer Reference files for original KODAK reference targets image can be found here ftp FTP Kodak com GAS TDS Q60DA
272. ion of the magazine is displayed by the number that is displayed below the respective button SilverFast Manual 2 Overview A3 SE SilverFast AACO Auto Adaptive Contrast Optimization SilverFast AACO is an excellent tool for the correction of dark too much contrast bearing image parts while preserving the details in the highlights It operates automatically when selected but can also be manu ally manipulated By this the intensity and the complexity of the shadows that are to be lightened can be adjusted without affecting the highlights of the image Clone tool A powerful 16 bit clone tool which extends the already implemented SRD function has now been developed By this large interferences on the image can be repaired or even com pletely removed from the image 44 2 e Overview SilverFast Manual SilverFast Manual 2 Overview 45 Keyboard short cuts You can also bring up each of the tools by keyboard short cuts listed at the end of the manual W Activity indicator TA SilverFast Tools With correct use of the SilverFast tools selectable from the palette all image influencing operations can be completed In most cases the auto adjust will lead to satisfactory results However if you should wish to short cut the image adjustment process simply click on the auto adjust tool to activate S lverFast s colour analysis engine for instant results Setting highlight Histogram mid ton
273. ir and font size Will be opened Highlight the desired text passages with the mouse and then alter them into the desired font and format Via button A the systambased popupmenu for the used font type type styles and tont size will be opened SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 311 es gra i EW maki ur uta miM kar kuy au Dp ee Regular Oblique Bald Bold Oblique From within the fonts palette the colour of the text may also be changed The button for the colours opens the system owned dialogue for choosing the text colour The highlighted text is changed into another colour by drag clicking onto it LET _ _ Raa EE wawa R limi Beate aa KAD lg sg thes dennod ewl wn Ia use and hen aller serm eda the degna Moni ar Fama Mia bukan A Ihe Sehr ere popa irii lor Ein hand an na De ayn and fond sone wi Dus oran gt Hir hilgir the wed passages ed the mouse and then alor BE EHI fo deii ri v RE Via boran A ha j Koc E Wied font type Type syns and ond ge wil be Opp iig hbri rio resid ined vin ho mios and tien abr Vari iria rar herd Viel arad Harun Va bunan A thy Ty pereo poppan ie he ized Li Tare jn yes and Ail sore uil uie opines Unformatted text with select ed text passage Formatted text Highlight the desired text passages with tha mouse and then aller them inte the desired font and format Via button A the systembased popupmenu for the used font type
274. is consistent with internal gt Output ColorSync the colour settings in your imaging application e g Photoshop NONE Data will be passed on to the monitor without any matching You do omit colour management Specially with Pho toshop 5 it is very likely that the SilverFast preview will deviate significantly from the results in Photoshop Automatic You rely on Photoshop to do the matching to your monitor It is advised to set the same colour space e g Adobe RGB under Profiles for ColorSync ICM in the field internal you have defined inside Photoshop Otherwise the colour of the scan data could deviate Since the Twain standard does not support such functions it is not available with the SilverFast Twain module 418 71 Addendum SilverFast Manual Color Management Input gt Internal ColorSync Internal gt Monitor Automatic ColorSync Profiles for Colorsync Cie ab Input P amp P CMYK za ColorSync ICM You are integrating the monitor into the OS s col our management The appropriate ICC profile for your monitor will be required More sophisticated monitors get one supplied on disk or CD if not you might get it through the internet from the manufacturers web site last resort would be to create one with a spectro photometer Adobe Photoshop 5 enables you to do your own monitor calibration ICC profile For this utilise the installed Photoshop tool Adobe gamma or as a profe
275. is shown by the col oured border and the bright background colour Sorting Images in Album Window All images dragged into the the album may now be sorted The easiest way is by drag amp drop By using the context menu Mac Ctrl key Windows right mouse button these images may be sorted by name file size type or date and aligned automatically in the album window This can be done in two ways Sort by drag amp drop Activate the desired by a single mouse click and drag it onto an album in the album palette Activate the desired image by clicking on it and dragging it over any of the three other VLT icons With the Command key pressed Windows Ctrl key more single images may be marked and added to the selection Naturally the images are also manually re positionable and re sortable within a one album SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 219 I Sort images by marking First click on the Mark button The X mouse pointer switches to a cross as soon as it touches an album window By clicking onto an image it will be marked with a little cross in the upper right corner SilverFast v r jm TENE xi itm d Qweo 3 Ue BEEN T1 rage Ak Zi Ez B M KI d El UT E ki Ki E LEA al mei 3r ar p Ji sim croire J matai W im xan J TI LA o mie 5k ET ji rkin Tene J onim Vice co j Lale dn j lain visa The undesired images may then be sex Sort By
276. is was done so the frame selection can always be cor rected later You can jump back to the normal preview from the zoomed in preview by clicking on the zoom tool again Clicking again on the zoom tool brings you back into the zoomed preview L a F F I k When working with scanners with more than one optical lens Resolution see page 103 Scanner with Different Optical Resolu tions 96 4 Prescan concept SilverFast Manual Sarees HDA atl eS BIR Pt ag rum jdm sr Tirer HOF sipiy J BI 1 sl iret ee mir bireki HOR Ld mag etai 2 ma dmm ani hire anl HOR LL d U BR stad ros jimi rir 1 eee Zooming in SilverFast In addition to the previously described zoom functions the scanner independent SilverFast versions as well as the SilverFastAiStudio version now contain three extensions of the zoom concept After opening an image in the large preview window Si verFast now allows to zoom into the prescan without the need of frames Zooming by Mouse Click In our example first illustration on the right the frame is drawn across the entire preview window After clicking the magnifier button initially only a help ul Mr dialogue which describes XL the new functions is opened emd D qo pm By pressing the Ctrl key the mouse button turn into a Plus mag nifier Clicking into the image results in a step by st
277. ith Shift click Mia or ee SHIFT Win X for a sequence of images fk and with Command A Win AJ r UK for all images Byclicking on the now activated Copy but ton all changes made in the current job can be copied into the other jobs The user may define which parameters are to be K copied Dd Please note the last settings in this dialogue are _ active and will still be there during the next start XS of JM un r e By clicking the OK button the highlighted parameters will be d copied into the selected job entries done i al xnl a i 1 k g T LI r SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFastJobManager 36 1 Copying of Complete Job Entries It is also possible to copy individual several or all job entries of a job into a newly created or already existing job Just use the Copy amp Save commands Exit processing mode oelect the job entries or entry that you want to copy Copy the job entry into the buffer with Command C C Win C Open or create the final job Copy the buffer content to the final job with Command V M Win V to the target job 362 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual Q JobManager ob a New N Flowers 4 Johnsen Close trav M45 Save 365 Save as PYRAMID No Filter inch 100 0 100 0 Delete 3 dpi 12 99 MB Multi Job
278. ith Unsharp Masking 6 4 GANE Grain and Noise Removal Important Preparatory Steps Activating GANE Expert Mode 6 5 Line Art Scans 1 Bit Resolution of Line Art Scans Zooming for Optimum Threshold Definition 6 6 Multiple Sampling 6 7 NegaFix Scanning Negatives 1 Optimisation of Negatives Film with Integrated Profiles 2 Example Optimisation of a Negative 3 The Expert Dialogue When should the Expert Dialogue be used Expert Dialogue Overview Workflow of Expert Mode The Expansion Menu in Detail Automatic Mask Additional Buttons in the Dialogue Window Setting Orange Mask Highlight Shadow points The Curves Menu Changing the Film Gradation Curves 197 199 199 199 201 202 203 204 205 205 206 206 207 209 211 211 211 212 213 215 215 216 217 219 219 221 223 223 228 224 226 226 227 228 229 229 1 1 Content SilverFast Manual Neutralizing Colour Casts 230 Producing a Colour Cast Deliberately 231 Saving Changes as a New Profile 231 4 DIGITAL ICE technologies used with Kodachrome and b w films 232 5 Reference Card SilverFastNegaFix 233 Overview SilverFast 233 Overview SilverFastSE 233 SilverFastNegaFix Components 234 6 8 The Use of Various Film Holders for Film Scanners 235 APS Adapter 290 Film Strip Holder 236 Adjusting the Film Strip Position 237 Filmholder for Middle Formats 237 Film Holder for Panorama Captures 237 Batch Scans for Automatic Doc
279. ive r T8 button grey calibration is asa disabled The IT8 button is NOT visible when this function is not acti vated in the software Prescan TF E 3 7 2 Calibration of your Scanner using SilverFast IT8 Calibration SilverFast Ai for some high end devices features a professional tool for calibration and generation of input ICC profiles The calibration can be made for reflective and transparency positive originals The calibration is NOT applicable to negative originals The IT8 calibration is an additional function in the SilverFast soft ware It is usually an option to the software and therefore has to be activated separately In certain SilverFast versions for selected scanners this function is active by default In cases where this function must be activated separately a second CD Rom is required for this procedure the SilverFast Feature CD The separate activation procedure is described in chapter SilverFast Feature CD SilverFast has made the process of IT8 calibration very convenient all steps are performed automatically by the software just follow the instructions outlined below 1 Position the IT8 Reference Chart on your Scanner Bed Make sure that the original is positioned inside the scan area of the scan bed Avoid positioning on areas at the rim of the scan ner bed with some scanners this areas must be kept clear for hardware calibration The orientat
280. l Highlight Cast Highlights and shadows are optimized colour casts are removed in the highlights Shadow Cast Highlights and shadows are optimized colour casts will only be removed in the shadows User defined for saving your own automatic adjustment ake Q H KIN E N U t tO y d c A a Preserve Color Cast Preserve Highlight Color Cast Z N Attention Preserve Shadow Color Cast The default dialogue windows differ user defined n from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software gt Cancel GO f Save y Remove 4 3 Presets SilverFast Manual SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 19 n gpa dpi k m Scan resolution for 1 1 SilverFast calculates internally for scaling and quality factor so here the resulting resolution for the entire output image is indicated Showing scan resolution By pressing the Ctrl key SilverFast shows the hardware scan resolution in the edit field Showing interpolated resolution Ctrl key and Shift key shows the resulting interpolated reso lution for the actual scan Size Adjustments Scaling The values in the input field for setting the image dimensions of width and height of an original are automatically set by drawing a scan frame on the prescan Enter a quality factor 1 5 recom mended and the desired final size and SilverF
281. l f f Button to open close Jin CJ expert dialogue Button to open help file EIE Warning to indicate automask Note Only available in full version of Silver Fast Ai not available in SE version SilverFastNegaFix Components The standard dialogue can be extended by clicking onto the Expert button In extended mode you can switch between the panels Expansion and Curves o __ Film Type and Exposure Negari ib Agfa Bi HDC Plus amp 200 H n 4 G Pm Curves A X SE 153 253 133 231 212 E Shadow amp Highlight Save E f v f Auto 7 58 j Auto tolerance Expert Dialogue Expansion Single control elements De Switching between CMY or RGB monitoring in the histogram M Auc Mask automatic f button gt Reset button Li haz Sae W Save menu A Auto tolerance slider for mask auto mation Auto tolerance Film Type and Exposure Negari b Agfa HH Ei HDC Plus n ua 200 _ S 828 Expansion Auto tolerance Expert Dialogue Curves Single control elements Edit Mode on off Smoothen curves Reset button Save button Save as button s E le lt mmm celect single colour channels RGB m 234 6 7 NegaFix Scanning
282. l linhos do Al n t _j f 4 Index Symbols lt 274 lx 274 nW 274 ON 274 3 f stops 220 1 1 copy function 406 12 colour sectors 158 16 bit HDR grey scale 72 1 bit 215 24 bit 72 256 levels of grey 445 3 4 tone 156 35 mm slides 67 3x3 pixels 53 48 bit 72 425 48 bit HDR colour 72 339 6 colour sectors 158 6x4 5 43 6x6 43 6x7 43 6x9 43 90 steps 47 303 A a b channel 293 AACO Auto Adaptive Contrast Optimization See SilverFastAACO ACR Adaptive Colour Restoration See Silver FastACR Activate a scan frame 89 Active scan frame 39 Activity indicator 46 ADF Document feeder 70 237 238 Adjust Images automatically 340 Administrator 28 Adobe RGB 416 Advanced colour cast removal See MidPip4 Album folder 66 259 Album palette 265 267 Album window 278 Anti Aliased 54 Appearance manager 19 Apple RGB 416 Apply 93 APS film 41 235 236 237 APS film feeder 42 APS overview 235 Index scan 235 ASA ISO value 221 Aspect ratio 78 Auto adjust 108 114 137 138 220 Auto adjust and colour cast preservation 118 Auto adjust and colour cast removal 117 Auto adjust and threshold 119 Auto adjust reset 118 Auto threshold highlight 121 Auto threshold shadow 121 Colour of auto adjust button 114 Auto focus 250 Auto gradation 108 Auto threshold for highlights and shadows 59 Auto contrast 61 Automatic density 40 Automatic document feeders ADF 237 460 f 4 Index SilverFast Ma
283. la SACR O on f gt Cancel Hue control Saturation control Luminance control Objective of Selective Colour Correction The object of the selective colour correction is to reduce the con taminating colour and enhance the primary colour as much as necessary In the upper row all colours that are to be corrected are displayed horizontally The colours which are displayed verti cally are those colours with which the upper colours are to be corrected 1 Colour matrix In the upper row of the colour matrix you will find the RGBCMY colours that can be corrected aligned horizontally these can also be corrected by the vertically aligned colours For example the magenta part of the red can be increased by entering 10 in the respective field 2 HSL controls These controls change the hue H the saturation S and the luminance L 3 Colour circle By means of the colour circle colours can be altered by adding or subtracting colours Selecting the Correction Colour Often it is difficult to tell if a colour tone is red or magenta blue or cyan Simply click on the colour in the prescan window and SilverFast shows the type of colour that is to be corrected in the middle of the colour circle The colour sector recognized will be the colour in the centre of the colour wheel At the same time the corresponding column in the colour matrix will become active 160 5 6 SCC Selective colou
284. lbums Light table 128 128 Magnifier 256 256 v Magnifier 512 512 Magnifier size to fit Magnifier display EXIF data SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 281 CY JPEG images will get flipped rotated directly using lossless transformation which will retain image quality All other images are only transformed virtually actual transformation will take place when processing the images eee Don t show this warning again Rotating and Flipping Images in the Album The images in the album window may be rotated and reflected by these two buttons The rotation is done clockwise in 90 steps counter clockwise if the Shift key is pressed The reflection is done by clicking the respective arrow head By clicking the right arrow the image is reflected horizontally and vertically by clicking the other arrow When clicking onto the rotation or ng invert tool a popup will appear stat ing that the selected image are being transformed without loss of data JPEG files will immediately be transformed without loss of data In all other formats only the thumbnail will be transformed ini tially To display pending changes in the image the file name will be marked in red The marked images may then be selected by means of the context menu Chose images with pending chang es or Drag amp Drop it into the JobManager to be transformed there Printing the Album Contact She
285. ld at least set scaling and output resolution SilverFast Manual 6 4 GANE Graine and noise elimination 211 None Filter Sharpen USM Descreening USM amp Descreening Grain amp Nolte visib e lala Motor eliminzied mE exe Presean Manachrame CANES Parameters H Mese Low GANE W di Predeta Medium CANE High GANE k Activating GANE GANE gets activated under Filter in the Si verFast main dialogue Frame The GANE dialogue window will open up In order to monitor the GANE effect in the Before after preview click the Prescan button and with the square mouse cursor click onto a significant image area in the image preview so you have relevant image details to see the effect SilverFast will prepare a 1 1 scan with the preset resolution and display the results in the before after preview GANE Grain amp Noise visible Grain Moise eliminated Eli di Presean Cl Monochrome GANE Parameters Zz Presets High GANE EP f Came f OK Y Now you only have to select a setting from the Presets menu In the example above the setting High GANE has been selected 212 6 4 GANE Graine and noise elimination SilverFast Manual Expert Mode oec reper Whenever the presets seem insufficient you can activate the Expert Mode by clicking onto the Expert button The dialogue window will now become larger and three extra sli ders becom
286. lding on to the right half of this button an individual frame number is displayed in the upper left part of the frame The order of these numbers is also the order in which batch scanning takes place if selected The currently activated scan frame always has the number 1 the previously clicked frame 2 and so on By clicking on to the individual frames the numerisation of these is changed which in turn affects the scan order in batch Scans E 94 4e Prescan concept SilverFast Manual Zooming in the Prescan Depending on the version of there are a number of methods to x uu OL la zoom into the large preview window Zooming in SilverFastAi and SE To quickly zoom into any part of the prescan window drag a frame around the image and click the magnifier in the tools palette TT Nzar ni k Silverfast Al E ES ee ey Se eS SE lat Es oa Sa oe A quick zoom into the prescan window takes place In order to get back to the overview prescan reclick the magnifying glass The magnifying glass button functions like a toggle switch BE II Us Mr f Prescan If you want to enlarge the Bz T a p zoomed preview further minimize the scan frame in the zoomed preview and click the Prescan button again l i i i i i A i SilverFast Manual 4 Prescan concept 95 The zoomed in frame will always stay slightly short of the scan window Th
287. ll be highlighted in green colour Green highlighted details will be preserved in the final scan The red green colour bar above the slider indicates the relation of the function 1 eo a HF ana Tl HEB nt 6 6 en 0 7 vi Dust and Scratch Removal Defect Type All C White Black Detection G y ks Defect size Qr 1 Intensity v 100 380 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD SilverFast Manual 4 Slider Environment Size This slider is only available in full versions of Si verFast and become v Dust and Scratch Removal Defect Type AL C White Black visible when activating the expert mode Detection emm 25 This slider is used to control the recognition of the defect border Parameter values are small Usually between 1 and 6 Defect size Qe Intensity Environment size ewwil j Defect Type feo All O White O Black Detection NG 25 Defect size O 1 Intensity 100 Environment size e a n a T9 aw ja v Dust and Scratch Removal Defect Type e All O White O Black Detection ca annanca 54 Defect size s 1 mmc O o e Pu Do Intensity i 100 Environment size efie SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD 38 1 No mask New mask Change mask Invert Move Delete Mask Mask Scratch left X Mask Sky e v
288. llowing formula for the calculation of the ideal scan resolution may be used Scan resolution output screen x 1 4 x scale factor For Example The scan resolution for a 150 line screen with a 1 1 scaling factor has to be calculated Scan resolution 150 x 1 4 x 1 210 dpi The resulting file size for an A4 page for black and white greyscale is 5 77 MB for colour 17 3 MB 300 dpi would roughly double the file size This shows the impor tance of setting the optimal resolution since memory requirements and processing time increase dramatically SilverFast Manual 7 3 Addendum AAT e Q Factor Screen 1 5 Name Untitled frame 1009 Original Scale 25 sood z amp 600 0 For a 121 line screen for a newspaper and a scale factor of 5096 the calculation is as follows Scan resolution 122 x 1 4 x 0 5 85 dpi If you want to double the image size Scan resolution 122 x 1 4 x 2 341 dpi The images on the right show what has been explained earlier that higher image resolution is not significant for better image qual ity Which Resolution does SilverFast indicate In SilverFastAi you can monitor three different aspects of scan resolution a Output Resolution Will be continuously displayed This repre sents the resolution which the image will have after the scan eg in Photoshop The value is derived from SilverFast s integrated formula which relates
289. lso scale the image infinitely variable Q24 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual nput Box XJX Y T5 150 87 ocaling values can be entered directly in the according input boxes Scaling Images Within the Image Frame There is a way to scale an image within it s frame The size of the image frame will remain the same and does not change Keyboard shortcut Images can be scaled within it s frame step by step via keyboard Command Alt plus enlarge image clipping by 10 Command Alt minus decrease the image clipping by 10 Command Alt Shift plus enlarge image clipping by 1 Command Alt Shift minus decrease image clipping by 1 95 X PY 11 ed a SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 325 Help Lines and Grid Frames on Print Pages Similar to a layout software PrinTao can set Help lines and grid frame for exact positioning of image and text frames The simple and structurized assembly can be simplified and speed up with the magnetic behaviour of the guide lines ene rst _ Prinlao B E z aram E Hil HI Lale kn SET l a dM eh 9 DUK Creating Guide Lines eos l l SPrinlo B Guide lines are created by simply clicking and dragging on either the horizontal or the vertical ruler Scrolling Guide Lines via 1 Mouse Click The guide lines can be scrolled on the print page by using the m
290. lter may be applied to the active GANE scan frame at one time The filters cannot be summed together Setting All settings concerning image manipulation but not frame posi tion name and scan size can be saved or imported Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scan ner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 73 mage Type By selecting the correct image type you can influence the Image Type eae Landscape function of the auto adjust tool to suit your requirements more Skin tones precisely Gold tones Technic T E eror Standard With colour cast removal Highlights and shadows EI are optimized oe Landscape Range contrast adjusted without colour cast 5 l d5 Highlight Cast removal Shadow Cast Skin tones Reduced range contrast without colour cast user defined removal Gold tones Range contrast adjusted without colour cast removal Technic Range contrast adjusted without colour cast removal Evening Highlights are preserved shadows are optimized For images with predominant dark tones i e at night Snow Shadows are preserved highlights are optimized For images with predominant highlights Night Highlights are preserved shadows are optimized For images with predominant shadows H S Cast Highlights and shadows are fully optimized with colour cast remova
291. lverFast Manual Example Single Mask Inverted Mask Mask with several partial selections SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 173 Correction of 12 Colours Selective Cobar Correction he second panel of die selective colour correction dialogue D 8 f v e allows the correction of 12 colours You can now correct half tints Type CMe CMIZ like violet or orange It can be used instead of the 6 colour matrix Presets Save Mask Mo mask DRE Em d Because all of the input fields of the colour matrix cannot be IQ I1 T 1E shown at once there are two arrows on the top a um n um je mnn gt Bc ond left and right to scroll the matrix horizontally If you select a colour which is not visible by clicking on the preview the matrix scrolls automatically The arrows on the bottom left and right show that there are selected colours that are not in view which will be ae e e corrected gt Came Y OK 1 4 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction SilverFast Manual Selective Color Carnecti n DEC A 1 a3 e Toe Choma cm Presets Save Mask lt No m sk ey gt Selective Colour Correction with Multi Layers and Masks The new selective colour correction in Si verFast version 6 or higher now includes up to your layers Each layer can have its own independent colour correction including masking For example four red appl
292. lverFast IT8 calibration SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 337 HIRePP ja SilverFastHiRePP HiRePP High Resolution Picture Performance is an new technol ogy designed to dramatically increase the speed of loading large image files larger than 30 MB in conjunction with Si verFastAi and the scanner independent SilverFast HDR and SilverFast DC This is true for all SilverFast versions loading HiRePP accelerated image files such as 24 bit and 48 bit Tiff files The function cannot be seen in the SilverFast interface since it works totally invisible requiring no interaction from the user Though its impact becomes more effective the larger image file size becomes Loading or opening large image files e g 500MB depending on the software and computer CPU power may last several minutes respectively If these large files have been generated with a version of SilverFast with HiRePP opening these files in Si verFastHDR or DC will only be a matter of seconds Of course it is also possible to instill HiRePP into already existing non HiRePP files with SilverFast HDR accordingly That would be an ideal task e g for the Si verFastJobManager Whole directories of old data can automatically become HiRePP capable All without any loss of quality How much Time will be Saved Test configuration Macintosh G4 450 MHz 384 MB RAM Adobe Photoshop 6 with 120 MB RAM allocated Image file with 100 MB 100 MB 500
293. m Clown 25 100 53 100 0 52 Carrectian_ 128 Conection 128 x Delete gt mran Cancel i DE 3 To switch between different SC2G settings you only have to switch from one setting name to another x Clown 25 100 53 100 0 52 oettings that are not needed any more can easily be deleted fi Clown 25 100 53 100 0 52 Delete Resgunces Letecon 128 Clown 25 100 53 100 52 Correction 128 Raw f Delte J r TE 182 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction SilverFast Manual Changing the Conversion Factors C Selective Cray Correction he SC2G dialogue has another alternative method for colour to Clown TE RCE Preview grey conversion named Factors Here you can define how the f ELS original RGB values of an image are converted into shades of grey mm ono m mE c The upper part of the dialogue shows the primary colours with hit their current percentage relationship The lower part shows a colour bar with the relation of the three primary colours The sum of all colours is always 100 The larger the part of one colour the brighter the grey shade converted from that colour According to the example on the left the colour brightness from the Red channel will be used at 30 that from the Green chan nel at 59 and that from the Blue channel only at 11 for the grey conversion That means green colour tones will become brighter than red tones the increase of brightness with refere
294. m Type and Exposure Negat Film Type and Exposure Mega im agia D HX Ae A m 200 E Pu Wr Film Type and Exposure Nagata ib Ala E D HD Pius w 2 Example Optimisation of a Negative This example is shows the optimisation of an Agfa HDC 200 plus Negative First switch the mode from Positive to Negative and start a prescan The prescan window will show an image converted to positive Change the scan frame so that it is only covering the actual image pixels and does not touch the perforation holes of the film Film manufacturer Agfa This pop up allows selection of the manufacturer of the Negative film The selection effect will update the preview window in real time e Filmtype HDC plus Select the specific film type in this pop up Every film preset will distinc tively change the frame in the preview window Film speed 200 ASA In this pop up you can select the film speed ASA ISO value of the film being used The selection will again update the preview window Exposure correction 1 f stops Finally with this slider you can correct the film exposure within 1 f stop SilverFast Manual 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives 221 n o eS mm NOTE The IT8 calibration only applies to the positiv scan mode slides and pho tographs Calibration is automatically disabled in negative mode This completes the process of converting a negative to a posi
295. m Window the Central Working Place of the VLT Drag amp Drop Sorting Images in Album Window Editing Name and Image Comments in the Album Setting the Size of the Miniatures in the Album Window Rotating and Flipping Images in the Album Printing the Album Contact Sheets IPTC Image Information in the Album Gathering Image Information EXIF Size of the Album Window Deleting Images in the Albums Deleting the Cache Memory Optimizing Images Direct Optimization in SilverFast Main Dialogue Optimization by SilverFastJobManager Alternative Opening of Images A VLT Workflow Example VLT Keyboard Shortcuts Macintosh VLT Keyboard Shortcuts Windows Hed Eye Tool Image Settings Dialogue Correction of Exposure and White Balance Printing Directly out of the Prescan Window PrinTao The Enhanced Print Dialogue in SilverFast What is PrinTao PrinTao Features Which SilverFast Versions include PrinTao PrinTao in VLT Navigator File Browser in PrinTao Print Single Image Quick and easy Image Cropping by Using Key Shortcuts 259 259 259 263 265 265 266 266 267 267 268 269 271 271 273 276 277 277 2 8 279 279 281 281 282 282 283 284 285 285 285 286 286 288 288 289 290 290 291 292 294 295 295 295 298 299 300 302 304 12 11 Content SilverFast Manual Changing the Image Clipping within the Image Frame Transfer Several Images to Printout Control buttons Adding text to images Expo
296. mage source is selected click into the desired area of the image while keeping the Alt key pressed then the target area is selected and then cloned by keeping the mouse key pressed The marker of the source circle with cross follows the clone in a fixed distance 402 6 15 Clone tool SilverFast Manual The activated checkbox Auto texture allows SilverFast to detect patterns by which the clone tries to harmonically match the target area with that of the source area By this method the usual retou ching problem of having to try to exactly hit the edges or corners of the target area is solved Here it is important that the texture of sour ce and target almost run in parallel directions a classic example of this is the retouching of hair and long edges etc Retouching without Auto texture Retouching with Auto texture Objective To remove the metal door stopper Even a small difference between A slight mismatch between source source and target area immediately results in a breach of the image and is clearly and target is neatly evened out by the visible Illustration left Original Illustration middle Retouching attempt with incor Auto texture rect source SilverFast Manual 6 15 Clone tool 403 Naturally all clone steps may be undone This can be done in the lower part of the dialogue The field shows the current amount of performed retouching steps By clicking the Step back button all actions can
297. magnifying glass will turn green A 54 3 Presets SilverFast Manual Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software Scratch Volume It is possible to allocate a special scratch volume a special partition to SilverFast so temporary files can be stored there ouch temporary files can occur by scanning in a batch mode for example After completion of the scan process the files will automatically be deleted again Gamma Gradation This agjusts the general brightness of the image for mid tone and shadow In general a gamma of 1 6 1 8 is recommended For transparency the gamma is normally higher than for reflec tive transparency 1 8 2 Check that your monitor is set to the correct gamma in order for the tonal values to be displayed evenly For best results scan a grey calibration strip and adjust your gamma accordingly Gamma Gradation for HDR Output By clicking this check box the current gamma value will be applied to the 48 bit data during processing A 48 bit scan will appear somewhat brighter in the image application Gamut Expected in 48bit HDR Here the expected gamut of the following images may be entered A value of 1 preset makes SilverFast operate linear All scanned images are treated as if they have an embedded linear gamut No adjustments are made A value of more than 1
298. mask edges 169 Inverse mask 170 Lasso tool 168 Mask edge size 169 Move a mask 171 New mask 168 Polygon tool 168 Removing a mask delete 172 Selecting a mask tool 167 Working with masks 167 Multi layers and masks 1 5 Changing layers switching 177 Creating new layers 176 Deleting layers 177 Moving of layers change order 178 Objective of selective colour correction 160 Presets 159 165 Reset Reset all 159 Selecting colours 164 Working with colour correction presets 166 Separation parameter 93 Serial number 29 31 Problems while entering the serial number 33 Setting 73 86 88 Saving and Loading several Scan Frames as one Setting 88 Settings SilverFast Photoshop 5 02 428 Settings SilverFast Photoshop 6 431 Settings SilverFast Photoshop 7 432 SFLauncher 22 30 Launching and activating SilverFast via SFLaunch er 30 SF Statistic txt 189 SFthumbs 266 268 Shadow 108 141 149 Setting shadow 124 Shadow cast 74 Shadow offset darkest point 59 Shadow triangle 121 SilverFast SE 133 148 155 158 187 194 200 205 215 219 233 369 378 393 SilverFast SEPlus 205 SilverFastSE 253 SilverFastAACO 44 399 AACO 44 Auto Adaptive Contrast Optimization See Virtual Light Table VLT Saturation 400 Shadow width 400 Strength 400 SilverFastACR 179 ACR control 159 ACR slider 179 ACR with auto adjust 61 SilverFastAi 253 SilverFastAiStudio 253 SilverFastAiStudio 298 405 406 409 SilverFas
299. mat The file formats that are offered will depend on whether the scan process will be in the RGB see red arrows images top left or in the CMYK colour space see green arrows images top left The existing table will give you an overview In the case of some formats i e JPEG2000 UPEG and DCS an additional box Options will become active Additional parameters for these special file formats can be set up ET Tilveri an Sab Siben ak av As amp F Calnage leg Har A SF Cairn ge jpo Whitt 1 Deter ri bh H ul Where kam fi Li r d j Format JEC WE Opies Formac DES BE f Opies Cane nad um B I FEG appiens DCS Options feaullity H _ File Format Lo qi al High qal Single file Cae files IEsg filed Multi file Format Baseline Pat ndarnds M Badalina dplimi r d P Cancel ok 3 2 progres she JPEG Cancel 3 246 6 9 File formats SilverFaste Manual File format TIFF Reading different file formats The SilverFast applications recognize and open the following file formats Channels data depth suffix K 1 bit line art tif SilverFast Ai SilverFast SE SilverFast DCProStudio SilverFast DCPro SilverFast DCVIT SilverFast DCSE HDRStudio SilverFast SilverFast HDR e K 8 Bit Grayscale tif K 16 Bit HDR Grayscale uncorrected tif IE IE K 16 Bit G
300. mmediately show the enlarged preview with out scanning it again The first prescan will therefore take some what longer than normal amp The advantage is that by utilizing a zoom by means of the a If the selected zoom still lies within the data parameters the magnifying glass will turn green If SilverFast has to interpolate the data you may already see single pixels in the prescan the magnifying glass will turn red amp pm 3 fprescan Scan RGB Quit You can still choose a new prescan from your hardware with a m NENN click of the prescan button In this way you can be assured that the most important user interface the preview always has optimal resolution SilverFast Manual 5 7 Zoom 1905 3 94 ln l Densitometer measuring point in prescan Densitometer measuring point in zoom Zoom and Densitometer Four densitometer measure point can be fixed on the prescan which are saved in the zoom To fix a densitometer point just press the Shift key and click the mouse Do the same to release the densitometer point again refer Chapter Multiple FixPip Page 122 Densitometer Reading and Gradation Curves After having fixed a densitometer point and activating the zoom the value of the three colours will be shown as coloured dots directly on the curve This way it becomes easy for any user to find out where the curve has to be changed to get specific results ue ees LH N
301. mnkbk ox l lrrnal CANES E E ternal manner Oolorbyne 5 lena lt Qutmur Colorsync eel Pr fti s fii C lerfun Sonne Rete SADNE a4 Seanear Transparent t internal Adobe RGE 1988 H j rin Ganang Gray Profile icc H Quee Eurnscalet nareed ire a Rendering laens perceptual a Embedded ICC profiles Emid EE polli Ll Prom po embed inno ecole coated acc Plug A Pony CHYE nl f Apply V tanker Y E i Select the scanner profiles reflective transparency of your scan ner in section Profiles for ColorSync and under Output Printer your printer profile Select the profile of the internal system colour space under Internal SilverFast assumes your image application supports complete colour management Please check for this feature in the manual of your software manufacturer CMYK Output with Colour Management CMS Separation You have selected a CMYK colour space under Photoshop CMYK setup For this you should have an ICC profile you can select later in SilverFast If not you can save the settings with save into the System profile folder Now bring up SilverFast from the Import menu Under Options go to CMS in the Si verFast main dialogue Under the section Colour management select 6 ColorSync under Internal gt Monitor and 9 ColorSync under Internal gt Output Under Scanner gt Internal in our example it is again 9 N
302. mplates aa k ra laser adi Ban jain siar gpg CE RP j y di US LE LI E lagen aim dd uem cs m mal p e o Prewsew images cLipirihed rame 21h Era yema images lt Lin bei Frame 31 Prev man 3 Itiner franta 41i Fi cer images liri pert tame 531 Lir li ilil lrame gt Ell Freies images s Frewegw images imagi Presto mages Test Frieri CLC 1150 Drurkan FE Page Setii Dir quern kaini ri l ninan Erhan erer SilverFast Manual 6 16 Advanced print dialogue 407 Text Function For archiving purposes a small text block is positioned on the page 1 Dor ipn ree perpe xd E a4 Fea E Result The final result of the 1 1 copy func tion The textures are clear and sharp and the images are descreened A new high end JC al It kra dara sul 4 eH dare ha tee ss omen HR f TE Emi TI z HI LEX D EE E s anpa 9 PrinTao Bi Pars Pee ma Silver Ill amp SilverFast acs ame Bib riia Pa aH larmi om tmn D aai damas 1a aud Ti EL ora Tinad dk i lan m UT Ld mihi ra inh ELIT g Silver III amp SilverFast lt gt LaserSolt The iparolli da Esla lign Brochure Silver Hi 1006 scanner development from LaserSoft ELI Ld llli diL EREN Se dl D Br ye f om om rie LE liq nek eB ma ta sra ram pT me
303. mple 275 Renaming 272 Transformation 272 Workflow for unloading 271 SilverFastDCPro 259 261 298 336 DCPro open image 288 IT8 calibration 336 SilverFastDCProStudio 298 SilverFastHDR 298 SilverFastHDR 253 255 Alternative Opening of Images 256 HDR open image 256 HDR overview 256 JobManager 288 Renaming images See SilverFastDC SilverFastHDRStudio 253 255 4 f4 7 4 Index SilverFast Manual SilverFastHDRStudio 298 SilverFastHiRePP 338 Furnishing existing image data with HiRePP 339 HiRePP is especially significant for whom 339 How does HiRePP function 339 How much time will be saved 338 SilverFastiSRD 41 393 Activating iSRD 394 Auto 395 Combining iSRD and SRD 396 Expansion correction 395 Expert mode 395 How does iSRD work 393 Infrared channel display 397 iSRD automatic mode 394 iSRD manual mode 395 Layers 396 Masks in iSRD 397 Prescan 395 Threshold value 395 Using SRD and iSRD simultaneously layer tech nology 396 Which films can iSRD be used with 394 SilverFastJobManager 40 288 289 343 See SilverFastSC2G With film scanners and film strips 347 Activating the JobManager 347 Adding all frames of the preview window 349 Adding a single frame 350 Changing Back aJob 356 Choosing the location for scans 353 Easy edit mode 351 File format 353 Output settings 353 Processing mode 351 Produce job entries 347 Selecting desired images 348 Starting the real scan processing 355 Work
304. mpty album is generated Path Close Import Newalbum Blister fis acan Pa tray eii pepe The import dialogue will then open with each new media that is attached as long as the VL T is open The small check box Show this dialogue when new media is inserted can be activated for comfortable import N Attention Prior to removing the storage media it should always be removed by the system to avoid damage and loss of data Please refer to the respective operating instructions 2712 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Re naming Images Automatically The re naming of images can be done while unloading them or later with already saved image files Automatic Re naming while Unloading Transformation The re name menu allows complex changes of filenames of any Renaming Rename files during import TY part of or the entire collection of imported files IPTC Include IPTC during import E The re naming dialogue is divided into 5 parts mage List All images that have been found on the storage device or that have been selected by the VLT are listed here More images may be added by means of the plus button and images may be removed by the minus button The button Preview and Original is a switch By this the new names or the old names of the images can be shown Settings for New Names The check boxes define how the old file names are to be treat ed
305. n ie Agta BHO Plus m 200 Auto tolerance _a E 150 Image Frame Selection Select Film Manufacturer Select Film Type Select Film Speed Auto tolerance Ensure the selection marquee is inside the image and does not touch the perimeter of the film material The image on the right has been automatically optimised with the integrated Standard Profile Select manufacturer or negative film brand e g Agfa Select the film type e g HDC With the pop up menu select the film speed ASA ISO value of the actual film All chosen set tings will be instantly updated in the preview window In case the image still lacks neutrality this slider can be used to adjust the tollerance of the mask recognition in the high lights Film Type and Exposure Negat L1 i Agia m ian Correct Film Exposure HOC Plus HA 5 2 B Normally a correction of film exposure is not necessary If the a M we arg image appears too bright or too dark use the slider to simulate SOREN n a film exposure of 3 f stops You will see the correction in real time on the preview Sin PU af AW Apply Auto Adjust Now the process of negative positive conversion is complete To fully optimise your image press the Si verFast auto adjust button from the tool bar as usual and or apply other SilverFast tools as desired 220 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives SilverFast Manual fa pl Auta tolerance o Fil
306. n magenta and yellow as well as the 6 col ours in between are corrected The contaminating colour can be reduced and the current colour can be increased The cast colour of red is cyan of green is magenta of blue is yellow The type of selective colour correction that is used in SilverFast can be called a sector correction as it is correcting colours within a band of 60 or 30 angle depending on which matrix is being used read about further explanation of the colour model in the addendum i The 6 colour sec tors while using the Colour Matrix 6 Salar un Cedar Correction electi Color Caortiectian The 12 colour sec tors while using the Colour Matrix 12 158 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction SilverFast Manual Administration of Layers i Add new layer Delete active layer 44 Move layer in front of previous Move layer behind following Creating Masks Changing mask tools Click button and hold mouse depressed when pop up comes up change to tool desired Brush Polygon Lasso Sector Presets triangles WE Loading and saving settings only for the relevant sector Indicator Triangles lt i gt Green Left right there are other active sectors Red Left right there are no other sectors active Colour Space Zoom Increases decreases the magnitude of change enabling bigger finer corrections Overview Activation of Selective Colour C
307. n be scaled by the small plus minus buttons bottom left of the colour circle Selecting Colours By pressing the shift key and simultaneously clicking on the LEDs or into the prescan you can add another colour to the exist ing selection This way you can select and work with three or more neighbour ing colours This is especially useful when using the HSL controls while increasing the saturation of the selected colours Selecting all colours with keyboard shortcut Command A possible PC Strg A Right of the matrix you have a vertical colour bar which can be used to couple all colours for subtracting or adding colours This is only relevant when using the colour wheel for corrections If for instance you would try to add yellow to red with coupling activat ed by dragging from the centre to the outside of the colour wheel all colours will be added to red instead making the red much darker 164 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction SilverFast Manual Colour Correction Presets Any desired number of presets can be saved in the selective col our correction under each of the six correction colours red green blue cyan magenta and yellow and re loaded later Also a combi nation of these presets can be saved accordingly see next page Colour correction presets ula c mh Colour correction presets for the matrix of the current layer 2 tot for sliders and matrix in the current layer Presets for t
308. n is integrated into many scanners but not always active by default With film scanners this function is usually not active With flat bed scanners auto contrast is active for reflec tive and not active for transparency In case your scanner exhibits too much contrast please check whether Auto Contrast is active and deactivate accordingly in this menu ACR with Auto Adjust If this box is checked the image auto adjust will evaluate the current saturation for the image and increase or decrease the saturation accordingly Automatic when ADF When doing a batch scan from an automatic document feeder this function will perform an auto adjust on each image while scanning This option has the same effect as if the user would click on the shutter symbol in the main Si verFast window for each scan This option is not available on all scanners SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 61 CMS Palette left SilverFast Ai right SilverFast DCPro Color Management Input gt Internal ColorSync E Internal gt Monitor Automatic Hd Internal Output RGB AN Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software CMS Colour Management Settings alela hiami idee K J j i 4951 ras Laer Loy PE IDE ae iE ss Colour Management Here it is determined where and whether at
309. n the computer through a SCSI system cable SCSI ID number A number assigned to each SCSI device connected to a com puter The Macintosh itself is assigned ID 7 Other devices may use IDs 6 through O with 6 indicating the highest priority for communications and O the lowest priority service bureau A business that specialises in printing computer files on an imagesetter shadows The black and nearly black tones in an image 488 7 5 Glossary SilverFast Manual stripping The traditional process of assembling colour separations and typeset text by hand prior to making printing press plates subtractive primaries The ink colours cyan magenta and yellow that add together to make black T terminator A device used in an SCSI chain to maintain the integrity of the signals passing along the SCSI chain An SCSI chain should have one terminator at the start and end of the SCSI chain TIFF Tagged Image File Format A file format for exchanging files between applications and computers trapping A technique of overlapping abutting colours to compensate for printing press misregistration U UCR Undercolour Removal A technique for reducing the amount of magenta Yellow and cyan ink in neutral areas of an image and replacing them with an appropriate amount of black ink SilverFast Manual 7 5 Glossary 489 V virtual memory A feature of some applications and System 7 that lets you use hard disk space as RAM
310. nce to the existing colour brightness In this example blue colour tones appear to become the darkest with this setting With the mouse you can grab the colour border in the colour bar and move the border red green and green blue accordingly to DI ril get the desired result fma UH i tee Bee a n IT mg myo a uzun 7 a E nz mnu ai SEES lind Spe KII Carers Lain eye Gry Derren Apt fpr irp Cira fea HM anam shame s HERO ENN nn Sharm n N CRI honra trie Ee tame te eee 3 que Eray akan 7 mm T m m Ti ai oo If m i az i mS o6 mg aa P m sx m a a r T r d Ea Tat EE 7 j i i at p e J kul U a a a n A kd m Ha ai 1 i L p i i Sali L r s ai f d 3 a a p a i p Ram m EI a M ma z s I L IS 1 I d H e Tum pp aaar REUEDI EE Rut m ig m ar 1 re et remm Fena praca r ertum T With Standard Settings the colours of the clown s outfit are converted to nearly similar grey tones The example clearly shows how significant the image changes with the red middle image or green right image SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 183 5 Zooming In Prescan Hefer to Page 95 From the prescan you can zoom into any frame The Zoom will 2 scan the active frame into the free available space of the monitor window Click on the magnifying glass to initiate the
311. nd organizing Processing and optimizing of images Printing of contact sheets and single images The usage of the VL T functions are more precisely described in the following section about SilverFast DC SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 255 Macintosh Click into header while keeping Com mand key pressed Windows Right click mouse into prescan window HOR Open image HR MacProfSFArtikel1202 48b psd HDR M amp V HDR tif HDR Toronto HDR tif HDR AGFA HDC400 HDR neg tif HDR Agfa HDC 200 tif Ktikel1202 48b psd HDR M amp V HDR tif HDR Toronto HDR tif HDR AGFA HDC400 HDR neg tif HDR Agfa HDC 200 tif Alternative Opening of Images Pressing the Command key and clicking on to the header line of the SilverFastHDR prescan window opens a popup menu Window users can use the right mouse key to open this menu POF ae Pre T bp j Hom Mi EC bins Tenens MIN r BOR AF A KALIK IER rng HDE Agfa HOC OQ rit SilverFast HDR i NT B x KELE Letter dibs CZE A 1 uu e uer L E 1 Per terc m M kel liq Sacr E erg Tena hamiri amen ime nal eee Eu LE Ora umi cxi C r Ter AF E zt Hx Un DV cm Loom ii i Tu Grn i The pop up lists the items open HDR image HDR overview and the names of the previous images A check marks the name of the current displayed image in the prescan window The individual entri
312. nded Te sve over to the JobManager from the VLT windows by p drag amp drop _ Even complete albums may be draged into the JobManager win dow Unconverted RAW data images are converted when handed over to the JobManager This is done in the background Editing these images is only possible after complete conversion Alternative Opening of Images Hold down the Command key while clicking the title of the Sil verFast DC Pro prescan window to open a pop up menu Windows users can right click the title of the SilverFast prescan window The pop up lists the items open DCPro image and the names of the previous images A check marks the name of the current displayed image in the prescan window DCPro Open Image Opens a dialogue DC Pro Open image DC Pro SF Callmage jpg box which requests the device or folder DC Pro Heckenrose jpf DC Pro Bamberg HDR tif with the images DC Pro Canon PS G1 CRW DC Pro Fuji F700 RAF DC Pro Ibiza City JPG 288 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Sierras n S8OMetss A VLT Workflow Example 1 2 Launch SilverFast DC and start VLT Browser Search for and choose file directory or drag images directly into the album window Image overview Select images and drag them into the album window Search function Search for file names or comments and drag into album window Hepeat step 2 until all images are found Possibly hide over
313. ne The size of the inserted magazine can also be entered max 100 stai k sel cin gl aden t uv 1 55412 The option Round magazine is to be selected when using such a Came SEKE magazine The second button moves the film magazine forwards and back wards Clicking on the left arrow will cause the magazine to move backwards i e a lower numerical value and vice versa The current position of the magazine is displayed by the number that is displayed below the respective button Attention These functions are different for each scanner and some functions are only available for certain scanners or imag ing programs SilverFast Manual 6 8 Film holder 239 Overview dialogue All functions for the magazine transport as well as an additional button for the set ali ui fale a tings can be found Here the user E 0 may choose between three settings Number of slides starting phage Site anwar Sarvs from the current position de opecifies how many slides are Maximum number of siides to be scanned starting from the v current position fe p Wenn al dlides fram rise curent pation Scan from the following posi ER i San fro piniad unii end of rina zin tion Specifies from which position the slides are to be Stan ji selectiam nf slides ieg 1 3 5 12 scanned OX Cancel Cancel E Uk y e Area Here different areas of the slide magazine can freely be chosen F
314. negatives SilverFast Manual APS adapter A Attention Functions are different from scanner to scanner and some of the functions are only available with specific scan ners or imaging applications al aan I gt gt E IL L3 lae J A 6 8 The Use of Various Film Holders for Film Scanners After the film adapter has been changed SilverFastAi in general must be restarted in order to recognise the new adapter APS Adapter If the APS adapter is connected a film cartridge has to be put in otherwise a message will come up saying There is no scanner connected In the preview window a button for the APS overview or Index scan will be visible Calling up this function you can start displaying small overview images using the Start button If images are available in stock the procedure will be continued behind the last image available Note There is no way to identify a loaded film cartridge After you have changed the film you will have to refresh the overview BILL ux Inside the small button bar above the image overview there is a print button allowing you to print the overview 1 button You can also refresh the overview 2 button after having changed the film or you can stop or continue to refresh an overview 3 button Clicking onto the second button commands the scanner to gener ate an overview of the current medium film strip APS etc The
315. ng Here previously defined default settings can be General Densitometer selected These settings Scan Type 48 gt 24 Bit must have been allocated to Filter frame 17 M a name under Settings in Setting PAT the Frame panel Image Type Delete p Save With the Apply button the new default settings can be instantly applied to the currently active frame Any new frame will automatically have the allo cated default settings Options Parameter Saves and loads all settings of the Options dialogue into a single output file All settings of all other panels Auto CMS and Special are saved as well oettings for special production scenarios can now be easily reloaded at any time Interpolation of Scan Resolution Selection of Interpolation method Standard or Anti Aliased With Anti Aliased grid structure artefacts will be effectively eliminated High Resolution Prescan In order to achieve a higher production rate a preview with a resolution up to 8 times more than EN required can be selected c The advantage of this is that SilverFast can dis a play a zoomed part of the image without actually having to perform a new scan If a zoom is possible without a re scan the magnifier is displayed in green colour The initial preview however is slightly slower than the regular preview If the selected zoom still lies within the data parameters the
316. ng A halftoning process that uses clusters of dots rather than evenly spaced halftone cells dot gain SilverFast Manual 7 5 Glossary 483 A printing defect in which halftone dots print larger than intend ed dpi dots per inch The unit of measure for a printer s output reso lution Also used for scanner resolution although ppi or spi is more accurate dropout colour A colour that you set the scanner not to recognise E EPS Encapsulated PostScript A file format that can contain both scanned images and PostScript images along with printer infor mation gamma A measure of contrast that affects the midtones of an image gamma correction Application of an algorithm to correct images for the fact that machines and people perceive tonal gradations differently G GCR GCR Grey Component Replacement A technique for reduc ing the amount of cyan magenta and yellow ink in an area and replacing them with black ink Greyscale An image type made up of black white and grey pixels Also the range of greys in such an image measured in either percent black 096 is white and 10096 is black or grey levels O is black and 255 is white 7 5 Glossary SilverFast Manual H halftone An image that uses different sized dots to represents light and dark areas highlights The white and nearly white parts of an image histogram A bar graph of the number of pixels for each grey or RGB value in an image The
317. ngi Adobe RGE 1998 F 2 Cra Generic Gray Prole ic E Cute Trinner r 7 Rendeiegieenr perceptual Ey Embedded K priti Erzbwibded p ralfllr lt N NE 3 i nibar IOC galli w Profe b reta burpscdiec maler e Palhramnan eas HOR ITA Profile dd 4 Fan A Ply CMYK Furoscalet oated icc H gt E ew JE cance Tox CMS palette in SilverFastHDR SilverFast Manual 7 1 Addendum 417 1 Colour Management Scanner gt Internal Color Management Here you define how your scanner s colour space will be matched nput gt Interna NONE TTC i CED to your system You decide whether the original scan will be trans Internal gt Monitor Internal gt Output P amp PCMYK P ferred to the imaging application with accurate colours lt NONE gt You renounce matching of the scanner colour space to the colour space of the imaging software Colours on the moni tor may deviate from the image sample ColorSync ICM You decide to integrate the scanner into the operating system s colour management By selecting the right ICC profile images will be scanned colour exact With Silver Fast s IT8 calibration you can generate a profile describing your scanner your scanner s colour gamut Internal gt Monitor p Color Management 3 Here you define whether and how the monitor is matched to your Scanner gt Internal lt NONE gt enema gt wonior PANETE system You have to make sure that the work flow
318. ngle file Ua mali file Eg filed _ Multi file Fnrmat F8 Baseline Gtandanh L Baline dpilimi r P Cancel ok 3 2 progressive JPEG Cimi C 2 4 Scan Mode Batch Mode File All scan frames of the prescan window will be scanned with this setting and the images will automatically be saved as files upon completion of the scan The setting in the save dialogue will determine which file format will be written The save dialogue will appear as soon as the but ton scan batch is clicked Naming of scan frames If the scan frame already has got a name in the SilverFast main dialogue this name will become the actual file name In case no name has been given to the scan frame the file name Batch image will be allocated and an incrementing number attached Batch Image 0001 Batch Image 0002 If some of the scan frames have been given a name and some not there will be a mixture of both principles Batch Image 0001 NameABC Batch Image 0003 NameDEF SilverFast Manual 249 6 9 File formats o wra File format By using Format you can again choose from two dif Save hi Ban Where Decumen s SS ferent file formats The prominent table will be easily identified An additional box named Options will be come active with the formats UPEG and DCS Additional parameters can be set for these special file formats z E
319. nifier display EXIF data By means of the Display fitting button the image file is always displayed in maximum size within the magnifier window By clicking Show EXIF data some of the basic EXIF files may be viewed in the magnifier window Above the magnifier window the pixel size of the current image is displayed Blue or Green Dots within the Thumbnails HAW data images that are already converted are marked by a blue dot These dots may be visible in the overview and in the album Green dots mark images that have previously been corrected via the main menu of SilverFast DC and been saved back as a copy Par i MM into the album Green dots are only available in the albums This function is only available with special SilverFast versions SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 277 Album Window the Central Working Place of the VLT All previously introduced parts and functions group around a central window in the VL T the album window This is the main os area ig a 1 Tabs HK Pro T rj fell Alum dor RAW porreprsian i fer oer nag Orta us fe hisp Rohe metti FETtQA h T a meii i nu mi ceni pes m mS TLEL Li RAW T DD P i SITE FETU Polisi LE kan nam 1 inate metro bid uw jg TES Uu I IE J E ja ig JD zt x z 3 EJ x Q m 1 d z r ji Sane nerm a ni L senza TI nca The DW B
320. nji i i E Ee TTT ie aa me nd Sine ul eI TES Q Facrer Sore ii e j DELI m maz rr le Prestan Scan RGE IF Quit r _ SilverFast Manual 6 10 Focus 249 Focus function 1 Auto focus off 2 Manual focus on 3 Auto focus on 4 Focus with preview The activation of a focus function occurs by clicking the focus button With each click the appearance of the button changes signifying a different function After four clicks the first function will again be available Auto Focus Off In the standard position the focus button is grey The auto focus is turned off Auto Focus On The focus button shows a black symbol together with the letter A The auto focus is turned on Focussing always takes place in the centre of the active scan frame The focus function orients itself by use of contrast differences in details in the centre of the image If there is no visual information in this point of the image which can provide sufficient details for the focus function the auto focus cannot be success ful The same holds true when the auto focus encounters a black surface An error message will appear In such cases please switch from auto focus to manual focus Manual Focus On The focus button shows only a black symbol of a stylized camera lens The mouse arrow changes to a pen with which the edge point can be set The manual focus shoul
321. ns with an inkjet printer without Post ocript and without simulation of offset screens effectively a few points should be observed already before the scan N Please note You should scan with reference to file size really needed i e Scan size file size should ideally reflect the number of pixels needed for the print Larger than necessary files only congest the computer system and do not lead to a better printing result All necessary tools to get to ideal file size are built into SilverFast There are no complex formulas and no conversions required In order to get optimum results it is recommended to do an initial test With this test you will find the optimum resolution fur the cur rent printer the printer connected with relation to a special paper 1 In the SilverFast main dialogue the Quality factor is to be set to 1 5 and Scaling is to be set to 10096 2 he original to be scanned should be a contrasty slide with lots of details or a similar reflective halftone do not use printed samples from magazines or books 3 After the preview scan create a small scan frame eg 9x6cm over an area with significant details 4 The image will be optimized as usual image auto adjust Gra dation colour correction Under Filter the Unsharp Masking if active should be switched off 5 In the SilverFast main dialogue Frames panel under Screen input a value of 20 locm In the same dialogue input 20 lpcm as well
322. nsuming procedure if there are many images and optimum quality is desired The time required for the hardware to make preview scans fine scans and save files is dead and wasted time for the user In terms of modern fast work processing it is really a dinosaur When using JM there are additional advantages for using a flatbed or drum scanner Thanks to JM you can process transparent and reflective artwork and even mix slides and negatives They can be processed in one pass using JM Therefore JM is a tool that will drastically increase the efficiency in the workflow process and is also a means for decreasing costs SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFastUobManager 343 MSt K6 12 17 E WebOpti indd 190606 Note Only applicable when using JM with SilverFast HDR or SilverFast DC What is RAW data A few scanners and digital cameras can also scan in a raw data or HDR format high dynamic range with 48 bit colour or 16 bit greyscale by means of the SilverFast Ai scan software In this manner the raw data of the scanner is read as an RGB file Here with scan type 48 bit HDR colour the only means of adjustment during scanning is the output scale and the degree of resolution SilverFast Ai can embed a scanner profile which describes the deviation of the scanner into the RGB data during the output of 48 bit data The scanner deviations can then auto matically be corrected during later processing with Silv
323. nter key in order to close the window The ScanPilot ImagePilot may be halted at any time by clicking the red Stop button and then allow moving on to the regular tools in S lverFast s main dialogue Preferences By pressing the Prefs button you can expand the tools list used by the ScanPilot ImagePilot Click on the check boxes beside the tool buttons The ScanPilot ImagePilot will show you at which point you use these tools best The detailed Premi description of the tools can be found in this man B ual In the preferences dialogue window you define gi whether the ScanPilot ImagePilot will sup 2 M ply concise help texts beside the tools during its B A operation M Difference between ScanPilot and amp B ImagePilot 2 x There are no differences The af ocanPilot is available in J Helgtexts SilverFastAi and the ImagePilot in T Open at startup SilverFastDC and HDR Camel OK 110 5 e Tools SilverFast Manual Whig heb P adl rvan bevel milli bek Gecko chier en fee rei jhe ato mul Hoa Pali ite biil ard dha bikyw p r ed kd L 1j W me deserd rb Sav mm r il e gm m j ce BN NN Se E a Ra i Fa a d p e m e 74 m o Md e di a ____ di z n 3 Comparison of the different grada tion dialogues Left The appearance of the dialogue when opened using the ScanPilot ImagePilot Right The appearance of the
324. nting the flat bed scan area of the scanner SilverFast Manual 4 Prescan concept 85 j 1E hame new iame sering Framer 15 mM f Cancel X v Frame 14242 Delete s k I Loading and Saving single Scan Frame Parameters SilverFast enables you to save and reload frames with their associated settings like scan mode highlight shadow values gradation curves scaling and scan resolution This will help you in having your most wanted settings and frames quickly avail able In order to save a new scan frame with all its settings go to Setting Save under the frame panel and input an appropri ate name Caution Tha h k n nie E A lr JNIy W oe If the name does already exist you will be asked whether you would like to replace that name Replace l Cancel Delete Resources Colur Filma jE In order to delete a setting go to Delete prame A715 under the same menu You will get a list of all existing settings Select the settings you would like to delete and click on Delete i Delete sk Leave gt Batch Scans from SilverFast Batch scans represent automated processing of numerous scans scan frames on a computer SilverFast supports various kinds of batch scans First you draw several scan frames and allocate individual set tings to those frames if desired Clicking on the right half of the brightest darkest point show frame number button
325. nual Automatic orientation detection 67 Automatic prescan 94 Automatic when ADF 61 Automatic with ADF 238 Auto palette 59 Auto pipette middle factor 60 Auto sharpen 199 B b w film 232 Barcode 435 Baseline opimised 245 Batch mode 70 87 238 Batch scan 86 Interruption of a batch 238 Setting of an image number in the batch 244 Batch mode File 87 238 Batch scans 87 Black and White negatives or slides 394 Black and white point 42 Blind colour 65 Blue dot 2 7 287 Bright contour 204 Brightest point 59 131 Displaying Brightest and darkest point of an image 131 Brightness 149 293 Browser 266 Brush 167 382 C C41 process 394 Cache 259 260 263 278 Cache size 66 Deleting the cache memory 285 Green arrow 263 Red square 263 Calibration of your scanner 433 Calibration profile 64 Camera Storage Media 271 CCD 217 CCD noise 42 Chapter 1 Installation 17 Chapter 2 Overview 35 Chapter 3 Presets 49 Chapter 4 Prescan Design 81 Chapter 5 Tools 105 Chapter 6 Special Functions 191 Chapter 7 Colour Management 411 Choose plug in folder 30 Clone tool 44 401 Auto texture 403 cm 52 CM12 175 CM6 175 CMS Colour Management System See Co lour management CMS dialogue 41 CMS palette 62 93 417 Colour management 417 418 Internal gt Monitor 418 Internal Output 419 Scanner gt Internal 418 Embedded ICC profiles 417 425 Plug amp Play CMYK 417 426 CMYK Output with Colour Management 427 Scanning with Colo
326. nual 7 4 Index 467 Moir 205 More auto sharpen 199 Moving of a scan frame 90 Multiple densitometer 134 196 Transfer of the brightest darkest point to the mul tiple densitometer 197 Multiple FixPip 101 134 186 196 Multiple Frames 85 Multiple neutralising pipette See MidPip4 Multiple sampling 42 217 Multi Sampling with Auto Alignment 217 Multiple scan frames 85 Multiple scanning 42 Multiple slide scanner settings 239 N N normal 154 Naming of scan frame 242 243 Navigation window 266 Navigator 299 300 Navigator palette 97 Neg Direct 70 NegaFix 219 See SilverFastSC2G Auto tolerance 219 224 Components 234 Expert dialogue 219 223 Automatic mask 226 Changing the film gradation curves 229 Curves menu 224 229 Expansion Menu 224 Expansion menu in detail 226 HS and L dialogue 225 HSL colour space 228 Magnifier 224 229 Neutralizing colour casts 230 Producing a colour cast deliberately 231 Reset 227 RGB CMY switch 227 Save 227 Save the newly created profile 225 Saving changes as a new profile 231 Set neutral grey 225 Setting orange mask highlight shadow points 228 Smoothen 229 Exposure 219 Film speed 219 Film type 219 Importing film profiles 223 Manufacturer 219 Negative See SilverFastNegaFix Neutral point 126 Deleting neutral points 128 Neutral values 126 Night 74 Noise 217 Non PostScript Printer 422 O Offset 129 Open button 255 335 Open VLT at start up 56 Options dialogue 53 Auto Defaul
327. odel Relations The following model shows the relation between primary col ours and contaminating colours complementary colours In the selective colour correction these colours can be increased or decreased Contaminating Colours Contaminating colours are those which lead to a dirtying also referred to as a blackening The colours lose their brilliance and tend to grey The following table shows the relations Colour Hed Green Blue Cyan Magenta Yellow lV Jl SE Contaminating colour Cyan Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Oyan Yellow Magenta Cyan SilverFast Manual f 3 Addendum 453 Keystrokes in SilverFast Action Macintosh Windows Description of keyboard shortcuts and their respective counterparts COMAN M si sunu u suty bane es alan Command Apple Key e ETES PETTEE TEE CIL T T TT T Opion Alt Key Alt Key MC T ohif Key nananana nuanua Shift Key Cu M Pr Control Ctrl Key Control Ctrl Key MCU a ra Aa akir SA 20400201 a d sees Return Enter Key Heturn Enter Key zo CMT Escape Esc Key Escape Esc Key ScanPilot ImagePilot Apply Execute current tool Return ALL ee e Ras Return Scroll Next action hk Up and Down arrow Up and Down arrow Prescan scan Preview process Stop prescan stop scan Command Period Strg Period Switch to ot
328. of Layers Change order By clicking onto the double arrow buttons the stapling order of the layers will be changed If you have e g four layers you can move layer number 4 under layer number 3 by clicking onto the left pointing double arrows The layers will swap positions with each other If the layers have masks you may get unwanted effects when parts of the masks overlap in the two layers Since the mask areas will be calculated over all layers the result can be a totally different colour than expected Mask areas not overlapping other masks will remain unchanged eater Cos Cree sacr 9 Fo camo 1 oe E REKAT W E P TT Lt wp um e Type f cub CM1Zz Presets Save 4 Mask Body cea HE 58 Eh 4 96 Moving Layers Here layer 4 will be moved before layer 3 The masks which have been applied to both layers overlap in the area of the emblem By moving a layer the emblem s colours get changed LEE 1 8 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction SilverFast Manual Selective Color Correctior mq e S Type 9 CM6 CM12 Presets Save 3 Mask No mask H4 gt ie eo nS lm r ACR Slider In middle position ACR does influence the image very little Moved to the left the image will get desaturated Moved to the right the image will get much more saturated
329. of your corrections Additional Buttons in the Dialogue Window Clicking the Reset button will reset all settings and will also switch the orange automatic mask off After a reset the warning icon auto mask off will appear as a reminder This button will switch the appearance of histograms for lt _ gt a monitoring between RGB tonal values 0 to 255 and CMY m percentage values O to 100 The button will only switch the appearance and will have no influence on image quality or any other changes ae lt aj The pop up menu Save allows saving of custom Delete ave highlight shadow points for the orange mask proc ess or loading of previously saved EREE N orange mask H S points Negative 2002 Red f Cancel OK Negative_2002 Red Y Archiv ZR green Delete SilverFast Manual 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives 227 Shadow S a xi EE Original view View after clicking the zoom 3 times Highlight Setting Orange Mask Highlight Shadow points The lower part of the Expansion dialogue monitors the position of the orange mask highlight shadow points within the 3 dimensional HSL colour space Both highlights and shadows will normally have a visible colour cast The auto mask will recognize and remove this cast The position will be displayed within the square colour space and within the vertical luminance field The vertical fields indicate
330. oft ware e g Photoshop requires 3 to 4 times the amount of RAM than the image requires Batch scanning to disk of very large TIFF files requires only minimum RAM Installation requires at least 60 MB of free hard disk space Appearance Manager You can change the image of the Finder and other programs by using the Appearance Manager only if installed in the operat ing system The Appearance Manager must be installed for the proper functioning of SilverFast version 6 Removal of Macintosh 68k Support Starting with Version 5 of SilverFast the older Macintosh models with 68k processors will no longer be supported The computing performance of these processors is not sufficient for providing a timely acceptable work flow with SilverFast SilverFast Manual 1 2 Installation 19 Windows SilverFast PC works with Windows 98SE Windows ME Windows XP or Windows 2000 and requires at least 128 MB of available RAM Installation requires at least 60 MB of free hard disk space 20 1 2 Installation SilverFast Manual Scanner Interfaces SCSI SCSI IDs 0 and are not supported by SilverFastAi These IDs are normally used by the start volume and the SCSI host adapter USB In general SilverFastAi will require the appropriate USB drivers for USB scanner These will be installed with the manufacturer s origi nal installation which has to be installed first if not indicated other wise in the Silve
331. om the scanner manufacturer The profiles generated by SilverFast have the following naming convention SF_R Scanner name or SF T Scanner name Where the R stands for reflective and the T for transparency In brackets after these again are the scanner names Profiles of hardware manufacturer do not follow standard structure You will mostly find the name of the device where the file suffix is ICC or icm does not have any significance since the internal format is fully compatible 420 71 Addendum SilverFast Manual Profiles for ColorSync __ I Scanner Transparent Internal Gray Output Printer Rendering Intent Embedded ICC profiles Embed ICC profile Profile to embed 4 Plug amp Play CMYK Etr sammma Apply Scanner Reflective lt NON E gt NONE lt NONE gt v Adobe RGB 1998 AdobeRGB1998 icc AppleRGB icc CIERGB icc ColorMatchRGB icc EW Adobe RGB EW Apple RGB EW CIE RGB EW ColorMatch RGB EW NTSC EW PAL SECAM EW SMPTE EW Wide RGB EW sRGB Generic RGB Profile icc LCD1850DX 28D96CCO icc NTSC1953 icc PAL SECAM icc ProPhoto icm Profiles for ColorSync Scanner Reflective Scanner Transparent Internal Output Printer NONE NONE lt NONE gt Generic Gray Profile icc Internal The internal colour space is independent from any device con nected and is defined by a profile This
332. omatically stored 7 SilverFast Calibration File SilverFast Folder For IT8 target calibration if available there are two calibration files one for reflective and one for transparency 8 JobManager Files Job Folder SilverFast s JobManager saves its files into the Job Folder Units of Measurement cm inch Pica Point Pixel otarting with version 5 all SilverFast plug ins will come with supple mentary measuring units In addition to the prior cm and inch there are now also pica point and pixel that you can choose from in the frame file card To switch simply click on the icon of the measuring unit cm punkt pica piel neh B pom bi 4 3 8 1000 fla 38 inch Q Factor Screen Mbyte 1 5 157 Ipem M2 B yo 600 dpi dpem E EB e URL RN Lord 52 3 Presets SilverFast Manual Options Dialogue Before scanning with SilverFast please enter the specific settings __ J Gen ral Frame Densitometer _ Densitometer jn the General settings palette under the Options dialogue These preferences are automatically incorporated into the next a scan operation f Scan RGB 4 Quit a J TT Prescan E A Attention The default dialogue windows differs from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging softwares General Defaults Dilip pilini Ganarat
333. on The path to save it into using Windows XP is Under Windows profile descriptions C Windows System32 Color sme do not correspond to profile name 2m To make sure you do not unvolentarily un acad select profiles you do not want move C Windows System32 Spool Drivers Color those profiles temporarily out of the n Windows System Colour directly into sama a new directory folder seme 430 71 Addendum SilverFast Manual Example Settings SilverFast Photoshop 6 In ADOBE Photoshop 6 all colour settings have been integrated into one menu under Colour Settings It seems more complicated on first look but has become clearer structured in reality Once set up you can save all as one setting and if required exchange with other settings Please carefully read the corresponding pages in your Photoshop manual Color Settings Settings P56 4c Screens GW 200701 T Working Spaces RGB KalibProfil aw 040101 gt CMYK Eurostandard Coated 12 GCR Maxim Gray Dot Gain 15 Spot Dot Gain 1536 T Color Management Policies RGB Preserve Embedded Profiles CMYK Preserve Embedded Profiles Gray Preserve Embedded Profiles E Profile Mismatches v Ask When Opening v Ask When Pasting Missing Profiles v Ask When Opening Description PS6 4c Screens GW 200701 Separation f r Screenshots mit GCR Maximal und 1296 Tonwertzuwachs
334. one paper e g letter format It is important that all scans get exactly the same frame size Mark each scan frame with the full name of the image file respectively The test chart can now be printed and evaluated Evaluation of results Which image resp which screen will get the best result with the current paper Where can you distinguish fine resolution just about What is the optimum screen Notice how rapidly file size increases with higher line screens In reality the limit for recognizing any enhancement in print quality will be between 40 to 50 It will be interesting to see the comparison print of the same image file on different paper or other printers SilverFast Manual f 3 Addendum 451 v Selective Colour Correction Colour in Colour Correction oelective colour correction was developed for high end scanners and consists of a changing colours within a colour The colours red green blue cyan magenta and yellow are corrected The cast colour can be reduced and the current colour can be increased The cast colour of red is cyan of green is magenta of blue is yellow cyan green blue black white red The diagram above shows the relationship between colours The primary colours red green and blue have opposite colours as their complementary colours The neutral tones between black and white lie on a grey axis 452 7 3 Addendum SilverFast Manual Colour M
335. onitor 47 Image overview 348 Image overview dialogue 42 ImagePilot 40 110 Prefs button 110 Image settings 409 Image settings dialogue 292 Brightness mid tones 293 Colour 292 Colour distortion reduction 293 Contrast 293 Exposure 292 Light source 292 Pipette 292 Realtime Histogram 293 Saturation 293 Settings 293 Smoothing of luminance 293 White balance 292 Image type 74 Image type presets 39 Import 28 Improving the sharpness of artwork 199 inch 52 Index 355 Index scan 42 235 348 Info button 40 Input gt Internal 62 Input dimensions 39 Installation 17 18 Installing SilverFast Plug in 22 SilverFast as a TWAIN Module 25 Internal gt Monitor 62 Internal gt Output 62 Interpolation of scan resolution 54 IPTC 266 271 272 274 283 298 314 See SilverFastDC Load 283 Save 283 ISRD 369 371 See SilverFastiSRD ISRD dust and scratch removal with infrared technology See SilverFastiSRD IT8 calibration 42 222 253 262 336 433 Barcode 435 Coloured IT8 button 433 Differences in calibration between a Sscanner and a digital camera 437 Grey IT8 button 433 IT8 calibration with SilverFastDCPro 336 IT8 reference folder 435 IT8 target 337 433 Charge number of IT8 targets 439 Identifying the IT8 target 434 KODAK IT8 targets 435 Reference data file 434 Reference data file 434 Reference data file not found 435 Steps of a calibration with SilverFastDCPro 337 J JM JobManager See SilverFastJobManager Job 344 Jo
336. ons indicating the current correc tions and the output format chosen Execute auto adjust before scan sn Gradation curve changes in Fi effect E Selective colour correction el active p RGB output format selected E Lab output format selected E CMYK output format selected Icons representing actions with reference to the Job Add the active frame from the preview Add all frames from the preview Hn Add images from image over view dialogue window filmscan ners only Li Activate VLT SilverFastDC HDR versions only Wr Delete the job entries selected Edit parameters of the job entry selected Copy job entry parameters Select all job entries FETEH SilverFastJobManager Tools SilverFast JobManager Menu Referring to actions with relation to com plete jobs such as saving and loadin Name of current job A star indicates whether a job has been changed JobManager B QuickTime C Launch tutorial movie Job Untitled 1 Toronto HDR No Filter 0 9 x 1 4 inch 100 0 1 00 0 1255 dpi 5 97 MB Image information File name Treppe Active filter No Filter 6 0 x 5 9 inch 100 095 100 095 507 dpi 22 31 MB Output dimensions scaling Horizontal and vertical Treppen a No Filter 1 4 x 0 9 inch 100 0 100 0 Output resolution file size 2700 dpi 25 62 MB Ulm j No
337. ons now allows ie complete retouching of images This 16bit based retouching tool is an excellent supplement to Si verFast with its implemented SRD function Major defects and severe scratches on the image may easily be removed or corrected Furthermore even entire areas of the image may be removed retouched altered etc Clicking on the Clone button left of the pre view window opens the according dialogue Size and shape of the clone tool may be adjusted in the upper part of this dialogue by means of verti cal and horizontal sliders Clicking on the palette next to the preview of the tool will open a context menu that contains differ the preview window and may further be altered by Pixel Cloning 1 wr p a 0 20 4 0 20 Inch Opacity n 80 Auto color Auto texture Undo Counter 0 Undo OK f Cancel ent preset tool tips The selected tool tip appears in e e means of the sliders An open lock enables asymmetric tool shapes The lock should remain open while cloning otherwise it will jump back into its previous symmetrical shape The opacity of the clone tool can be changed by using the slider in the middle of the dialogue 7 un T ry r e 3 rawe IMs SilverFast Manual 6 15 Clone tool 401 The correction id performed in three steps Select source Find target Clone with Alt key pressed with pressed mouse button First the i
338. ontrol possibilities of the curve points in the gradation dialogue If the Command key Strg key for Windows is pressed while dragging the curve points track points in the gradation dialogue the chosen curve point will automatically become active and all other curve points except 096 and 10096 will become passive After dragging the original condition of the active and passive points will return to their prior settings Upon pressing the Ctrl key Alt key for Windows the clicked curve point can only be shifted in a vertical direction Marking the Condition of Gradation Points On Off Starting with version 5 of all SilverFast plug ins the last entered command of the individual tracking points of the gradation curve will be saved up to the next change The condition of the active filled in black or passive empty tracking points will remain and is also available after restart 152 5 4 Gradation curves SilverFast Manual Extended Gradation Curves Extended gradation curves allow the generation of complex curves The gradation curve points can freely be moved both horizontally and vertically Even the most complex gradation curves can be generated in this way Loading Photoshop Gradation Curves Gradation curves which were generated by Photoshop can be loaded by means of the import function within the pop up on top of the channel selector Curve_16903 Cyan 3 4 Mag 15 Yel 5
339. onven tional black and white negatives and slides these CANNOT be retouched using SRD However special black and white negatives which have been developed using the C41 process behave like colour negatives and are SRD compatible Activating iSRD Since SAD is an additional function within SAD it is activated and deactivated in the same way by clicking the relevant button on the vertical button bar to the left of the large SilverFastAi preview window SRD ISRD is deactivated SRD ISAD is active and running in automatic mode SRD ISRD is active and running in manual mode Clicking the bottom button opens the dialogue iSRD Automatic Mode In automatic mode iSRD works completely autonomously and the ISRD automatic mechanism covers the entire content of the active scan frame The user does not need to enter any settings but the effect of SRD cannot be seen in advance in the large SilverFastAi preview window This is only possible in manual mode 394 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD SilverFast Manual iSRD Manual Mode In order to start SRD ISRD the final scan frame output resolution must always be set in advance If manual mode is activated it is possible to decide whether to work with SRD or just with the normal SRD by checking the rel evant box in the dialogue The subsequent steps are the same as those described in the section on SRD Prescan button Auto button select the area to be analysed in the naviga
340. option is deactivated the proportions of the image may not be changed only size position and orientation may be altered Text tools With the help of this feature any text may be added to images and additional text may be entered and placed freely on the print page Saving loading and exporting The page layout may be saved re loaded for future use and also be exported together with the images QuickTime movies A short video that introduces PrinTao SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 309 Adding text to images In PrinTao a very high performance text tool is contained which T hides itself behind the button with the T By clicking a selection menu opens Deis za Attention Here one can specify any picture text noci cc a This function is available in the Pro and Studio versions which will be shown outward at an edge of the picture only and operate only under Mac OS 10 3 or nawer to provide a freely positionable text field for layout purposes e to add copyright notes as text within the picture The text dialogues can be opened directly by double clicking upon a placed image or an existing text box In combination with the free placing and scaling of the pictures on the print pages one has a functionality which is attainable other wise only in layout programs mnn Hn Frere T PrinTao WB ic a Text editor Text panel mpn l i 22 md Pia be a di a T 1 af
341. or colour cast removal means that the colour cast will be retained A value of 100 means that the colour cast will be completely removed Eto ar f you would like to remove a colour cast by manually dragging eros the slider to an individual histogram the automatic function is of rm cgo course eliminated The indicator panel for the colour cast removal is then crossed out i dats Furi liar d 1 Raises Mara E ar l r ma Enam n inf arate FS You can change the presetting of optimal values for automatic colour cast removal in the dialogue Options Auto Colour Cast Removal 198 5 3 Histogram SilverFast Manual o C Cane GOD Histogramm not opti mised Wn M x DO Color Space Compression nme Calar Cait Ri m yal G im X 2 Cancel GD Histogram optimised cyan only Optimising a Histogram Manually In the left image at the bottom of this page we have fixed the den sitometer on the white area which should become a neutral white The values displayed show that a slight touch of red C11 M17 Y16 is present We now want to eliminate the reddish cast and generate a neutral white of a value of 5 5 5 and start with the cyan channel first seo P3 3 hal Th ti a Optimising the Cyan Channel in the Histogram Click on the cyan button Now we move the highlight triangle in the cyan channel towards the beginning of the first cyan pixel
342. or different formats Here the but tons for the middle formats 6x4 5 6x6 6x and 6x9cm are shown Film Holder for Panorama Captures oome film scanners are delivered with special holders for pano rama formats In our example the button for a regular 35mm film 35 as well as the button for 35mm panorama 35P are differentiated By clicking on the respective button the mode is changed Batch Scans for Automatic Document Feeders ADF Films and slides can automatically be scanned in with the help of automatic document feeders slide feeders APS adapters etc olides can be scanned directly to Photoshop batch mode or a fixed disk batch mode file with or without automatic imaging Proceed as follows after the document has been inserted or the slide magazine has been loaded and inserted SilverFast Manual 23 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives Scan Mode 1 Batch Mode Normal File Batch Mode File B Original W Reflective Transparency Document feeder o E f Scan RGB Quit gt 3 Automatik with ADF 4 _ gt f Prescan Scan Bateh Quit b 5 E Choose Batch mode or Batch mode File from Scan mode in the General palette This switches to Document feeder under Original and acti vates the adapter automatically Load the first slide or picture by clicking the mouse on the button for load image
343. or example The slides of the magazine 1 3 and 5 12 In this case a total of 10 slides 240 6 8 Film holder SilverFast Manual 6 9 File formats in SilverFast Saving different File Formats The following table shows the formats that can be generated with programs of the SilverFast family SilverFast SilverFast SilverFast SilverFast SilverFast SilverFast SilverFast SilverFast File format Channels data dep
344. orner of the highlight shadow tool the black triangle will appear Search for the darkest point on the image by observing the densi tometer reading then click on the image in the prescan 989 100 9 99 gt 100 go 100 Note how the CMY values on the right side of the densitometer are set to 100 Now the highlight and shadow values for this image are set Highlight Shadow Reset Please note that in printing Macintosh the highlight shadow values should not be set to O or 100 percent To reset the highlight shadow values press the Alt key and because in printing white should click on the pipette of the highlight shadow tool have a printing dot between 3 10 and black between 90 98 On the next pages you will see this more clearly Press Alt key and click on the pipette icon in the tools palette Windows 124 5 2 Pipette SilverFast Manual Setting Midtone In order to define a midtone neutral point click on the pipette like icon of the highlight shadow tool the cursor becomes a grey rectangle Move the tip of the rectangle over the colour you want to be neutral grey and watch the densitometer select CMY reading Q40 gt 23 939 gt 23 a I I 1 sd I I I I LI E a The densitometer reading before might be C27 M25 Y18 Now click onto the desired spot in the prescan and you will see how the CMY colours become the averaged value of C
345. orrection b Button for opening dialogue window Grey background indicating Colour correction is active Selective Color Correction n g n eE C1 asy s p Type CM6 cmi2 Presets Save EH Mask No mask m HACR O m n aa e Cancel 2 OK b OK Apply settings and close dialogue Reset Reset all Reset Settings By pressing the Alt key all parameters are reset Cancel Close dialogue and don t apply settings Layers Single Layer panels Type CM6 or CM12 Switch between 6 colours or 12 colours Presets Save or load settings Mask Save or load Masks Overview Colour Sectors arrows Q Only with CM12 available Showing other channels which are further right or left Colour Matrix Colour table for all Colour sectors Changing all Colours When active all colours of the selected sectors can be made brighter or darker by dragging with the mouse from the inside or outside of the colour wheel Active Switch Indicator e e Green Sector is active Red Sector is not active HSL Controls Change by holding the small triangle at the top or button of the control depressed ACR control Switch ACR On Off SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 159 Selective Color Correction m c E lll e EZ Type cM6 CM12 Presets Save B Mask No mask gt iZ e
346. ory size This is mainly used by SilverFast HDR DC and DCPro where for example the conver sion of RAW data takes up much space while this data is only of temporary interest e Full Screen Preview Only with SilverFastDC HDR The full screen preview mode can be selected in the presets as full screen or 1 1 display In the VLT these settings can be changed temporarily at any time A Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software 66 3 Presets SilverFast Manual Super Fine Scan Some scanners that use multiple CCD rows may deliver images with lines in the shadow parts Activating the Super Fine Scan mode results in the scanner using only one CCD row the oth ers remain deactivated e Prescan Without Auto Focus This function deactivates the auto focus only for the large pres can The prescan will be significantly faster for some scanners The auto focus will be used only in the final scan as long as the focus button is activated respectively EZA The prescans that are generated within the filter dia logues USM De screening SRD etc are independent of the prescan without AF function and are treated as final scans if the focus is activated then the focusing will be done e Automatic Orientation Detection Activating this option allows some film scanners to automatical
347. other colour space the measured values in the densitometer will be convert ed to the values of the selected colour space CMYK Values Visible on the Prescan refer also Permanent Softproof page 91 In all Full Versions of SilverFast the CMYK output values can already be seen on the prescan itself In case no ICC separation profile is chosen in SilverFast the Photoshop separation settings will be used for the densitometer display If however an ICC profile is selected this profile will be used for the densitometer display This is done for both the floating single densitometer as well as the multiple densitometer fixed pipette If a CMYK profile is selected in SilverFast a small button in C M Y and K colour is shown left of the colour before after display in the densitometer window This button is the activation of the softproof display on the monitor Simply press this button to activate or de activate this function The condition fort his is that the scan button shows Scan CMYK After a short calculation the CMYK colours will be simulated on the prescan By this method it is possible to predict the final separation values derived from the Photoshop or the ICC profiles SilverFast Manual 6 1 Densitometer 195 Densitometer 175 Gamut Warning 1 we gt I ooo B 1 I j O Fixed Pipette eo LA a lt i Ge 34 ae 9s 2s gt 2
348. ouches some parts of the scan frame Lasso and polygon tool are applicable in both the 6x and the 12x matrix Selecting a Mask Tool Lasso mask tool By clicking and holding the mouse over the lasso tool you will get i Polygon mask tool a pop up with the other mask tools Still holding the mouse you can now change to one of the other mask tools and release the mouse The mask menu immediately switches to New mask extend mask icon New mask Change mask order to enable immediate drawing Invert lt Move gt lt Delete gt Mask 1 car right flower SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 167 New Mask with Lasso Tool The active region of the mask has to be drawn in one move while a holding down the mouse button Upon releasing the mouse button the region of the mask designated in this manner will immediately be furnished with the already programmed selective colour correction or the correction to be made will immediately be applied to the active surface area A Save dialogue will appear immediately m a after the symbol so the mask may be saved New Mask with Polygon Tool The active mask area will be defined by subsequent single mouse pe clicks A line is drawn from mouse click to mouse click Complet ing the geometric area is achieved by clicking the start point of the Polygon again The region of the mask designated in this manner will immediately be furnished with
349. ouse The mouse pointer will change accordingly if the mouse is parked above a guide line i Delete Guide Lines AL d The guide line simply needs to be dragged outside of the print page document in order to delete Alternatively a command from the context menu right mouse click will do the same job Show Hide Guide Lines Via a command from the context menu right mouse click the guide lines will be shown or hidden Alternatively the state of the guidelines can be toggled via F7 The guide lines loose their magnetic behaviour if not shown on the print page 326 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual S Prinfao N z Ur Magenetic Guide Lines Suo m If the edge or center of an image approaches a guide line i the image will be protracted to the guide line and engage there ein g gm iia g mas B m m CM REEUTENERTURENC ee ee TEPA HN UR M j Urin B Grid Frame By means of the context menu Win right mouse button or alternatively by the F7 Key a fixed grid frame will be displayed It consists of fine points and fills the entire print page Images may be aligned by means of their magnetic left upper corner to these points By means of a double click on the horizontal or vertical ruler the settings for the grid may be altered
350. ponse Foetal plane nesalurinn Focal plane Y resolution Fetal plane resalurian unir 5 bjeet Iaeatian Expas re index Sensing mether Fila source Serie type CFParrem Add all Image file name Image file path Current date Addall Exif Camera Li Ls k lata La Versionld LatitudeRef Latitude LongitudeRef Longitude AltitudeRef Altitude TimeStamp Satellites Status MeasureMode DOP SpeedRef Speed TrackRef Track ImgDirectionRef ImgDirection MapDatum DestLatitudeRef DestLatitude DestlongitudeRef Destlongitude DestBearingRef DestBearing DestDistanceRef DestDistance Exif Camera Exif Image a vay Y Iptc EXIF image displays a large menu for capture and image specific meta data GPS lists the meta data of satellite supported positioning which is integrated in some cameras SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 315 Template Templates here all entered settings can Save be saved as a set and reloaded at a later Delete time Bild Text_128 Saved sets can also be reloaded by enter EGUIUEEMESISEEE ing their respective names Apply to e Apply to In this menu the user can None choose which images are to be v Selected thumbnails furnished with text All thumbnails on this page All thumbnails on all pages Selected thumbnails The text printing can be deactivated No image applied only to selected images Chosen image
351. processing with SilverFastHDR SilverFastAi gt a 2 RGB SilverFast HDR can Embedded RGB ICC Scanner Profile Embedding a Scanner Profile into the 48bit RGB File SilverFast Manual 71 Addendum 425 4 Plug amp Play CMYK Scanning with Colour Separation LaserSoft Imaging AG has developed a new solution for high end separation through Plug amp Play CMYK A new and revolutionary technique solved the problem of separation because the CMYK preview always used to look too different from the final result Not so with SilverFast The following diagram explains the functionality of the new separation 1 RGB data is internally calculated to the hardware independ ent Lab colour space Monitor settings are taken into account The monitor should therefore always be adjusted properly see below 2 By using SilverFast separation as well as the Photoshop sepa ration profiles with help of the ICC profile we calculate via the Lab format into CMYK SilverFast Plug amp Play Separation RGB oe Lab Separation 3 Y ICC profile CMYK 426 71 Addendum SilverFast Manual Color Management _ Scanner gt Internal Internal Monitor ST THES Internal Output 1 Selection of monitor setting Color Management Input gt Internal ColorSync Internal Monitor Automatic Internal gt Output v RGB C _ Profiles for GalarSyac F Input P amp P CMYK Selec
352. quality factor and output line screen b Optical Resolution Depressing Ctrl key will display the opti cal resolution the scanner is using currently Every Scanner can only use certain optical resolution increments depending on the hardware Eg 300 600 1200 ppi but not 249 ppi SilverFastAi will always use the next higher hardware resolution here 300 ppi and will then interpolate down This way the full quality is pre served This way any loss in quality is eliminated c Interpolated Resolution To check whether the scanner does not interpolate up you can depress the keys Ctrl Shift Now you can see the internally used calculated or interpolated resolution Here all values are possible such as 249 ppi from our example above N Be alerted once the second value with Ctrl Shift is higher than the first value only with Ctrl This indicates the scanner would interpolate up and generate new pixels which are not present in the original image Moderate interpolation up to 1 3 times max optical resolution puts you on the save side normal ly depending on the quality of your scanner of course 448 7 3 Addendum SilverFast Manual Generally SilverFast inhibits Misuse by limiting the max reso lution to a factor of 2 or 2 5 Images with Varying Resolution 100 dpi 300 dpi SilverFast Manual 7 3 Addendum 449 Optimum Scan Resolution for Inkjet Printers In order to print image sca
353. r font and font size with a single command d Free text function 316 328 329 Any kind of text with arbitrary colour font and size can be placed e g on the top of the page or freely on the page 296 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual 5 Image Templates a Standard templates 319 322 From the standard set of templates any one template can be transferred to one or several pages Various pages can be modified with different templates Images can be transferred to a page s template via drag and drop or by a button Imag es in a template can all be replaced or individually replaced A template can be automatically assigned as the default for subsequent pages oingle images can be zoomed scaled inside the frame while the desired area can be selected b User defined templates 319 320 Current templates can be freely altered and saved as user defined templates It is also possible to create new templates and use them as user defined templates c Template generator 319 320 A template generator allows creation of templates for any amount of images on the page such as 3x3 or 5x8 or 7x7 pictures Existing generated templates can be altered freely and saved as user defined templates 6 Colour Management 331 Printer ICC profiles and rendering intent can be chosen and allocated to all pictures to be printed SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 207 A Attention This function is ava
354. r be liable for any direct indirect or consequential damages including economic loss even if LaserSoftImaging AG the distributor or authorized dealer has been advised of the possibility of such damage The licensee agrees that any liability of LaserSoftlmaging AG arising out of the usage of Si verFast whether in contract or in tort shall not exceed the amount paid by the licensee for the software involved 6 Trademarks SilverFast and the trademarks mentioned in the documentation are registered trademarks of LaserSoft Imaging AG or their respective owners The usage of these trademarks can only be permitted by LaserSoftlmaging AG or the respective owners 7 Ineffective Provisions Should individual provisions of this contract for any reason found to be or become ineffective or should a fulfilment discrepancy arise then notwithstanding this agreement shall remain in full force A provision that is closest in the scope of the legal possibilities of what the parties intended or if they had considered the provision would have desired shall replace the ineffective provision or the fulfilment discrepancy if necessary retrospectively 8 Amendments Amendments of this Agreement have to be in writing 9 Applicable Law Applicable law is the German law the United Convention of the International Sales of Goods CISG is hereby expressively excluded 1996 2010 Copyright LaserSoft Imaging AG Germany Luisenweg 6 8 D 24105 Kiel e Germany
355. r correction SilverFast Manual HSL Correction by Sliders Hue H click on the small triangle located at the end of the Hue pillar until you reach the desired correction Keep the Shift key pressed down in order to increase the correction speed Saturation S Comfortable adjustment of saturation Luminance L Comfortable adjustment of luminance SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 161 Selective Color Correction Djale e H aa Type CM6 C CM12 Presets dsfgsdfg HH Mask lt No mask gt HH ela HACR O gt Cancel OK N Md Green colour to be corrected Correcting an Image Selectively We will use an example to show how to selectively correct colour Go by the following steps to correct the green colour of the blouse and sari selectively 1 Click on the Selective colour correction icon in the Si verFast tool bar The dialogue on the left appears 2 Click onto the green blouse of the woman in the centre The colour circle and the HSL correction change to green 162 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction SilverFast Manual 3 Now move the cursor over green on the on the outer colour circle the cursor turns into a hand cursor with a minus sign inside 4 Press the mouse and drag towards the centre of the colour circle a line is pulled out of the green spot and the green becomes
356. r determining sharpness Si verFast will then scan an image detail in the final resolution that is selected The two small preview windows will show the scanned image detail the left one without the sharpen effect and the right one with it The sharpen parameters can quickly and easily be adjusted by using the slider strength and threshold as well as using the popup menu matrix All sliders are calculated in realtime e Strength this adjusts the intensity of the strength effect 0 500 Customary values are between 50 and 150 e Threshold the threshold value 0 10 determines where the sharpening of grey shades will take place normally between 2 10 e Matrix this determines the distance at which pixels are sharp ened to their Surroundings Larger pixel radii are only necessary with images having higher resolutions standard is 3x3 For an enlargement of 300 we suggest a matrix of 5x5 and from 600 on a matrix of 7x7 The selected parameters can be saved in the menu presets for Subsequent scans All parameters are returned to their default setting by using the reset button 200 6 2 USM Unsharp masking SilverFast Manual Zooming into the Preview In order to zoom into the preview please use the Pixel zoom Sim ply press the key to reach a maximum magnification of 8 j 1x amp l Zoomed Prescans Magnifying factor up to 8x The image of t
357. r mirror images 303 309 c Scale images 302 303 308 309 324 325 d Crop images 303 305 309 319 320 325 e Center images on printing page 302 303 309 f Align images with guides 326 327 g Fit images to page 302 303 309 h Zoom images inside their frames 305 325 i Adjust selected image part 305 2 Page Functions a Generate arbitrary number of pages 306 307 b Save and load pages with layout embedded 318 c Individual or sets of images can be 302 306 309 319 321 transferred to the printing page from the image list d Image dimensions can be set with priority 307 to either the long or short side e Images can overlap and be sent 306 307 309 328 329 to front or back SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 295 3 Page View a A page view can be zoomed 299 323 b Any page out of multiple pages can be 307 321 selected with a click of the mouse 4 Text Function a Text input can be attached to images 310 317 Position of text can be set to the left middle right above or under the image Alignment left centre or right is possible Fonts as well as font size and colour can be freely chosen b Attach text from meta tags to the image 314 316 Easily attach meta tag text e g image name or EXIF info to the image All texts may automatically be attached to the selected images c Copyright text function 310 317 Copyright text can be transferred to an arbitrary number of images with desired colou
358. r only some few pixels long red arrow for shadows Without Levels background looks too dark 122 5 1 Image auto adjust SilverFast Manual 5 2 Highlight Shadow Tool Highlight Shadow with Offset 0 Zz With the highlight shadow tool the brightest and darkest point 2 of the image can be specified manually For this tool a highlight offset and a shadow offset can be chosen in the Options Auto dialogue If the highlight offset value is set to O and the TENTENE shadow offset to 100 the highlight will be brought to 0 and the shadow Onset wo Jis shadow to 10096 The following example shows the usage with the densitometer readings Defaults General CMS Special Setting Highlight T To set the highlight click on the top left corner the mouse pointer i will turn into a white triangle and find the brightest point on which you want to set the highlight While moving the triangle over the image the densitometer displays the values Now click on the brightest point The densitometer will display O in the output display for CMY Qi gt 21 lz7 gt To s gt 14 s gt l 2o gt 15 20 gt T0 The brightness of the image immediately changes at this point Accordingly all other shades of the image will be influenced SilverFast Manual 5 2 Pipette 123 Setting Shadow 4 To set the shadow the darkest point click onto the down right 44 c
359. r the saving of the Si verFastDC albums SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 259 Defaults Setting the Cache Size General Aute CMS J Spani nm In order to convert large amounts of RAW data in the back Sint ground a respectively large cache memory size is needed LE ea S EN LL The conversion of RAW data means that a RAW data file is converted into an uncompressed 48Bit RGB Tiff format An example of a generous calculation of the expected memory assignment A digital camera with 6 megapixels delivers a RAW data file of about 6 MB Converted into 48Bit RGB this will mean a file size of almost 36 MB 6 MB RAW X 3 RGB 8 bit per channel X 2 RGB 16 bit per channel al ao If for example 100 RAW data files with an average size of 6 MB are converted the required cache size increases to around 3 6 GB An adequately large hard drive is recommended In case the capacity of the hard disk is reached while convert ing SilverFast halts and displays a corresponding message The user then has the chance to alter the assigned cache size in the Options Special dialogue Naturally SilverFast can continue without increasing the cache size If the limit is reached and additional files are to be con verted SilverFast overwrites the cache of an older image This happens analog to the cache memory as is done in internet browsers The older image thus loose its blue dot and the n
360. r use of the buttons within the palettes the user may decide il the text is to be printed in bold underlined or nale f finr The line pitch may also be adjusted transparent shadow can also be added and its intensity and alignment is adjustable 312 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Placement e Placement This popup menu addresses the Left Right Bottom FA placement of the text at the edges of the image Top ji Via the button on the right hand side the text can be rotated perpendicular clockwise with each mouse click Holding down the shift key will rotate anticlockwise K AA Prenat Prac n ao j men Pia Perey Pee Pee ae IN 3 Ao zd 3 p i PILIS La nari Hita 1 E ET E 3 3 Template min lar a j diz El LE j er Agph Ta 1 Sape Taidg Ez Tj E Urin Gada 1 1 mnm TET E e Siz a a wee SK 8 reve 1 b PR FF B hb bb b E b b AA Golden Gate E E e Spelling check By pressing the Ctrl key and clicking into the text window a sub menu for spelling and grammar may be activated Trl Fee A ryies Ta m an m pag el Libr J booa ls HET b up ell big Se OE 2 a Rechtechimtbaritung Cue ai lt Ca Tae Canli en Feci im dal Tien Fuu amp cw revyan con Men Tur Fasctichnestirwematung Sarih i pee grt Search in Conmglr Lote Lip in Dec Tin i Guess Cur dr ckt Copy gedr ckter
361. rFast Auto sharpen Pere prm is the basic default setting Default in SilverFastAi By this auto PONAN em Masking matic setting the unsharp masking is done with reference to the in SilverFast Ai and SilverFast HDR previously entered scan resolution In this setting unsharp masking is automatically applied to the problem that has been selected It avoids errors and has good result with most scans lf more or less sharpness is desired simply use the enhancing or reducing settings Manual USM aeoo In order to set the unsharp mask manually the following settings Original Scale Output have to be done first lt r 3 5 250 0 Ta 88 m set the scaling set the output frame and enter the final output t zs zma fy sy Cem resolution ker RABIB Seen ee The setting of the output parameters is absolutely 1 5 60 pcm T necessary for a proper function of the USM ss cc ds i Only after the above mentioned points have been done should the USM function be used in the filter menu in the frame pipette SilverFast Manual 6 2 USM Unsharp masking 199 want Jaza OW I nom wer f Cet 3 oc t SilverFast SE versions The dialogue is simplified in all SilvertFast SE versions and is recom mended for novice users First click on the Prescan button in the USM dialogue and then in the main window of SilverFast click on the picture area that is suitable fo
362. rFast Manual Sharpen USM is not Sharpened elix amp f Preview Unsharp Masking Parameters Intensity wem jm Threshold ep Oversharpen Sharpen up to edam 67 light Contour ed 4s Sharpened Monochrome 82 1 0 dark Contour ed Shadows soft vi Matrix 3x 3 Pixel H j V Presets lt Save gt rey Pa 4 Bw 3 eku sa f Cancel OK Manual USM in the Expert Dialogue Advanced users can use the extensive expert mode in order to set up optimal sharpening parameters A click on the small Expert button in the dialogue window will elongate the window and offer additional setting possibilities An additional click on the Expert button which is now red will bring the dialogue window back to its normal size Additional parameters e Over sharpening Reduces the generation of disturbing arti facts at the edges A value of Zero suppresses this generation completely but often delivers a seemingly artificial image Low values 10 20 allow slight artifacts to appear but the image appears more plastic and more natural e Sharpening up to will determine the percent value of the grey value 0 100926 A value of e g 8096 means that all tones below 80 will be sharpened The dark tones between 8096 and 10096 will remain unsharpened e Sharpen from only in negative mode Determines from which percentage greyscale sharpening will take effect 0 10096
363. rFast and set your dpi to the desired output resolution for printing we suggest a dpi between 200 and 300 SilverFast will then calculate the required scan dpi internally in order to perform the enlargement So even thought the dpi is set to 300 the scanner internally scans at a much higher dpi which can be monitored by pressing the Control key Name Name Untitled frame 1009 lt Untitled frame gt 1009 Original Scale Output Original Scale Output v 25 100 0 3 Ng 25 inh amp ss 1000 Ng 38 inch W ractor Screen M E e 22 228 dpi Effective resolution with 100 Interpolated resolution with 100 Effective resolution with 600 BI o R 2000 dpi Interpolated resolution with 600 Uneven Scaling of Images Images can be scaled with uneven horizontal and vertical propor tions In order to unevenly scale an image click on the black line connecting the horizontal and vertical scaling input fields to unlock it Type in the desired scaling into the appropriate field and click on the black line again to re lock Name Untitled frame Original Scale Output C 25 2000 l 50 inch oM MCI CK lt b 2 8 poo Na 152 inch Click to open for Q Factor Screen Mbyte uneven scaling 13 60 Ipem 3 77 mi ac ene 228 dpi SilverFast Manual 3 Presets TT Proportional Scaling Proportional Scaling while Keeping Output
364. rFast Ai CD Read Me Attention For Windows 98SE 2000 ME the system file usbscan sys must be there c Windows System32 drivers usbscan sys The file USBSCAN SYS will normally be installed with the windows installation It may sometimes happen that some Windows instal lations do not install the file in this case post install the file Only then Windows can recognize your USB scanner FireWire In general SilverFast Ai will require the appropriate FireWire drivers for FireWire scanner These will be installed with the manufacturer s original installation which has to be installed first if not indicated otherwise in the SilverFastAi CD Read Me SilverFast Manual 1 2 Installation 21 Installing SilverFast It is now possible to use SilverFast without the aid of any additional applications with the new SilverFast Version 6 To do this the SilverFast Stand Alone Program SF Launcher for opening Photoshop Plug ins is installed automatically If possible SilverFast installs its self directly into the Photoshop directory By means of a Link an Alias SilverFast can directly access the Plug in If Photoshop is not installed on the computer SilverFast will be installed into the directory of the SFLauncher ae SF Launcher v2 0 0 The big advantage is the Si verFast Stand Alone Application SF Launcher needs very little memory to run 2 4 MB Also in SilverFast x Launcher Fa comparison to Photoshop the star
365. rayscale corrected tif JPEG JPEG2000 DCS EPSF PSD Kodak PhotoCD CRW Canon CR2 Canon CS Sinar DC2 Kodak DCR Kodak DNG Adobe ERF Epson HDR Leaf K25 Kodak KDC Kodak MOS Leaf MRW Minolta NEF Nikon ORF Olympus PEF Pentax PEF Samsung RAF Fuji RAW Leica RAW Panasonic SRF Sony TIFF Phase One X3F Sigma RGB 24 Bit colour tif RGB Cie Lab 24 Bit colour tif RGB 48 Bit colour uncorrected tif RGB 48 Bit colour corrected tif CMYK 32 Bit colour tif CMYK 64 Bit colour tif All Tiffs afore mentioned alos with LZW K 1 Bit line art jpg K 8 Bit Grayscale jpg K 16 Bit HDR Grayscale uncorrected jpg K 16 Bit Grayscale corrected jpg RGB 24 Bit colour jpg RGB 48 Bit HDR colour uncorrected jpg RGB 48 Bit colour corrected jpg CMYK 32 Bit colour jpg CMYK 64 Bit colour jpg K 1 Bit line art jpf K 8 Bit Grayscale jpf K 16 Bit HDR Grayscale uncorrected jpf K 16 Bit Grayscale corrected jpf RGB 24 Bit colour jpf RGB 48 Bit HDR colour uncorrected jpf RGB 48 Bit colour corrected jpf CMYK single file 32 Bit colour eps CMYK multiple files 4x8 Bit Grayscale 1x 32 Bit colour eps K 8 Bit Grayscale eps RGB Cie Lab 24 Bit colour eps CMYK 32 Bit colour eps RGB 24 Bit colour psd YCC pcd RGB 48 Bit colour crw RGB 48 Bit colour cr2
366. rce a fixed colour temperature and a constant distance between the object and the sensor as well as an absolute array between object and sensor This is completely different with digital cameras Nothing is really constant or standardised leaving the camera much more flexible and therewith hard to calculate An IT8 calibration can be performed but strictly speaking lasts only as long as no changes are made to the surrounding fac tors These conditions are generally only found in photo studios table top or during repro photography They are strongly variable when working with changing light conditions outdoor photography etc Each deviation of the factors makes the calibration work for only one single photo If a light source is moved in a photo studio a new calibration photo is to be made In order to do this simply place a suitable IT8 target on a prepared stand into the photo to be taken and capture the IT8 target in the photo Then remove the tar get from the set and re shoot the photograph By this method two photos are taken first one for calibration and after that the actual photograph Professionals know the procedure with grey card tests the objective is the same with the steps described here 336 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual By means of one mouse Z N click into the IT8 Image of the dialogue window the frame is set bavck to the standard position bekie check the mad of TES
367. rent images may be scanned with the same machine e By means of the transparency unit film positives and negatives may be processed Even the film sizes do not matter as all formats may be placed on the scanner e Flat bed scanners with an integrated drawer for transparencies may utilize both a reflective and transparency unit for the same job at the same time Both scan areas may be fully fitted with images Even the combination of negatives and positives is pos sible e The scan area of flat bed scanners is huge in comparison with film scanners The orientation of the different images does not matter By using the JobManager is it easy to optimize the scan on the prescan itself and simultaneously bring the image to the desire output orientation A In order to avoid triple repetitions the descriptions of the individual JobManager functions are collected and thematically and are distributed among all areas of chapter 6 12 Is is highly recom mended to read about the full functionality of the JobManager AN Attention oome functions are only found with certain types of scanners 358 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual Processing time example Job order 2 color slide films each 36 slides having different brands A and F which were exposed individually thus do not represent a series are to be scanned includ ing color and gradation correction sharpening scaling A 900 B 200 output A at 228 dp
368. rofiles for ColorSync Scanner Reflective V NONE SF_R HDR SF_R HDR 6Jan2003 SF T Nikon LS 4000 Gray Scanner RGB Profile icc Scanner Transparent Internal Film scanner Only then option Scanner Transpar ency is available Profiles for ColorSync Scanner Reflective v NONE SF_R HDR Scanner Transparent SF R HDR 6 Jan2003 SF T EPSON 1640 Gray Scanner RGB Profile icc Internal Flatbed scanner with transparency unit Both options are available here Scanner transparency as well as Scanner reflective Profiles for ColorSync Scanner Reflective f NONE SF R HDR SF R HDR 6 Jan2003 SF_T Nikon LS 4000 Scanner Transparent Internal Gray Scanner RGB Profile icc Flatbed scanner without transpar ency unit as well as SilverFastHDR DC PhotoCD Again only one option is available Scanner reflective 2 Profiles for ColorSync ICM Only when you have chosen ColorSync ICM for colour manage ment you will have to select under ColorSync profiles the appro priate profiles for your device here Exception is with the menu option Internal gt Monitor which has to have an ICC profile allocated to under Internal Scanner Reflective Scanner Transparency Here you allocate the appropriate input scanner profiles which you have created with SilverFast or you have received fr
369. roved use the other sliders SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD 389 6 Slider Width This slider determines the maximum width of a scratch s vi Longish scratch removal Defect type C white sac In most cases the range for optimum recognition is between 1 and Orientation Horizontal vertical 5 Larger values will have wider and longish artifacts recognized vie With very wide scratches high resolution and wide artifact it is Continuity emm 4 sometimes necessary to enhance the image manually Length Original Width 1 Width 3 390 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD SilverFast Manual 7 Slider Contrast B Laut eda SENE his slider relates to the local contrast of the scratch against its Defect type L White Black background A very bright scratch on a dark background can Orientation Horizontal vertical i SHES EAS be recognized with a high contrast value In order to recognize a Width A s scratch that is barely visible against its background the contrast value must be set to a low value Smaller contrast values 1 to 5 in combination with small Length values 5 to 20 can lead to faulty recognition This might recognize small image details For this rea son the contrast value should be greater than 5 if possible 1 um z p TUM FA AT Au er EE A EXT EE Bey Ut r2 Lo
370. rrection If the arrow is blue any change will only be processed and dis played in the large preview after mouse has been released This can take a moment depending on the processing power of your computer The real time correction bypasses this problem If the arrow has turned red a small rectangular frame will appear on your image representing the area of real time correction This real time frame can be freely moved around in the preview window Any changes of SRD parameters will be displayed in close to real time inside the real time frame SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFast SRD iSRD 3 7 Manual Correction If the result of the SRD automatic is not sufficient and there are further corrections needed a few points should be observed Always start with bigger clearly visible artifacts and step by step while adding layers if required attack weaker less pro nounced artifacts For each layer only one set of parameters can be applied Multi layers and masks are only available in SilverFastAr In SilverFast SE and DCSE only one set of parameters and only one mask can be applied Initially use the first method of Dust and Scratch Removal and only when required with artifacts dominantly consisting of or resembling lines use the second method After all corrections have been completed click OK acknowledge the parameters set and leave the dialogue Now only the final scan 9 Prescan San RGB Y
371. rs will be shown in turn once Hi Changing Layers Switching By clicking onto the layer number you will switch to the desired layer with all its settings You will also see the masking that is active on this layer Masking marquees of other layers will be invisible The preview itself such as its colour representation will always stay the same when switching to other layers The changes that you will see are only those with reference to masking appearing in different locations of the preview Wht Cole Corre i Bekri Color Corm i I lule rg m Blu IV TIT RE Type ous Cu i T cud a Pacem Eae ej a Fea Xem LITT zb NNE E LEDC mat ae q BEZ MES HEJ ie 7 1 E H r H H HI m Ir I i Jd m 9 amp 5 E d KEL Nn EL E A H Ae i jf A I F ai L a ae tow VM Aca qag n e d I cm fo r ore fon A 3 nm 1 m E e E Selartiwe Coll Corto g a a ka o l LIEST ra A TRI Jg TD CL t n gece I aE ERSTES qe A i d a Macr c ang n cree t n 3 Deleting Layers Each layer can be deleted by clicking onto the Delete button trash One layer will always have to remain The last remaining layer can not be deleted SilverFast Manual 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction 1 7 Moving
372. rt Print Documents as XML Files Templates in PrinTao Zoom and Scaling Functionality Help Lines and Grid Frames on Print Pages Creative Techniques Composing Images and Texts Context Menu right mouse click upon a Print Page Document Printer Setup Keyboard Shortcuts in PrinTao Opening an Image with the Open Button IT8 Calibration with SilverFastDCPro Differences in Calibration Between a Scanner and a Digital Camera Steps of a Calibration with SilverFastDCPro SilverFastHiRePP How much Time will be Saved How does HiRePP Function HiRePP is Especially Significant for Whom Furnishing existing Image Data with HiRePP 6 12 SilverFastJobManager Purpose of the JobManager Overview SilverFastJobManager Tools Differences in JobManager between SilverFastHDRH DC and SilverFastAi Using the SilverFastJobManager with Film Scanners and Film Strips Activating the JobManager There are Several Ways you can Produce Job Entries Image Overview of Inserted Film Strip Index Scan Selecting Desired Images Adding All Frames of the Preview Window Adding a Single Frame Deleting Job Entries Processing Job Entries SilverFastJobManager Workflow with Film Scanners The SilverFastJobManager with Flat bed Scanners The Difference to Working with Film Scanners The JobManager with SilverFastHDHR DCPro Differences in Working with Scanners Copying of Job Entry Parameters Copying of Complete Job Entries Managing Complete Jobs Work
373. ry is displayed next to It In case the cache is almost full it may be deleted or the cache size may be increased before launching BI 1 20 converted Clicking the green arrow commences the conver sion The arrow turns into a red square SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 263 The conversion is a background task allowing continuous use of SilverFast lf however the album is changed the conversion proc ess is stopped automatically The conversion status is displayed in the text next to the button It can also be seen from in thumbnails or the progress bar EE J CRW 4117 lt gt The conversion can be halted at any time by clicking the red square The square will then turn back into a green arrow EL If the RAW image has been converted its thumbnails in the album are marked with a blue dot on the upper left CRW 4116 Because SilverFast can do the conversion as a background proc ess the user has the possibility to continue his work at the same time This could be the continuation of editing previously converted images editing different albums or optimization of a different image in S lverFast s main dialogue 264 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Launching the Virtual Light Table VLT E Click on the vertical button bar left of the preview window the VLT icon The VLT opens immediately and fills the entire monitor The Silver
374. s With before and after preview the final scan sharpness can be monitored and nicely adjusted in real time The strength of the applied sharpness as well as the quality of the scanner used will have significant influence on the appear ance of dust and scratches A high quality scanner with good optical resolution hence very good sharpness will clearly bring out every image detail and dust and scratches Any additional sharpening might bring out exaggeration of the sharpness effect 374 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD SilverFast Manual Durt 15d fosinh Rem pel fn bleed SRD Dialogue c in SilverFastAi Dust and Scratch Remureal Navigator BORD aiinis 12 e ES AR 7 Ed Dust and Scratch Removal Delen Type MAn C Whine lack Hem 5 83 TTE ak No mask m FEME Ene e Preview f Cancel Ok j 6 Activating SilverFast SRD Click onto the SRD icon to open the S lverFast SRD dialogue In case you have a scanner with hardware supported descratch function such as DIGITAL ICE technologies you can switch between e g DIGITAL ICE technologies and SilverFast SRD All other scanners will only have Si verFastSRD The upper of the two buttons is intended to switch S lverFast SRD off When opening Si verFastSAD the first time you will see an empty Navigator window Please follow the instruction inside the Navigator window a Clicking on Preview initiate
375. s a preview scan whose resolution is related to the output resolution that has been set b Clicking on Auto analyses the image with SRD automatic Artifacts will be recognized and highlighted with red After you have deactivated Si verFastSRD and then reactivate the function the previous preview scan will come up again with all previous settings inside the control window In case the previous preview is not the one you want since you would like to work with another image which is already in the normal SilverFast preview window you have to a Click onto the SRD Preview and initiate a new preview scan and b click on Auto to start an new SRD automatic f Preview J Autos Cancel YE ok a and b SilverFast Manual 6 18 SilverFastSRD iSRD 3795 7 Navigator Working with the SRD preview dialogues Most of the image artifacts have already been identified by the SRD automatic mechanism step no 6 but no differentiation has been made at this stage between subject details and actual artifacts a process to be undertaken manually at a later stage In order to effectively monitor and check the results the whole image is divided into tiles in the Navigator window The Navigator window displays the position of each tile with regard to the image The size and number of tiles depend on the image size and output resolution set Using the Navigator The y
376. s are easily set onto the correct spots in and 10 bit SilverFast fig 3 SilverFast Manual 7 3 Addendum 445 Fig 1 Fig 2 Screen Resolution lpi In order to reproduce different shades of grey the printing technol ogy uses the screening technology A dot matrix is the most eco nomical way to produce shades of grey Screening Matrix of an image point simulating grey through single image setter dots An image dot from the scanner is transformed into a screening matrix in general a 16x16 Matrix If a screening dot is black up to 256 image setter pixels can be set in a screening cell In a screen of 152 lpi there are 152 screening dots in a line The unit of meas ure Ipi lines per inch is often confused with printer resolution The unit of measure for printer resolution is generally dpi In some countries locm lines per centimetre is the unit of measure for the image setter s resolution as well as for the screening frequency Once again the units of measure Printer resolution dpi dpecm Ipem Screening resolution lpi Ipcm The images on the left show the effects of different scanner and screening resolution Image 1 shows a normal scan with 220 dpi printed on a laser printer with 120 Ipi Image 2 shows an enlarge ment of a selection Image 3 shows a scan with very low resolution under 72 dpi printed with 120 Ipi Image 4 shows a scan from image 2 printed with a line screen of only 20 lpi
377. s in the world Imaging is becoming the premier and most significant technology as a translator between the human being s mind and the outside world It is indeed the form structuring character of the evolution that is bringing isolated bits and pieces together into a meaningful intelligent wholeness being recognized by us as an image When the ancient Veda says Knowledge is structured in con sciousness it is where we become aware of meaningful items which are images and thereby structuring knowledge in our con sciousness Science has recognized the imaging character of our brain as the source of our intelligence and the seat of conscious ness As imaging developers we are proud at LaserSoft Imaging to be adding at little piece to the exciting global enfoldment of the potential of consciousness Karl Heinz Zahorsky President and Founder LaserSoft Imaging AG Kiel February 2010 SilverFast Manual 1 Introduction 5 1 1 Content 1 Introduction Copyright SilverFast Software License Agreement Dear SilverFast User 1 1 Content 1 2 Installation System Requirements Macintosh Windows Scanner Interfaces Installing SilverFast Installing SilverFast Plug in SilverFast as a TWAIN Module Welcome Dialogue Launching and Activating SilverFast via Photoshop Launching and Activating SilverFast via SFLauncher SilverFast Feature CD For Problems while Entering the Serial Number Update Reminder QuickTime Movies 2
378. s removed Joining Presets for a Complete Correction e Any desired presets can be combined to a complete correction JORE A and saved under a specific name b saturation Ss Cacia 17832 Tae blue cyari yellow t FE SIALE By means of the import function saved parameters from other j a SilverFast products may be loaded and applied to the current ver TPO sion 1 The presets are loaded from the prefs folder of the SilverFast esses source version out of the file SFApp ES A Le ES Fem mm Z a n GQE eet m k uda 3p ance ee pentes uaa p a zE ee peni z CuxH 15 GE i emmin r 1 UI 28 166 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction SilverFast Manual Selective Calor Corection Working with Masks n niu n Normally all settings in the selective colour correction will effect the jan entire image frame wwe ew oou If you want to limit the correction to certain areas of the image you pcs gt have to apply masking The mask can be freely drawn with the mouse inside the preview a aA F HAL a E sm window ar 5 For assignment and containment of the current d selection a Lasso a Brush and a Poly EMO gon tool have been implemented faca mees After drawing a mask the colour corrections are applied within the Cancel OK activated area They are only visible if the active area alSo covers or t
379. s that y of paper paper white is taken to be 1 All colourimetric measurements are normalized based on the paper s colourimetry A colourimetric reproduction is provided for in gamut colours Out of gamut colours are mapped to the border of the reproduc ible gamut This has the advantage of providing a larger effective gamut so that bright colours will more likely to be in gamut It has the disadvantage of sacrificing exact colour matches for printers with different paper white points Example usage would be for spot colours where a colour repro duction relative to the paper s white is desired 3 Saturation oaturation relative colourimetry is used A reproduction in which saturation is emphasized In gamut colours may or may not be colourimetric Example usage would be for business graphics where saturation is the most important attribute of colour 4 Absolute Colourimetric Absolute colourimetry is used For reflection print this means that y paper white of printed paper is less than 1 A colourimetric reproduction is provided for in gamut colours Out of gamut col ours are mapped to the border of the reproducible gamut This has the advantage of providing exact colour matches from printer to printer It has the disadvantage of causing colours with y val ues between the paper s white and 1 to be out of gamut Example usage would be for spot colours where an exact colour reproduction is desired 424
380. s to SRD as applies to SRD Mask technology can be used for any layer see the previous section on SAD Examples e iSRD in Several Layers Since masks always work within their specific layer it would be possible for example to create two layers which both use SRD but work with different levels of correction on specific parts of the image e Combining iSHD and SRD The first layer uses SRD in the entire image for basic correc tion A second layer uses SAD possibly in combination with a mask to remove residual artifacts which iSRD was not able to remove completely Warning Multiple layers and masks are only possible in the full versions not the SE versions 396 6 13 SilverFast SRD iSRD SilverFast Manual Use of Freehand Masks in SRD Freehand masks in all shapes and sizes can of course also be used in SRD which then only works within the mask areas drawn Please read the previous section on SAD for details of how to use the masks will e alaa TI en Terak F zu atten li cenas ml Crimi ypt Cpa Dasi moar reser Tames nori ii or La 4 Ge Ge a a la IBE Galea ls c Infrared Channel Display Once the software has completed the infrared and RGB scans an additional image channel created automatically from the infrared image is used for the dust and scratch removal calculation On completion of the calculation the results can be displayed in the large preview win
381. scanning with Drag amp Drop will quickly run into limitations It is therefore recommend ed more for scanning of smaller pictures file size In addition drag amp dropped scans are restricted to RGB mode Switching Scanners The General palette in the main dialogue of SilverFast contains an additional pop up menu called Device It lists all devices found This pop up menu is the same menu that you may reach when you click the title line of the preview window while keeping the Ctrl key pressed SCSI The number of the buses and the SCSI IDs are indicated with SCSI devices You can simply switch from one to the other when several devices are connected The entry search devices offers you the choice of using a scan ner added after the computer was started and therefore not includ ed in the list USB and FireWire The entry search devices is missing here because all devices are already recognized when SilverFast is started 80 3 Presets SilverFast Manual 4 SilverFast Prescan Design This chapter introduces into the core design of SilverFast All con trols rely on what you see and monitor on the prescan This con cept of working with a low res image and a greater than 8 bits per colour dynamic range is substantially different from other concepts of optimising images 4 SilverFast Prescan Design SilverFast Prescan Concept Realtime Processing The Prescan Concept Advantage SilverFast Pr
382. se the correct calibration profiles for both transpar ent and reflective images After clicking the OK box of the CMS dialogue the IT8 calibration is activated j Options 436 7 2 T8 calibration SilverFast Manual Differences in Calibration Between a Scanner and a Digital Camera When calibrating a digital camera several factor have to be taken into account The great advantage of scanners is that they work with almost constant conditions it has an almost constant light source a fixed colour temperature and a constant distance between the object and the sensor as well as an absolute array between object and sensor This is completely different with digital cameras Nothing is really constant or standardised leaving the camera much more flexible and therewith hard to calculate An IT8 calibration can be performed but strictly speaking lasts only as long as no changes are made to the surrounding factors These conditions are generally only found in photo studios Tab letop or during repro photography They are strongly variable when working with changing light conditions outdoor photography etc Each deviation of the factors makes the calibration work for only one single photo If a light source is moved in a photo studio a new calibration photo is to be made In order to do this simply place a suitable IT8 target on a prepared stand into the photo to be taken and capture the IT8 target in the photo
383. sents the L a b colour space which contains all visible colours Obviously there are limits to the ability to display the same data on different devices the same way The different colour spaces have varying dimensions i e displaying different amount of colours Also the colour shades they can display are varying This is result ing in colour deviations from the conversion The colour space SRGB which Photoshop offers as a default colour in its set up is very small so that even the small colour space of a printer will not be properly rendered sRGB colour space is still big enough for any monitor Monitor making SRGB a suitable colour space for the internet For any documents containing images which have to be printed SRGB is not suitable Use Apple RGB or Adobe RGB instead CIE RGB sRGB 0 8 Monitor colour space Printer colour space 0 6 in E i 04 E 02 02 0 4 0 6 Ha rmFarbwertantei x SilverFast offers different possibilities for work flow integra tion On the system level under ColorSync Mac or ICM Win dows98 2000 XP or in with integration into the application in general as realized with Photoshop CMYK output can already on the preview be checked by SilverFast s softproof function 416 71 Addendum SilverFast Manual The CMS Dialogue oc Clicking on the Options button in the General palette brings you to the basic settings dialogue Among others you will fin
384. sets the number of columns the Y value will set the Stanek number of rows In Example X3 x Y5 means 5 image rows with 3 frames each will be created on the template page Therefore it adds up to 15 frames overall Template Modifiers e Adapt Template Min Border 0 50 nis These are general parameters valid for all images within an Crop ta Fill activated template of the present print page document Rotate to Fit E B l Ii Fit to Papersize Minimum border specifies the minimum distance of the picture frames among themselves Crop to fill images will get cropped to the proportions of the present image frames Example A square frame is Supposed to contain a rectangle image This will result in a square clipping from the centre part of the rectangle image The top and bot tom edge of the image remain obtained just the left and right edges will get cropped When pressing the Shift key the visible clipping of the image can be moved inside the image frame Rotate to fit Images in portrait format will automatically get rotated in order to fit right into the landscape oriented image frame The same is valid for landscape formatted images and portrait formatted image frames Fit to paper size Will fit the chosen template to the adjusted printer paper size Chopiytoallages Apply to All Pages Will apply the present template to all selected print page docu ments e Undo
385. shadow triangles in the histogram Sise E r pu F js E PE W T The Position of the highlight and shadow point becomes obvious with position of the outer movable triangles These are somewhat inset from the edges of the complete tonal range here at 596 and 9396 Highlights and shadows still have detail information visible and are clearly distinct from the specular highlight 096 and the very black 10096 ab According to the general settings for Min and Max values under OPTION panel Auto menu Highlights at 96 and Shadows at 20 have been set the complete tonal range can be compressed for the output Values for Min and Max can also be changed for the actual scan frame directly in the histogram dialogue Both movable triangles Min and Max are serving this purpose The example has a min value for highlights set to 2 and a Maxi value for shadows set to 9896 Visible tonal values in the histogram occurring before the high lights O to 596 and after the shadows 93 to 100 will become O to 296 and 98 to 10096 with the compression Tonal values between white and black point 5 to 9396 will be projected in between Min and Max values 2 to 98 SilverFast Manual 5 3 Histogram 143 Compressing Colour Space via Histogram You can see a few examples of colour space compression with the help of the histogram in SilverFast Levels Channel CMYK Ei ER Input Le
386. smaller opti mised file which will not be readable from all applications and brings about limitations Progressive JPEG is a format favoured for the internet The file will be structured into several resolution layers During file transfers there will be a low resolution image visible immediate ly which will be refined with the progressing transfer until final resolution has been reached Saving into DCS File Format Single file All separation layers will be saved into a single CMYK file Multi file Each separation layer will be saved into a separate file plus one extra file for preview SilverFast Manual 6 9 File formats 245 Scan Mode Batch Mode Normal File TT TENT Del Whee Gl se k neban n H jPECADIO Mir lira JPEG 2000 Images may now be saved in the new UPEG2000 JPF format in all new SilverFast Studio versions This option may only be chosen once the scan process has been started and if the scan mode is set to Normal File or Batch Mode File has been selected Scan Mode Normal File or Batch Mode File These adjustments advise the software to scan the active frames automatically as a file on to the hard disk The setting in the save dialogue will determine which file format will be written The save dialogue will appear when the button scan or process is clicked File format You can choose between various file formats under For
387. so jes i a j Y Le ee em i E pF a a u K 609 5 lsa an 9 ton Example for the effect of the slider Each time one correction was undertaken in the shadow area In order to make it clearer the central image point in the colour circle was completely moved from the middle to the outside into the blue The window of the gradation curve shows the change according to the corresponding step of the slider SilverFast Manual 5 5 GCC Global colour correction 155 Range Selection for All 2596 50 75 Global Color Correction m 9 e en 9 D Gre 2 Global correction unchanged Colour Balance The colour balance is edited in the global correction dialogue We assume here that a colour cast has already been neutralised by the highlight shadow tools and should merely be modified in a few tonal ranges This is a gradation curve change Colour balance is used to correct the all over impression of the image It has to be presumed that highlight and shadows are already neutral and that it is intended to slightly shift the colour balance in the midtone or 3 4 tone For this purpose the global correction dialogue was designed F A 4 Li Li 12 25 50 75 87 100 Preview unchanged Gradation curve unchanged Resetting Colour Balance The movement of the gradation curves can only be reset in the gradation curve dialogue by clicking
388. ssional solution use respective measurement tools Internal Output Here you can define what type of data the printer will get from SilverFast Data to be transferred to the imaging application e g Photoshop can be in different formats CMYK and RGB files can have profiles embedded so the data will be matched to the print er s colour space accordingly RGB You can output data in RGB data format This setting is rec ommended for users having no Postscript but other printers or have no printer ICC profile or for those using their scans merely for internet or multimedia projects ColorSync ICM You are integrating your printer into the OS s col our management The appropriate ICC profile for your printer will be required Lab CIE L a b is a device independent colour space represent ing all visible colours Colour differences are not rendered very detailed and many colours cannot be displayed on a monitor see also graphic in introduction the curved rectangle repre sents Lab P amp P CMYK High quality system to get CMYK data directly from the 4 colour separation built into SilverFast To get precise colours it is vital to select the same CMYK colour space in Pho toshop defined by the same ICC profile as in SilverFast SilverFast Manual 7 1 Addendum 419 Color Management ColorSync Scanner Interna Internal gt Monito ColorSync k Internal gt Output ColorSync P
389. st SRD iSRD SilverFast Manual Drawing an inverted mask Depressing the Alt key with any of the mask tools activated will invert the mask function The mask will become kind of a negative mask Now encircle the area with the mask tool you do not want get affected by the correc tion This function is similar to the invert mask function from the mask menu Adding and subtracting from an existing mask After a mask has been drawn you can add or subtract from the existing mask Adding to mask Press Shift and draw desired addition Subtracting from mask Press Alt and draw desired subtraction E Active Mask with marquee Mask adapted with Shift and Alt 6 Working with multiple layers 5 za El ras Td When starting SilverFast SRD you will get the 1st layer automatically i On this layer you will perform the first corrections of coarser arti facts If the settings only enable to get rid of some of the artifacts the remaining artifacts should be treated on the next layer Start with the larger distinct artifacts and proceed increasingly layer bay layer to less distinct scratches and artifacts SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD 383 0 New layers can be added by clicking onto the Add Layer button You can have a maximum of four layers Double arrow buttons allow to move layers between each other Here you would change the order of stapling similar to the lay
390. t Manual 7 4 Index 473 Image settings 409 PrinTao Extended print dialogue of SilverFastAiS tudio 405 PrinTao dialogue 406 SilverFastDC 253 258 Album palette 267 Album window 2 8 Size of the album window 285 Alternative Opening of Images 256 Blue or Green Dots within the Thumbnails 2 7 Browser and Navigation Window 266 Cache 259 Cache size 260 Delete 260 Contact sheet 282 Conversion of RAW data files 269 Deleting images 295 Differences in Calibration Between a Scanner and a Digital Camera 437 Edit image comments 281 EXIF 284 Export albums 2 1 File browser 300 Hide Show button 268 Image settings 292 Internal RAW data conversion profiles 261 IPTC 272 IPTC image information in the album 283 JobManager 288 Magnifier 2 7 Manually selecting a camera specific ICC profile 262 Mark button 280 Open button 335 Overview window 268 Path for the Album Folder 259 Plus Minus buttons 26 Presets palette 267 Preview mode 270 RAW data formats 259 286 Re naming dialogue 2 3 Add IPTC to file 274 Add the old index number to the name 274 Image list 2 3 Settings for new names 2 3 Subsequent Automatic Renaming 276 Remove red eyes 291 Search button 269 Show EXIF data 277 SilverFastDCPro 254 SilverFastDCProStudio 254 SilverFastDCSE 254 SilverFastDCVLT 254 258 System requirements 259 Unloading Camera Storage Media 2 1 Original 273 Output 272 Path 272 Possible actions 275 Preview 273 Re naming Exa
391. t In SilverFast a variety of methods can be used to manually optimise the histogram a By Observation of Image Display While moving an end point in the histogram the image will be updated in the scan frame in realtime showing the effect of the adjustment immediately b By Observing the Densitometer Readings While moving an end point in the histogram you can immediately observe the changed values in the densitometer readings By pressing the Shift key and clicking on a part of the image with the hand symbol on the scan frame the densito meter will be fixed at this point until you click again while press ing the Shift key Now you can control exactly what changes on certain parts of the image occur when moving the triangle points on the histogram For further info check out the chapter Multiple densitometer Multiple FixPip 134 5 3 Histogram SilverFast Manual Three Part Histogram The histogram of the presentation of each individual colour chan nel R G or B or C M or Y can be switched to the parallel pres entation of all three colour channels R G and B or C M and Y in all SilverFastAi plug ins starting with version 5 A feature which greatly simplifies working with the histogram and make it clearer owitching is done by clicking an icon in the upper right portion of the histogram dialogue An additional click on the icon will switch to the next indicator mode The indicator modes are as follows
392. t deactivated curve points The limiting influence from the neigh bouring curve points is obvious 5S 17 45 82 94 100 o 7 4d 75 94 100 Deactivated curve points In order to deactivate a curve point press the Alt key and click on the desired curve point it changes into a black outline In order to reactivate a curve point press the Alt key once again and click on the desired curve point it becomes black again Resetting Deactivated Curve Points SS In order to reset all deactivated curve points just click on the E cer Qu Reset button in the gradations dialogue if SilverFast Manual 5 4 Gradation curves 151 Control of the curve points Point activation deactivation Mac Win while holding down the Alt key clicking on a curve point makes it active filled in black or pas sive empty Moving the point vertically Mac click dragging while holding the Ctrl key down keeps the X coordi nates constant Moving is only possible in the Y direc tion Windows click dragging while hold ing down the Alt key will keep the coordinates constant Moving is only possible in the Y direc tion Hottrack in a vertical direction While holding down the Command and Ctrl key Strg Alt for Windows the Hottrack shift will take place for one point only in a vertical direction Hottrack Gradation otarting with version 5 of all SilverFast plug ins there are improved c
393. t DC principally have the same basic functions of the scanner modules of SilverFast Ai The differences are listed in detail in Chapter 6 11 What are the Basic Differences SilverFastAi SilverFast Ai Studio and SilverFast SE SilverFastAi is a true scan software and was developed individually for single scan types The supported scanners are directly control led by utilizing the internal dynamics of the scanner The result is maximum quality SilverFastAi is the name of the full version This version may be extended by two features at the time of printing this manual IT8 calibration and Studio Upgrade The IT8 calibration is included with several scanners and may be purchased optionally for other scanners The Studio Upgrade is generally available only as an option and turns a SilverFastAi version into a SilverFastAi Studio version SilverFast SE is the special edition of the Si verFast scanning soft ware The dialogues and functions are limited and more recco mended for novice users SilverFast HDR SilverFast HDR Studio SilverFast HDR works without a scanner and is used as a tool for optimising existing pictures All RGB image files having a colour depth of 24 bits 8 bits per channel and 48 bits 16 bits per chan nel can be processed The files can be in Tiff or JPEG SilverFast HDR Studio also works with RAW data of many digital cameras SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 2523 M
394. t colour psd Scan Mode The choice of file format is done in the Scan mode menu in the Batch Mode Ti Ti R na File General palette Batch Mode File If Normal File or Batch mode File is chosen a new window for determining the file format will open in the scan is started SilverFast Manual 6 9 File formats 241 Scan Mode Normal Croma eran This setting will scan the just activated scan frame of the prescan can Mode E en j l i l l oda window and the image file will be opened in the image editor Normal File immediately after the scan The user can then store it from the Batch Mode File application as a file EL l l Scan Mode Batch This setting will scan all scan frames of the prescan window and Scan Mode Ev DInEL will be opened in the image editor immediately after the scan The Normal Fite user can then store the images from the application as a file Batch Mode Fila Scan Mode Normal File Scan Mode The activated scan frame of the prescan window is scanned with Batch Mode this setting and the image will be automatically saved as a file when the scan is completed The setting in the save dialogue will determine which file format will be written The save dialogue will appear when the button Scan is clicked Naming of the scan frame If the scan frame already has got a name in the SilverFast main dialogue this
395. t software version an meaa mmea may be downloaded e ean han me FR Close dialogue Closed the window and continues the launch process of SilverFast The dialogue is opened at each start of SilverFast This option can be deselected by clicking the check box once SilverFast has been activated If this dialogue is needed again it may be opened by means of the options menu Main dialogue General palette Options General palette by choosing Open welcome dialogue SilverFast Manual 1 2 Installation aT r a P h rLac hog En um image Laye Seer Fhe Wie al EA Han E kl Ez 5j Tin E han 1 H Keran ti EG in m dl 6a Li m n Rede 1 Chri OE Adobe Pl otoshop 7 0 Fal Launching and Activating SilverFast via Photoshop Insert the SilverFast Installation CD into the drive Please ensure that you are logged into your system as ROOT Administrator Launch Photoshop Make sure that the scanner is correctly connected and switched on SCSI scanners in OSX have to be turned on before you start your computer Otherwise the scanner might not be recognized Please note that with some film scanners a slide or a filmstrio has to be loaded Open the menu File The installed Si verFast software can be found in the sub menu Import Launch SilverFast by clicking it SilverFast SilverFastAi now searches the bus system for connected and running scanners and
396. t time for the program is substan Piugin SilverFast LrCPra 0 6 0 214 1 Serial 3 tially shorter Ell Open automarically rt QO E sac SilverFast installation CO With SFLauncher SilverFast becomes totally independent Qm Hegardless whether you work under Macintosh or Windows you Will not need any other program to use any edition of the Si verFast family SilverFastAi SilverFast SE SilverFast HDR SilverFast HDR Stu dio SilverFast DC SilverFast DC Pro or SilverFast DC ProStudio Installing SilverFast Plug in e Insert the SilverFast Installation CD into the drive The CD mounts automatically and a Wel gt T come window should be opened en t eani Autostart In all other cases open the CD 3 T manually and click on to the Instal lation program Autostart SK Wn mU an e Choose the desired Language and click Continue SilverFast Ingtal atian GL d m e 1 2 Installation SilverFast Manual You may choose the type of installation in the menu SilverFast B86 SPIRITS P An Lir e SilverFast Ai 27v Installation You may also install the PDF documentation and mre BOR the QuickTime movies from here Continue by clicking the but Q Messe ton Begin installation HET NN Depending on your operating system the administrative rights r are checked Continue with OK day EWR e By clicking Continue the Installation w
397. tDC HDR SilverFast Manual slXIY 61 19 7 124 e 3072 x 2048 Pixel a 96 dpi Image after import and adaption to page size p PrinTan T Changing the Image Clipping within the Image Frame The image clipping of a cropped image can be changed after wards within the image frame Pressing the Shift key while click dragging upon the image will move the image clipping inside the frame Frew Partizan EY c um T Pino Be Prinko B a y quem JE S IXY 61 4 0 28 em IXY 61 62 42 em XIXJ YY 192 er 132 e 618 x 435 Pixel 966 x 650 Pixel 966 x 650 Pixel Cropped image Rearranging the image Scaling by readapting to clipping while pressing the page size the shift key If the cropping mode is not activated the image can be scaled proportionally by pressing the Shift key For that purpose the image frame can simply be resized by touching the the edge or corner of it SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 305 hilum LC Slw iF an Panes P geyinin li ire 23 W kire la Be m kep jw Moe Ple brat any alba MULT Albers all files YLT Album Coelextecd fhe MET Darii Ca filed View bem lines Coan Alp Bien Ta iima Teoates image liar Wit Drenagem Tal lili Ais Mogo um JT Alu JPG z l Back durch Tort 1 45 EkPW ipa i Photon EH Set rig Sela COL 300 ES Page Setup Pinta prir kn SEPH AQP ae HH p
398. th suffix Ai SE DCProStudio DCPro DCVLT DCSE HDRStudio HDR TIFF K 1 bit line art tif K 8 Bit Grayscale tif E E E H Hi ku K 16 Bit HDR Grayscale uncorrected tif A A lal ia K 16 Bit Grayscale corrected tif E a fal A RGB 24 Bit colour tif H H H w H b RGB Cie Lab 24 Bit colour tif E E E E H RGB 48 Bit colour uncorrected tif E a E E RGB 48 Bit colour corrected tif EJ B E E CMYK 32 Bit colour tif E al la E CMYK 64 Bit colour tif H H H H All Tiffs afore mentioned alos with LZW JPEG K 1 Bit line art jpg K 8 Bit Grayscale jpg il bal K 16 Bit HDR Grayscale uncorrected jpg lal E K 16 Bit Grayscale corrected jpg fal lal RGB 24 Bit colour jpg Hi al RGB 48 Bit HDR colour uncorrected jpg lal fal RGB 48 Bit colour corrected jpg lal fA CMYK 32 Bit colour jpg Gl Cm CMYK 64 Bit colour jpg Hi le JPEG2000 K 1 Bit line art jpf z K 8 Bit Grayscale jpf lal K 16 Bit HDR Grayscale uncorrected jpf E K 16 Bit Grayscale corrected jpf lal RGB 24 Bit colour jpf lal RGB 48 Bit HDR colour uncorrected jpf lal RGB 48 Bit colour corrected jpf la DCS CMYK single file 32 Bit colour eps lal iq CMYK multiple files g 4x8 Bit Grayscale 1x 32 Bit colour eps EPSF K 8 Bit Grayscale eps 2 C RGB Cie Lab 24 Bit colour eps IE C CMYK 32 Bit colour eps la PSD RGB 24 Bi
399. the Reset button Then all values in the global correction dialogue are also reset to their default values 156 5 5 e GCC Global colour correction SilverFast Manual Changing Colour Balance The colour balance is changed by moving the hand clicking on one of the six coloured circles or by using the sliders The move ment is effective only for the selected correction range Global Color Correction a e em pn ATE B EIEE e m 6 0 mjm 6 D mj G G Cenc ED Global correction all elements except highlights and shadows Global Color Correction 25 5o mw 75 E 25 Io u 8s 25 e so al 75 ja l l a e s m pg ee pe gt e e e e 9 e b M 9 O Cenc ED Global correction 25 to 75 has been changed to magenta SilverFast Manual 5 5 GCC Global colour correction 157 M P Selective Colour Correction Selectie Color Correction GOC Red B lt none gt E Green E nome m El r B nona FH Cyan IFTE gt E Magen BE non ET Yelinar LI ET Aaa 2 Cancel SilverFast SE Versions The dialogue is simplified in all SilvertFast SE versions and is recom mended for novice users 5 6 Selective Colour Correction Colour in Colour Correction oelective colour correction was developed for high end scanners and consists of a changing colours within a colour The colours red green blue cya
400. the already programmed selec tive colour correction or the correction to be made will immediately be applied to the active surface area A Save dialogue will appear immediately Name for new math after the symbol so the mask may be saved New Mask with Brush Tool J The brush tool creates a mask using small lines Only these small areas will be effected by the selective colour correction A Save dialogue will appear immediately rmm after the symbol so the mask may be saved 168 5 6 SCC Selective colour correction SilverFast Manual Hard or Soft Mask Edges The edges of the drawn masks are variable in their softness The standard setting for the mask edge is defined as hard The cross over at the border is freely definable in its width Gamera Frame Densirameter Click on the Options button on the Gen eral palette Choose General inthe popup _ 2 eee window Presets and continue to the menu mtn Kin D Oren Genres ar Mask Edge Size NI E The standard setting here is O which defines Moi ve a hard mask edge co hn he Mask Edge Size 0 00 By changing the value and clicking onto the button Apply the effect can be monitored in the preview window The influence taken by the value typed in depends on the currently used output resolution muse IH SI
401. the scalable dialogue Al DCPro HDR versions Offer the complete descreening dialogue with preview manual selection and automatic screen detection The fully automatic functions are not included SEPlus versions offer the scal able descreening dialogue without preview but with manual screen input and also contains the two automatic descreening options SE versions contain the new de screening the descreening dialogue without preview but with manual screen input The two fully automated functions are not available 6 3 De screening an image From Version 6 4 2r4 onwards SilverFast uses a completely new descreening in order to remove any screen dots from printed images Image taken from a magazine enlarged 300 Left normal Scan without descreening The moir on the print is clearly visible Right Scan with descreening The moir is completely removed Adjusting the Frame of the Image To activate SilverFast s descreening select one of the menu points from the filter menu located within the frame palette Automatic descreening None i i Filter v Sharpen USM e Automatic descreening intensive I USM amp Descreening Automatic descreening intensive Automatic descreening GANE e Descreening e USM amp Descreening The newly developed descreening in Si verFast is able to detect the actual screen of the image automatically Automatic descreening and Automa
402. the window is closed all fixed points will automatically be deleted A fixed point can be created by pressing the mouse key on pre view and holding down the Shift key as before If the mouse hits on an existing fixed point the point will be deleted If the mouse hits on an existing fixed point and the mouse is moved the fixed point will be shifted Displaying the Densitometer Measure Points with the Histogram and Gradations Dialogues The measurement values of the active a densitometer point are displayed as a MI coloured vertical line within the open his togram dialogue They are represented as coloured points on the gradation curve in the respective dialogue The activation of an inactive densitometer point is done by simply clicking onto it here Point 2 The respective values are immediately taken into the dialogues SilverFast Manual 5 3 Histogram 145 Transfer of the Brightest Darkest Point to the Multiple Densitometer By clicking the white or black area in the icon for darkest lightest point while holding down the Shift key the reading found by SilverFast will be transferred to the window fixed pipette Good control of corner values can thus be assured eoe dl min quum w SHIFT X E Selecting the Colour Space in the Densitometer Hold down the Ctrl key and click into any of the measuring value cells of the densitometer A pop up window opens and
403. thin these specular highlights and move the highlight end points in the histo gram until you get the desired results Specular highlights 130 5 2 Pipette SilverFast Manual Displaying Brightest and Darkest Point of an Image Since it is important to know where the brightest and darkest points of an image are we have implemented a display of these points Displaying Brightest Point To display the brightest point move the mouse cursor over the white patch of the display brightest darkest point button and click the mouse A red circle with an Cross displays the brightest point Additionally all pixels with the same brightness are displayed in negative form C un Displaying brightest point Macintosh Press Command key and Shift key Windows Press Crtl and Shift key Brightest point SilverFast Manual 5 2 Pipette 131 Displaying Darkest Point To display the darkest point move the mouse cursor over the black patch of the display brightest darkest point button and click the mouse or press the following combination Command key and Ctrl key on Macintosh make sure that you press the Command key first PC press only Ctrl key A red circle with an cross marks the darkest point napa In Combination with Highlight Shadow Tool The above mentioned displays can also be shown while using the highlight shadow tool with the advantage that the highlights and shadows can
404. tic descreening intensive are fully automated and are available without any further dialogues In case Descreening or USM amp Descreening is selected a sub menu will appear within which more individual parameters may be set SilverFast Manual 205 6 3 Descreening Filter None Sharpen USM Descreening USM amp Descreening Automatic descreening intensive Automatic descreening Automatic Descreening This function launches a fully automated descreening of the image No more dialogues or menus are necessary The Automatic descreening is recommended for medium and fine screens The result is only visible after the final scan and is not displayed in SilverFast s preview window Please note that the image to be descreened consist of enough image elements and not only textures and graph ICS Automatic Descreening intensive The Automatic descreening intensive function operates like the Automatic descreening function but in addition uses a special ized calculation algorithm This selection is recommended for cruder screens and low screen width The intensive descreening needs more system resources and is more time intensive The result will only be visible in the final scan and not in SilverFast s large preview window 206 6 3 Descreening SilverFast Manual None Filter 1 v Sharpen USM Descreening USM amp Descreening Automatic descreening intensive Automatic
405. tion is launched from the VLT First select the images to be renamed from the VL T overview V Sort by name Next use the context menu Win Sort by size I Aon Mie dows right mouse click to choose aed Sort by type the option rename selected the Select all respective dialogue opens Delete all Once the renaming dialogue Delete selected has been opened any number Relr sh th mbnails of images may still be added The user is not limited to just one source directory The usage of this dialogue is the same as the one already described earlier under Renaming images automatically 2 60 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Magnifier The magnifier may be used in both the overview window and the album If you move over any miniature the contents of the image are immediately displayed in the magnifier window 2278 x 1485 Pixel 19 36 MB By clicking the Size of miniatures button the Overview 32 32 i pri i vy Overview 64 64 display size of the magnifier is adjustable in Overview 96 96 O iew 128 128 two steps either 256 x 256 pixels or 512 x 512 j ight table Light table 32 32 pixels Light table 64 64 v Light table 96 96 In the highest level there will be a slight Light table 128 128 i i i i Magnifier 256 256 increase in the size of the display so that the Magulfler SEE 513 viewable area will move with the mouse Magnifier size tovt Mag
406. tion of P P CMYK Plug amp Play CMYK v NONE U S Sheetfed Coated v2 icm G neri cic Profile icc JapanStandard icc Photoshop4DefaultCMYK icc PhotoshopSDefaultCMYK icc USSheetfedCoated icc USSheetfedUncoated icc USWebCoatedSWOP icc Selection of same profile or separa tion table RGB CMYK Toggling Under Windows press right Mouse button Softproof CMYK Simulation Alt command and click into preview Densitometer l l l l Button for switching on off the softproof function 9 3 p CMYK Output with Colour Management Plug amp Play CMYK Separation In order to activate the P amp P CMYK separation proceed as follows Select Internal Output P amp P CMYK under the SilverFast colour management dialogue Under Plug amp Play CMYK at the bottom of the dialogue select the appropriate profile he ICC CMYK output profile can by chosen at the base of the CMS dialogue Make sure you have loaded the same profile in Photoshop under Colour Settings gt CMYK setup When leaving the Options dialogue the button Scan RGB will now show Scan CMYK Prescan E Scan RGB RGB Quit _ TE You may also switch SilverFast from RGB to CMYK by keeping the CRIL key pressed and click on the Scan button A small popup window will appear in which the choice can be made refer also Permanent softproof Pages 87 and 191 If yo
407. tion window and decide on the display mode The correction process can then start The iSRD function has two sliders Threshold value and Expan sion correction Threshold value This slider is used to set the level of recognition The higher the value the more sensitive the software reaction and the Rm higher the number of probable defects jar A T diii d R recog i ane E rl E a X P z AN dd MEA nised zc M NN full versions of SilverFastAi in expert 3 P Ss mode Expansion correction This slider is only available when the expert button is activated It controls the scope of correction ommum am an wim rte d Le Fy AN 4 e ke EC n Hn s ONE f Sa a SilverFast Manual 6 13 SilverFastSRD iSRD 395 Using SRD and iSRD Simultaneously Layer Technology ISRD and SRD can of course be used simultaneously The built in layer function can be used to maximise the positive effects of both technologies and rule out undesirable side effects The SRD ISRD default setting only shows the first layer 1 For this first layer the default setting is for iSRD to be activated It can be deactivated and replaced by SAD at any time If a further layer is created by clicking on the relevant toolbar but ton the initial default setting for this layer is SRD Here again it is possible to switch to SRD at any time With regard to the use of masks the same applie
408. tments Processing Job Entries Switching to the Processing Mode The job entry to be processed must be selected with a click of the mouse Si verFastJobManager marks the default job entry found in processing with a frame in the selection colour Start the JM processing mode by clicking the mouse on the Processing button When switching into the edit mode a small preview window will appear This easy edit mode is very useful and time saving if parameters are to be altered quickly and a new preview is necessary e g change of resolution or name etc If desired a click on to the prescan button immediately launches a preview of the selected image Hold the Processing button down in order to signal the ac jam tive processing mode see screenshots at the left P The Actual Image Processing The next steps are easy Now all SilverFast tools needed for processing the selected image are available to you just as in the processing of a normal scan procedure Of course it is important to retain order of the workflow steps of image correction The sequence for optimising images is shown in the margin The SilverFastScanPilot is also available as an additional means of assistance The only difference is in the last processing point The corrections applied will not be processed immediately they are saved in JM he Scan button of the normal scan software has been changed to a Save button in JM
409. to matically If the window is closed all fixed points will automatically be deleted 196 6 1 Densitometer SilverFast Manual Transfer of the Brightest Darkest Point to the Multiple Densitometer By clicking the white or black area in the icon for darkest lightest point while holding down the Shift key the reading found by JH SHIFT SilverFast will be transferred to the window fixed pipette Good control of corner values can thus be assured MT eos SihwrFan HDA Morgan si sis e Ri l jA Ba 9 9 lS R L m SilverFast Manual 6 1 Densitometer 197 198 6 1 Densitometer SilverFast Manual 6 2 Improving the Sharpness of Artwork SilverFast has a specially designed sharpness function called an Unsharp Mask USM The concept stems from traditional lithog raphy while it was still a chemical process Contour sharpness was improved by means of an out of focus film mask in the copy processes his process is now used in software and assures a very good natural looking sharpness Normal sharpness functions generally increase detail contrast and intensify all image irregulari ties of the artwork making the image appear very unnatural Automatic USM VE ee Auto unsharp masking is done automatically if Auto sharpen NA E Less auto sharpen or More auto sharpen is chosen in the filter her Wun s qat ELE menu of the scan dialogue window for Silve
410. ts 59 CMS colour management settings 62 General Defaults 53 Special Defaults 65 Options parameter 54 Orientation of the image 47 Orientation window 4 7 Original 70 103 238 Original height 76 468 7 4 Index SilverFast Manual Original width 76 Output dimensions 39 Output file size 39 Output height 76 Output screen 39 Output width 76 P P amp P CMYK 62 91 417 419 425 427 Softproof 91 Panorama captures 43 237 Permanent Softproof 195 Permanent softproof 91 427 Photoshop 5 02 428 Photoshop plug in 22 Launching and activating SilverFast via Photoshop 28 Pica 52 Picture 69 Pipette 60 101 108 145 292 Fixed Pipette 101 145 Pixel 52 Pixel lock 79 Pixel zoom 47 201 Plug amp Play CMYK 64 93 427 Point 52 Polygon 167 382 Pos Neg 219 Positive Negative 70 PostScript Printer 422 PowerMac 19 Preferences 51 110 Prefs 110 See Preferences Prefs file 85 Prescan 83 Aborting Prescan 184 High resolution prescan 184 Prescan concept 83 Prescan design 84 Prescan faster 65 Prescan launch button 39 Prescan mirroring 40 Prescan monochrome 65 Prescan rotation 40 Prescan without auto focus 67 Saved prescan for reflective and for transparency 84 Preserve settings for a new image 57 Presets 259 267 Preview in fullscreen 43 Preview mode 270 Primary colours 452 453 PrinTao 266 270 295 298 299 405 406 1 1 copy function 406 Adapt to page size 309 Add button 302 306 309 Additional
411. tve In order to get optimum results you only need to click the Si verFast auto adjust button The auto adjust will set the correct high light shadow values as well as the overall brightness for the active scan frame In case the results are not as desired try other film presets manu facturer film speeds sometimes even with a profile of another manufacturer to get better results owitching to expert mode is only necessary if the above sugges tions aren t suitable You can now continue with the normal SilverFast tools for further optimisation until you start the final scan e g naming the image scaling USM descreening selective colour correction and finally scan in CMYK or RGB 222 6 7 NegaFix Scanning negatives SilverFast Manual Attention the expert dialogue will only be avail able in SilverFastAi SilverFast HDR SilverFast DC etc SilverFastSE Versions will not have the NegaFix expert dialogue Ps la 3 The Expert Dialogue When should the Expert Dialogue be used In any case you should first use the normal procedure to convert a negative to positive as outlined in chapter 2 When these steps do not yield the desired results open the expert dialogue This could for instance be the case when profiles for a specific film are missing or when the existing profiles do not convert the negative correctly Importing film profiles All film profiles embedded in
412. tware set to high res scan mode the first prescan reads the entire scan area With flat bed scanners for example the entire length of the high res scan area is read at once Depending on the scanner model you can find the different reso lution modes in the General Original menu where you can also alter between Transparency and Reflective or Document Feeder if your scanner supports those features Having selected a scan frame of your choice clicking the zoom button will induce a new prescan of the selected area The zoomed high res preview can be as large as the monitor screen where the proportions of the scan frame determine the proportion of the new preview scan A square shaped scan frame results in a square shaped preview One main advantage is that thanks to this new approach even large format panoramic films for example 6x17 cm rollfilm negative can be previewed at once in the zoomed preview If you want to zoom further into the zoomed preview simply down size the scan frame over the zoomed preview and click the prescan button again to initiate a new preview With a click on the zoom button magnifying glass you switch back the initial preview of the entire scan bed toggle switch SilverFast Manual 4 Prescan concept 103 104 4 Prescan concept SilverFast Manual B trta jip Kun E A iee DD a a i a s 3 san z a azana a GE
413. u have not selected a separation table or ICC profile previously the selection will be grey and cannot be activated CMYK Colour Simulation on the Preview CMYK Softproof When the scan button shows Scan CMYK you can switch the preview to CMYK simulation by clicking the softproof button within the densitometer window SilverFast Manual 71 Addendum 4271 Ferrtresimidhest emper Hisl Aba Adone panii Gp s Fak Telpa 2 26 Rhnnermen Monit aia esoo US Lagen hr mnrTarn n Hpab e RH imp T Ani hern hini Tin Heedpurs Eo ngttafs hi BbR 1 5 rae hal Anzeige m t reienidTnrsuxgiebri Default General Colar Managed E Calibration H rerai mantar Automatic 31 e lena lt Duur BCE i Pr fthes fir C lortun Eramngr o ble Scanner Ayiee Leaner ITransp arent Han H G Adobe ROE 1998 id Gray Ganaric Gray Profile icc i L i tt Rericler ine z inen perceptual M Embedded HCC profiles mind amp polle Ll Prom pto erated Ai l han ROR Sa Plug amp Pay Cee E r Apply Lf Cancel 1 f OK Default General f Aut j ew Colar Manggeence Eraran r ox iniernal ColorsSyn Q gt Mandar Color ymc EL lena lt Durpur RGE Faa Profiles for C lorisne Q9 Remeg F T Mikmm L5 TX TT mI seanair ITrankparent LT imternal Adobe RCE 1988 kad Oray Generic Gray Profile ice iH Output Primei
414. ues 30 30 be changed to minimum 0 0 the auto adjust cannot perform any correction of the mid tones A gradation curve would be unchanged so to speak stay linear Independent of that the contrast automatic could still gener ate a change of the gradation curve In this case it would be necessary to check whether the contrast automatic has been activated under Options panel Auto W check box Auto or not The numerical values of the sliders are values with no refer Attention ence to any dimension They reflect Strength of the influence The default dialogue windows differ of the automatic A value of O represents no influence the from scanner to scanner and some value 100 represents maximum influence features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software 60 3 Presets SilverFast Manual AN Attention The default dialogue windows differ from scanner to scanner and some features are only available for certain scanners or certain imaging software Frame Inset Determines how much of the current frame will be deducted for actual use of the image auto adjust or NegaFix auto orange mask removal A 10 would mean that 1096 of the current frame will be deducted from the outside Auto Contrast If this check box is checked the image auto adjust will evaluate the current contrast for the image and increase or decrease the contrast accordingly This functio
415. ument Feeders ADF 237 SilverFast Dialogue after Interruption of a Batch 238 Film scanners with a magazine 239 6 9 File formats in SilverFast 241 Saving different File Formats 241 Scan Mode Normal 242 Scan Mode Batch 242 Scan Mode Normal File 242 Scan Mode Batch Mode File 243 Saving into JPEG File Format 245 Saving into DCS File Format 245 JPEG 2000 246 Scan Mode Normal File or Batch Mode File 246 Heading different file formats 247 6 10 Focussing the Scanner 249 Auto Focus Off 250 Auto Focus On 250 Manual Focus On 250 Manual Focus with Preview 251 6 11 Description of the Special Functions of SilverFastHDR and SilverFastDC 253 What are the Basic Differences 253 SilverFastHDR SilverFastHDRStudio 200 Opening an Image with the Open Button 255 The Virtual Light Table VLT 255 Alternative Opening of Images 256 SilverFastDOVLT DCPro DCProStudio 258 SilverFast Manual 11 Content 11 Working with RAW Data in SilverFastDCPro System Requirements Presets and Cache Workflow for Conversion of RAW Data Files Launching the Virtual Light Table VLT Arrangement of the VLT Tool and Control Bar Details Browser and Navigation Window Album Palette Presets Palette Overview Window and Toolbar Searching Export Albums Unloading Camera Storage Media Re naming Images Automatically Subsequent Automatic Renaming Magnifier Blue or Green Dots within the Thumbnails Albu
416. und on page 389 Overview Activation of SilverFast Dust and Scratch Removal Depending on SilverFast version and scanner model different functionalities of dust and scratch removal are available The corresponding buttons can be found in the vertical tools bar left hand of the big preview window ad SRD ISRD is deactivated iSRD is active and running in automatic mode r a SRD ISRD is active and running in manual mode Clicking the bottom E button opens the dialogue EN SRD iSRD is deactivated and ICE is active Dust and Scratch Removal Navigator Window Navigator GGRD Areas with red frame available image area Areas with yellow frame selection visible in preview window can be Press Preview button first and then Ruto button moved with mouse Please check the output dimensions are set correctly Control Menu for Dust and Scratch Removal Defect Type All white bright or black dark artifacts Detection Recognition Sensitivity Defect Size Artifact size Intensity Differentiation of image detail and artifact az Bs 12 l2 B Blake DZ g 3 V Dust and Scratch Removal Defect Type Ali _ White Black Detection e ku Defect size ep Intensity 100 Mask lt No mask gt Mask Loading and Saving of Masks Presets Save Presets OK ZEN Loading and Saving of presets
417. up to 512x512 pixels By means of Display fitting the image will always be displayed in maximum size of the magnifier window By clicking Show EXIF data some ofthe basic EXIF files Fpa m Rm xc may be viewed in the magnifier window Hawler o Hawler ae Hawler Dm Hawler lt gt Size comparison 322 642 962 1282 pixel 268 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual M ris nim tinim m Bara Steere conus fl i AZ n h r E en Wikis Kek far Daia me Hinav FO If mm Jj Four ent j L Bra ti Latia is Ghee kab n z ICE DN rans Bor Che Fer Tak u ar FT Barve n B8 Search i NET File name contains E Buma cement ennrtain A r mm Hildar KHZ f r Daku mit Hakarp l J Search Bhuirne Tif Located in Doku Daten 2 2268 GW CD Images Bilder RHE f r Deke mer Hotere Elune tif Searching If you wish to directly search for a filename or the image com ments a simple click on the search button is sufficient More search criteria may be entered V File name W Comment PASEU begins with begins with ends with ends with is is is not is not contains not contains not The Directory button marks the directory d to be searched rm esu FIR c An album to be searched can alternatively n TEE be chosen here e The search is started by clicking on the Search button
418. ur Separation 426 Profiles for ColorSync ICM 417 420 Internal 421 SilverFast Manual 7 4 Index 461 Output Printer 422 Rendering Intent 423 Scanner Reflective 420 Scanner Transparency 420 CMYK colour simulation 91 427 CMYK output 427 CMYK Values Visible on the Prescan 195 ColorSync 62 114 262 416 425 Colour balance 108 155 156 157 Resetting colour balance 156 Colour cast 130 137 138 230 231 292 Automatic colour cast removal 137 Colour cast preservation 118 Colour cast removal 59 117 Manual colour cast removal 138 Preserving a colour cast 130 Colour channel in histogram 136 Colour circle 160 164 Colour filter blind colour 65 Colour in colour correction See auch Selective colour correction Colour management 413 Comparing the colour spaces 416 Introduction 413 Objective of Colour Management System 413 Objective of the SilverFast Colour Management 414 Colour matrix 12 158 Colour matrix 6 158 Colour model relations 453 Colour models 194 LAB 194 LCH 194 RGB 194 Colour negatives 394 Colour separation 426 Colour space compression 143 Colour temperature 292 Colour tint 261 292 Colour to Grey Conversion 180 Complementary colours 452 453 Compression of colour Space 141 Example for colour space compression 143 Concept of optimising images 112 Contact sheet 270 282 Contaminating colours 453 Context menu 195 Contrast 149 293 Copy a scan frame 90 Copyright 3 Credits button 32
419. ur space is cut off but that the existing tonal values of the scanner are evenly distributed to the compressed scale of the new destination or output colour space r F Histogram Histogram amp a fd Highlight L fo Shadow 97 10 Min Max 30 a 10 Color Space Compression 80 Coldr Cast Removal pe x Color Cast Removal emm Cancel Q0K o f Cancel ok 3 Highlights compression Shad Press Alt key to see the ows compression resulting Histogram The SilverFast histogram is controlled by five significant values the absolute 096 value specular highlight white point set highlights e midtone value midtone e shadow point set shadows and absolute 100 value max black Movable triangles controlling the compression are intelligently con nected This assures values for highlights or shadows compres sion never to become smaller than values for Min and Max SilverFast Manual 5 3 Histogram 141 16 H Lis 22 M D Color Space Compression 69 Color Space Compression 69 Color Space Compression 69 A 16 Highlight L 6 Shadow 89 22 Min Max 59 Vv ww moo 12 Color Space Compression 69 Movable Triangles and Value Fields Min and Max Min Max movable triangles position represent the values
420. ut formats and for handling the file names Choosing the Location for Scans The browser located in the upper part of the dialogue window allows selection of the path of the scan and is freely selectable A new directory may be created by clicking the New folder button New folder If the check box Save to album is activated images may be saved into an existing or into a new album This option is only available in the Si verFastDC and m HDR Versions Save to Album Selecting File Format m The format selection menu bottom right shows the available Format TIFF a Y uu R file formats in which images can be saved The choice of format varies with the selection of the colour space used for digitaliza EL Goom TIFF i WEZA e o tion RGB or CMYK Please refer to the table on page 219 for ed CI MTS an overview of available file formats ELS Additional parameters Option button can be set in some file formats like UPEG and DCS v TIFF mn O a mue EPSF tarsal v TIFF JPEG E EPSF Ee SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFastJobManager 353 Usage of File Names File naming The lower part of the dialogue window is dedicated to file BatchPic h names 4 Digits Index BatchPicO001 tif e The kind of name may be chosen from the File naming menu B reset To ve batch Scan For this at least two input fields popup menus are prepared 1 The upper input
421. ution What is interpolated resolution Imaging has been an abstract science which was practised by well trained professionals Now with the advent of low price PCs scan ners printers and digital cameras imaging has become a mass phenomenon It is exciting to see how this technology is impacting and changing economy and society It seems that in an information society imag ing is becoming the premier tool to convey ideas and compact messages This recognition emphasises the importance to learn more and become familiar with the basic imaging concepts It will help you to realise your visions and ideas much more quickly SO for your own advantage do study the following pages carefully SilverFast Manual 7 3 Addendum 443 Scan resolution dpi Some important definitions are clarified here They form the vital basics of image reproduction theory Input Resolution Hesolution is a common expression that refers to the number of fin est elements of an image or pixels pixel is an artificial word made of picture and element which a sensor for instance a scanner can record or distinguish The unit of measure is in general dpi dots per inch or dpcm dots per cm The higher the resolution the greater the number of pixels can be scanned Optical Resolution Interpolated Resolution The optical resolution is also called physical resolution It de fines how many lines or points per inch or cm the CCD and optics
422. utton will open a contextual menu which in addition to the job entry command contains the instruc tion Reset status It will change the selected entries back to Unpro cessed and to the colour grey Now you can again start a new selection of job entries and processing 356 6 12 SilverFast JobManager SilverFast Manual wir r M APS Adapter eo Output settings d Stt 7j SilverFastJobManager Workflow with Film Scanners 1 Start the film scanner and place the filmstrip in the scanner Filmstrip holder 2 Start the image processing program i e Photoshop or SF Launcher 3 Launch SilverFastAi for your scanner 4 Activate the SilverFastJobManager 5 Produce an overview scan 6 Select images and add to JM 7 Optimise each picture and save it 8 Set target directory name and file format of the final scans 9 Start processing the job X Computer and scanner continue unassisted processing 10 Close JM and SilverFastAli SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFast JobManager 357 The SilverFastJobManager with Flat bed Scanners The Difference to Working with Film Scanners The JobManager of SilverFastAi is in general similar to all scan ners The possible differences arise from the constructional dif ferences of the scanners themselves Flat bed scanners can usually be fitted with a transparency unit By this reflective and transpa
423. vailable as an option in SilverFast DC Pro Studio and SilverFast HDR Studio Context Menu right mouse click upon a Print Page Document The substantial context menu features another simplification and assistance assembling layouts and print pages Changing the structure of a page quick and easy deleting images mirroring and rotating adding or deleting pages almost all but ton functionality left of the print page window can be accessed via the context menu Printer Setup The parameters of the connected printer can be defined in the menu Printer In case a printer profile is available the according profile can be chosen under printer profile for the appropriate printer paper setup This even permits working with calibrated printers Please read the according chapter SilverFast PhotoProof NOTE Please note that the following menus for setting up the printer vary substantially depending on the operating system and the different printer models A Please note for SilverFast PhotoProof In order to verify that your desired results will be colour con sistent and legally binding please follow these requirements e Switch off colour management in your proof printer driver e Your proof printer has to be calibrated to the necessary ink and paper combination The corresponding printer profile must be chosen accordingly in the PrinTao dialogue The papers used for creating the proofs need to meet the settings in
424. vate the JobManager click on JobManager button H Ja o Sibverf ast v6 D 1530 eoce SilverFast Film SilverFastAi dialogue using Macintosh Silverfast Ai Baheri mil vh scan Type 48 324 Bit EN Filter me UEN Setting Save m image Type Standard Gema Pere Dennie RE T eiu SilverFast Ai hene snipee a we Suae N hal n a 1 10 j dat pim weye Sb e 2 49 fJ ka e mer j Tactor erten Mbyte ry id 1 amp 3 kx AZS d ZE E ja vg ti xr en xf BA wh fone 9 Aie ae NIAI TRE ftr fe mi BO Xa Tar kem E Prescan Scan RG Quir j _ Pen S ak Ca ay derbast En fem olverFast DC Pro Studio S verfasst HD slo 5 AE dialogue using Macintosh htt e mm S Serrasi TI TITIO LE EU mu udio eem EDI TAAA l T VLT que B sita j je Es E a ca a D Ewin IA c 2 D ee ee Mc i i E i Tn b U koima E EA ELA belan J tasa keman m mer edin 1 ER EE PLI r Tl mau ai em Mr au a jj pene a J Lame m a ic aom kr El EE ES aa li Ez E aa SS F ee A per al a sikan a dmm Bazar la ku malan Rayit r pe mena 1 su HA EWE j NE TE eO is ja a 2 ri x EN 3e Fee g deme ea ES ni nanea nama ra E T as i z r t J SilverFast Manual 6 12 SilverFastJobManager 345 dialogue using Windows Ic
425. vels 1 00 llzsx IUE Rae J 2 Anto i 2 Options Output Levets j oss il Bl Preview Color Space Compression Calor Car Ra rival r x e Cc E Colour space without compression Uu Chinnel Chr ET C o3 npu beei B i 255 2 z ied Tir L Ai E E Dealani Ce put Level 0 1255 Ez E Ej 3 al Era etar Resulting histogram 3 40 in Photoshop rr E a ka a ia e nw Chantel Che i 2 Input Levels 6 Lie ES Pret sige Compression to 3 40 Resulting histogram Compression to 54 94 54 94 in Photoshop 144 5 3 Histogram SilverFast Manual c MidPip4 Fixrzl l ipritz seo m ME 44 tid 444 i B O st 3 1 m m 2809 E Multiple Densitometer Fixed Pipette MidPip4 Up to four densitometer measurement points are available in any SilverFast plug in MidPip4 The measuring values of these pipette measuring Densitometer points will no longer be shown in the densitometer window but in their own window The windows will attempt to adapt to the number of measuring points meaning they will change their size depending on the number of fixed points and the selected colour types RGB CMYK grey etc The colour types can be adjusted for each pipette independently of each other If all fixed points have been deleted the window will close auto matically If
426. verFast because only this function makes sure that the user can predetermine and control his final result from the SilverFast preview 2 Safe IT8 Calibration optional with ICC Profiler With SilverFastAi you can create a dedicated ICC profile for your scanner so your scanner can be used within the colour management workflow LaserSoft Imaging AG offers optional IT8 calibration for all full versions of SilverFast SilverFast s IT8 calibration is integrated into the SilverFast appli cation in such a way excluding any possible mis operation 3 Individual Colour Control with Selective Colour Correction SilverFast s selective colour correction enables the user to change individual colours independently on the Si verFast pre view Controlling the colours of the final result at a very profes sional level without trial and error and integrated with the colour management is a real boon for any level of user 414 71 Addendum SilverFast Manual SilverFast Colour Management Operating System ColorSync ICM IT8 Calibration Matching SilverFast Ern Preview Adobe Photoshop SilverFast Selective Colou Correction SilverFast Manual 71 Addendum 415 Note Do not select sRGB as your default colour space in Photoshop if you intend to do colour reproduction with printing Comparing the colour spaces Shown is a projection of the colour spaces on to a surface The curved triangle repre
427. verFastDC HDR SilverFast Manual Action Macintosh Zooming the Print Page via Keyboard Shortcuts Enlargement by 10 Command plus Decrease by 10 YY ak Command minus Scaling Image Frames Stepwise in Percentage Enlarge image frame by 10 Command plus Decrease image frame by 10 Command minus Enlarge image frame by 196 Command Shift plus Decrease image frame by 1 Command Shift minus Scaling Images Inside it s Frame Enlarge image clipping 10 Command Alt plus Ctrl Alt plus Decrease image clipping 10 Command Alt minus Ctrl Alt minus Enlarge image clipping 1 Command Alt Shift plus Ctr Alt Shift plus Decrease image clipping 1 Command Alt Shift minus Ctr Alt Shift minus Text Functions Windows Ctrl plus Ctrl minus Ctrl plus Ctrl minus Ctrl plus Ctrl minus Open text MENU naana anaana eee Command T 3 scope ioa eas not available oelect complete text of text box Command A not available Print selected text bold Command B not available Print selected text italic Command se T 204 conden boa not available Underline selected text Command U x5 Rs not available Launch spelling check 05 Cr 36e oia wa
428. view window Album window Sort images in desired manner Edit file names and image comments Align incorrectly positioned images with the rotation np and flip tool CI Mark with the Mark tool Alternatively the images may also manually be sorted into X different albums by the drag amp drop method Delete the files marked by the context menu He sort the remaining images and save the albums Print contact sheets if needed m Hand over the first image to the PreScan window of SilverFast by double clicking it optimise it there and by clicking the Proc ess button hand back the corrected image to the album Time saving alternative Start the SilverFast JobManager pass on the images by the drag amp drop function and start the optimization there Chose the next image for optimisation Hepeat steps to 8 until all images have been optimised If necessary copy the optimised images into a different directory SilverFast Manual 6 11 SilverFastDC HDR 289 VLT Keyboard Shortcuts Macintosh General Select image series Shift SHIFT Select single images Command h VLT Window Open context menu Ctrl button and click into VL T window tk Activate all Command A F EXIF Image infos Command iiL Delete image Command Backspace BACKSPACE Mark image as Bad Shift click with marker SHIFT Full size Preview Command Shift F
429. w The Tool bar in the Prescan Window SilverFast Tools Activity Indicator for Change of Setting Rotation Tool Palette 36 37 37 58 39 40 46 46 47 36 2 e Overview MSt K2 E WebOpti indd 190606 SilverFast Manual recie B ede caue tave Selec Fer Y n Window Ta BEC nm Mai a j da z Open m ts Dress jj 1j m Open Recent k LIT ra Linge aw tir Fa zi Bava As RS b x Var for nk zd Ws J a Rr Ha KT 8 2l Dicer or Mez Espo Ei FDFimag m P MEI Erias EN Wurlghaud H Shee Fas Eyes Daya k B 14 Au Bam 35a amp Sire Fa nn Bk ar File infa An Lic irri ci Faqe saua nap m TOY Hud Pr r with Braw aw bir n end Feat Xur Fert fee Copy C RE k T iu La Starting Photoshop Plug in SilverFast Dialogue Window Macintosh Version After you have selected Si verFast the following scan dialogue appears The scan dialogue window automatically opens to the largest size possible according to the size of your monitor OM heushop MEE vicarneicen id bene Auiwahi der Ansikt Ferier Hole me s SilverFast Epson GT 0700 Wun Lum Beru ar pee imagen ol be mra h by am zn tha kenn SibeziFast v6 0 1030 SilverFast Ai Canaral ferme I Scan Type 48 224 r E mom M Filter Nan Setting Save E mage Type Sumdar Tj Hamr t L qucm E Original Scale W Orte 2 aa ETE ig Et een t se ime Ta
430. warte Sx 5 Pixel EE i Presets lt Save gt H Finally enter the desired output screen in the field for screen in the frame palette a Cancel oO Cul SilverFast Manual 6 3 Descreening 209 210 6 3 Descreening SilverFast Manual CANER iram d Hoi e anina Bile gl T Presean Manachrome GANE Parameters Pristi Low GAHE i Cancel Ge 6 4 GANEG Grain and Noise Removal GANE Grain and Noise Elimination is a SilverFast filter to remove or reduce film grain and CCD noise The reduction of grain pattern and noise can be monitored in Sil verFast s Before After preview and enables a secure judgement of the final results Today s modern high resolution scanners bring out the grain from film especially from films with high ASA ISO values Suppression of noise is more relevant with older scanners or with digital cameras The intensity of the GANE filter can be easily FE Te controlled by the user with the before after preview For finer adjustment the Expert mode helps with additional slider The Expert mode is only available in Si verFast full versions ttim ul cus dece x i E Important Preparatory Steps Since GANE works like the Unsharp Masking USM filter in SilverFast it is first necessary to carry out all steps of the normal SilverFast image optimisation work flow GANE is best used as last step directly before starting the scan You shou
431. ween adjacent areas of similar shades of grey Daily newspapers and magazines and other periodicals very often have black and white photographs with too little differentiation between the greys The original colour image might have had good shade rendering but in the conversion process differentiation between adjacent greys is often lost SilverFast s SC2G can preserve or even enhance the differentiation between the shades by controlling the conversion process for all six colours red green blue cyan magenta yellow The user can define which shade of grey to convert a colour to Cac a Since the whole process is interactively monitored the final result Eee e e is visible the user can quickly achieve the desired result Activating SC2G The first step is switching to grey mode from colour mode under Image Mode Clicking onto the selective colour correction button will bring up the SC2G dialogue 2 Si teer acit ve O Lr Image Type 16 Bit Grayscale 46 Eit HOR Calor ie 16 Eit HDR Grayscale j g elective Gray Correction i Saec B N CIRCE Pres l SilverFast HDR 5 pem pee Ei EBENEN EINE OC r EESE lida al Ji Air General Denkibarrieter E Image Mode 48 724 Bit Color a Filter m Setting 4g Eit Calor oy J a oe mA M karan 8 it Drini Seale X Dan pest ok Tm Ye d it 3 5 x Q TacRee Screen Miye
432. xel zo0 dpi Image after import with priority exact size 10x15 cm The right size of the image shows that a small strip of the image has been cropped automatically Quick and easy Image Cropping by Using Key Shortcuts There is an even faster alternative to the regular cropping mode using key shortcuts he image can be cropped directly while cropping mode is deactivated by pressing the A t key while click dragging the frame or corner of an image he image can be cropped symmetrically while cropping mode is deactivated by pressing the A t and Shift key while click dragging the frame or corner of an image Dragging the frame will move the opposite frame edge accordingly Dragging the corner of a frame edge will move all corners of the frame symmetrically on S Prine B 5 XJXIY 58 412 150 fem 1729 x 2304 Pixel A 390 dpi Reestablish the original proportions by Alt upon corner X X Y 58 84 10 2 e 1295 x 1559 Pixel Cropping by Alt upon corner tn Pee SS PrirTan B pel I Ma pgi XJXJY 58 6 8 5o n 1038 x 2304 Pixel i 390 dpi Symmetrical cropping by Alt Shift upon the edges Please note that the input box for the image settings X Y will display the actual dimension at all times 304 6 11 SilverFas
433. y scanner can profit from this method which as a result enhances the usable dynamic range showing scans with nice shadow details Another benefit is that with a much cleaner scan so much more Unsharp Masking can be applied for a crisper image without pronouncing the noise artefacts since they are gone Multi sampling can be activated with its own button The number of scans per scan frame can be 1 4 8 or 16 the number depends on the scanner A small number in the button will show the number of sample scans Please note that the entire scan time increases N proportionally to the number of sample scans Only a few scanners use the multi sampling while the CCD is not moving The scanner stops and reads the CCD more than once according to the preset number of sampling scans The advantage lies in the faster speed not much longer than a standard scan but there is also perfect precision of register In general there is no loss of sharpness with this method SilverFast Manual 6 6 Multisampling 217 218 6 6 Multisampling SilverFast Manual NegaFix i t AI ORO Gl Ot ad Positive v Negative Pos Neg Which versions of SilverFast con tain NegaFix SilverFast SE contains merely a simplified dialogue SilverFast DC SE and DCVLT versions do not contain this feature Auto tolerance slider and expert dialogue The slider is available only in the SilverFastAi DCPro and HDR full v
434. y use 42 bit incorporate your adjustments and create a standard 24 bit output The selection Greyscale indicates the output of a black white halftone image file with a correspondingly fine dif ferentiation of grey tone levels The selection 1 bit line art indicates the scan with pixels of only pure white and pure black values SilverFast Manual 3 Presets 1 With some scanners SilverFastAi is able to deliver not only standard 24 bit of data but also the entire internal information of the hardware s capable colour depth This can be 36 bit 42 bit or more depending on the hardware used However as computer programs only understand 8 or 16 bit of data per colour channel the next higher output format must be chosen If the hardware data internal colour depth is less than 48 bit the gap is filled with zero values in order to meet the required 48 bit data depth A NOTE that 48 bit files are twice the size of standard 24 bit files Scan Type EPS ey SilverFast offers the output of 48 bit files as pure uncorrected 14 gt 8 Bit Grayscale raw data format pee ete The corresponding selections for this kind of data are 16 Bit Grayscale 48 bit HDR colour and 16 bit HDR greyscale These two selections will deliver the raw data read by the l6 Bit HDR Grayscale hardware as is unchanged as RGB file in uncompressed TIFF format The only available software controls Qe la y
435. you do can be undone Never do you do anything to the final image until you hit the Scan button SilverFast Manual 4 Prescan concept 83 SilverFast Prescan Design The following advantages of the prescan design are clearly orient ed for productivity and ease of control 1 Saved Prescan for Reflective and for Transparency SilverFast can retain all parameters from multiple scan frames when scanning both reflective and transparency All parameters inside a scan frame are automatically stored and can be reload ed at any time O SilverFast v6 0 1r30 SilverFast Ai amp iv Ob als eee ee eee ___z General Frame Densitometer SilverFast FS 4000 Scan Type 48 224 Bit H4 Filter Sharpen USM kr Setting Save b d Image Type Standard E Name PCs Original Scale Output CP 56 1000 3 fla 56 lt b 3 8 00 0 fla se Q Factor Screen Mbyte 1 5 157 Ipem 21 72 E ________n 600 E Ea IM Ra Gm 9 jA lw E PA B6 9 4 9 m f f gt Prescan Scan RGB 4 Prescan concept SilverFast Manual Attention Please check when Auto Frame Inset under Options Auto is set to O scan frames have to be inside the image itself so that no insignificant parts of the border or outside of the image influence the result of the Auto Adjust Otherwise you will have wrong highlights or shadows values Aft
436. zoom Correc tions can be made at any time on the zoomed frame In order to return to the original prescan window click the magnifying glass in the tool bar again The Zoom tool will act as a Toggle switch Aborting Prescan With Command Period PC Ctrl Period you can abort the prescan at any time The previously scanned image remains High Resolution Prescan In order to process work more quickly with SilverFast a prescan can be selected besides which has a resolution that is up to eight times greater than actually necessary for a normal prescan The high resolution prescan is activated in the General palette under the Options dialogue 5 Delaults k n Te Densitemeter ae High resolution prescan v4 1x i Auto Special 2X 3x gt Colomiidel RGB E Options ica linita of Measure ieh a l z Se Densirnenerer Radius 2 Pixel H Delauli Sewing SilverFast Defaults Hd 6x Dpti nPar imeter Save zx 7x loterpolation SilverFast Srandard EZ 8x High rewnlarninn pnrewarn TH Srah dik kangsi Amnpla a pue aor Prescan f Scan RGB f Quit u Keser ral a aa E Gama in HDR d ta 00 p Facer i Reopen AF alter pram Realime Carrextiun E Mask Edot Size 0 Apply Cancel f OK 184 5 7 Zoom SilverFast Manual magnifying glass SilverFast can retrieve data that is already available and i

document: Manual, complete

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents